|
|
| Line 16: |
Line 16: |
|
| |
|
| =Text= | | =Text= |
| {{#Wiki_filter:WBN TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page 4.0 REACTOR 4.1-1 4.1 | | {{#Wiki_filter:}} |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| DESCRIPTION 4.1-1 References 4.1-3 4.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN 4.2-1 4.2.1 Fuel 4.2-2 4.2.1.1 Design Bases 4.2-2 4.2.1.1.1 Fuel Rods 4.2-2 4.2.1.1.2 Fuel Assembly Structure 4.2-3 4.2.1.2 Design Description 4.2-5 4.2.1.2.1 Fuel Rods 4.2-5 4.2.1.2.2 Fuel Assembly Structure 4.2-6 4.2.1.3 Design Evaluation 4.2-9 4.2.1.3.1 Fuel Rods 4.2-9 4.2.1.3.2 Fuel Assembly Structure 4.2-16 4.2.1.3.3 Operational Experience 4.2-17 4.2.1.3.4 Test Rod and Test Assembly Experience 4.2-17 4.2.1.3.5 Evaluation of the Reactor Core for Limiting LOCA Load -
| |
| Accumulator Line Break 4.2-17 4.2.1.4 Tests and Inspections 4.2-18 4.2.1.4.1 Quality Assurance Program 4.2-18 4.2.1.4.2 Quality Control 4.2-18 4.2.1.4.3 Tests and Inspections by Others 4.2-21 4.2.1.4.4 Onsite Inspection 4.2-21 4.2.2 Reactor Vessel Internals 4.2-21 4.2.2.1 Design Bases 4.2-21 4.2.2.2 Description and Drawings 4.2-22 4.2.2.3 Design Loading Conditions 4.2-25 4.2.2.4 Design Loading Categories 4.2-26 4.2.2.5 Design Criteria Basis 4.2-27 4.2.3 Reactivity Control System 4.2-27 4.2.3.1 Design Bases 4.2-27 4.2.3.1.1 Design Stresses 4.2-27 4.2.3.1.2 Material Compatibility 4.2-28 4.2.3.1.3 Reactivity Control Components 4.2-28 4.2.3.1.4 Control Rod Drive Mechanisms 4.2-29 4.2.3.2 Design Description 4.2-30 4.2.3.2.1 Reactivity Control Components 4.2-32 4.2.3.2.2 Control Rod Drive Mechanism (CRDM) 4.2-36 4.2.3.3 Design Evaluation 4.2-40 4.2.3.3.1 Reactivity Control Components 4.2-40 4.2.3.3.2 Control Rod Drive Mechanism 4.2-49 4.2.3.4 Tests, Verification, and Inspections 4.2-52 4-i
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page 4.2.3.4.1 Reactivity Control Components 4.2-52 4.2.3.4.2 Control Rod Drive Mechanisms 4.2-53 4.2.3.5 Instrumentation Applications 4.2-55 4.2.4 Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rods - Tritium Production Core 4.2-56 References 4.2-57 4.3 NUCLEAR DESIGN 4.3-1 4.3.1 Design Bases 4.3-1 4.3.1.1 Fuel Burnup 4.3-2 4.3.1.2 Negative Reactivity Feedbacks (Reactivity Coefficient) 4.3-2 4.3.1.3 Control of Power Distribution 4.3-3 4.3.1.4 Maximum Controlled Reactivity Insertion Rate 4.3-4 4.3.1.5 Shutdown Margins With Vessel Head in Place 4.3-4 4.3.1.6 Shutdown Margin For Refueling 4.3-5 4.3.1.7 Stability 4.3-6 4.3.1.8 Anticipated Transients Without Trip 4.3-6 4.3.2 Description 4.3-7 4.3.2.1 Nuclear Design Description 4.3-7 4.3.2.2 Power Distributions 4.3-8 4.3.2.2.1 Definitions 4.3-8 4.3.2.2.2 Radial Power Distributions 4.3-11 4.3.2.2.3 Assembly Power Distributions 4.3-11 4.3.2.2.4 Axial Power Distribution 4.3-12 4.3.2.2.5 Limiting Power Distributions 4.3-13 4.3.2.2.6 Experimental Verification of Power Distribution Analysis 4.3-17 4.3.2.2.7 Testing 4.3-21 4.3.2.2.8 Monitoring Instrumentation 4.3-22 4.3.2.3 Reactivity Coefficients 4.3-22 4.3.2.3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Coefficient 4.3-23 4.3.2.3.2 Moderator Coefficients 4.3-23 4.3.2.3.3 Power Coefficient 4.3-25 4.3.2.3.4 Comparison of Calculated and Experimental Reactivity Coefficients 4.3-25 4.3.2.3.5 Reactivity Coefficients Used in Transient Analysis 4.3-25 4.3.2.4 Control Requirements 4.3-26 4.3.2.4.1 Doppler 4.3-26 4.3.2.4.2 Variable Average Moderator Temperature 4.3-27 4.3.2.4.3 Redistribution 4.3-27 4.3.2.4.4 Void Content 4.3-27 4.3.2.4.5 Rod Insertion Allowance 4.3-27 4.3.2.4.6 Burnup 4.3-28 4.3.2.4.7 Xenon and Samarium Concentrations 4.3-28 4.3.2.4.8 pH Effects 4.3-28 4.3.2.4.9 Experimental Confirmation 4.3-28 4.3.2.5 Control 4.3-28 4.3.2.5.1 Chemical Shim 4.3-29 4.3.2.5.2 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies 4.3-29 4-ii
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page 4.3.2.5.3 Burnable Absorbers 4.3-30 4.3.2.5.4 Peak Xenon Startup 4.3-30 4.3.2.5.5 Load Follow Control and Xenon Control 4.3-30 4.3.2.5.6 Burnup 4.3-30 4.3.2.6 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worth 4.3-30 4.3.2.7 Criticality of Fuel Assemblies 4.3-32 4.3.2.8 Stability 4.3-37 4.3.2.8.1 Introduction 4.3-37 4.3.2.8.2 Stability Index 4.3-38 4.3.2.8.3 Prediction of the Core Stability 4.3-38 4.3.2.8.4 Stability Measurements 4.3-39 4.3.2.8.5 Comparison of Calculations with Measurements 4.3-40 4.3.2.8.6 Stability Control and Protection 4.3-41 4.3.2.9 Vessel Irradiation 4.3-42 4.3.3 Analytical Methods 4.3-43 4.3.3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Calculations 4.3-43 4.3.3.2 Macroscopic Group Constants 4.3-44 4.3.3.3 Spatial Few-Group Diffusion Calculations 4.3-45 References 4.3-46 4.4 THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN 4.4-1 4.4.1 Design Bases 4.4-1 4.4.1.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Design Basis 4.4-1 4.4.1.2 Fuel Temperature Design Basis 4.4-3 4.4.1.3 Core Flow Design Basis 4.4-3 4.4.1.4 Hydrodynamic Stability Design Bases 4.4-3 4.4.1.5 Other Considerations 4.4-4 4.4.2 Description 4.4-4 4.4.2.1 Summary Comparison 4.4-4 4.4.2.2 Fuel and Cladding Temperatures 4.4-4 4.4.2.2.1 UO2 Thermal Conductivity 4.4-5 4.4.2.2.2 Radial Power Distribution in UO2 Fuel Rods 4.4-6 4.4.2.2.3 Gap Conductance 4.4-6 4.4.2.2.4 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients 4.4-7 4.4.2.2.5 Fuel Clad Temperatures 4.4-7 4.4.2.2.6 Treatment of Peaking Factors 4.4-7 4.4.2.3 Critical Heat Flux Ratio or Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio and Mixing Technology 4.4-7 4.4.2.3.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Technology 4.4-8 4.4.2.3.2 Definition of Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio 4.4-10 4.4.2.3.3 Mixing Technology 4.4-11 4.4.2.3.4 Hot Channel Factors 4.4-13 4.4.2.3.5 Effects of Rod Bow on DNBR 4.4-14 4.4.2.3.6 Transition Core 4.4-14 4-iii
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page 4.4.2.4 Flux Tilt Considerations 4.4-15 4.4.2.5 Void Fraction Distribution 4.4-16 4.4.2.6 DELETED 4.4.2.7 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads 4.4-16 4.4.2.7.1 Core Pressure Drops 4.4-16 4.4.2.7.2 Hydraulic Loads 4.4-16 4.4.2.8 Correlation and Physical Data 4.4-17 4.4.2.8.1 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients 4.4-17 4.4.2.8.2 Total Core and Vessel Pressure Drop 4.4-18 4.4.2.8.3 Void Fraction Correlation 4.4-19 4.4.2.9 Thermal Effects of Operational Transients 4.4-19 4.4.2.10 Uncertainties in Estimates 4.4-19 4.4.2.10.1 Uncertainties in Fuel and Clad Temperatures 4.4-19 4.4.2.10.2 Uncertainties in Pressure Drops 4.4-20 4.4.2.10.3 Uncertainties Due to Inlet Flow Maldistribution 4.4-20 4.4.2.10.4 Uncertainties in DNB Correlation 4.4-20 4.4.2.10.5 Uncertainties in DNBR Calculations 4.4-20 4.4.2.10.6 Uncertainties in Flow Rates 4.4-21 4.4.2.10.7 Uncertainties in Hydraulic Loads 4.4-21 4.4.2.10.8 Uncertainties in Mixing Coefficient 4.4-21 4.4.2.11 Plant Configuration Data 4.4-21 4.4.3 Evaluation 4.4-22 4.4.3.1 Core Hydraulics 4.4-22 4.4.3.1.1 Flow Paths Considered in Core Pressure Drop and Thermal Design 4.4-22 4.4.3.1.2 Inlet Flow Distributions 4.4-23 4.4.3.1.3 Empirical Friction Factor Correlations 4.4-23 4.4.3.2 Influence of Power Distribution 4.4-24 4.4.3.2.1 Nuclear Enthalphy Rise Hot Channel Factor FNH 4.4-24 4.4.3.2.2 Axial Heat Flux Distributions 4.4-25 4.4.3.3 Core Thermal Response 4.4-26 4.4.3.4 Analytical Techniques 4.4-26 4.4.3.4.1 Core Analysis 4.4-26 4.4.3.4.2 Fuel Temperatures 4.4-28 4.4.3.4.3 Hydrodynamic Instability 4.4-28 4.4.3.5 Hydrodynamic and Flow Power Coupled Instability 4.4-28 4.4.3.6 Temperature Transient Effects Analysis 4.4-30 4.4.3.7 Potentially Damaging Temperature Effects During Transients 4.4-31 4.4.3.8 Energy Release During Fuel Element Burnout 4.4-31 4.4.3.9 Deleted 4.4-32 4.4.3.10 Fuel Rod Behavior Effects from Coolant Flow Blockage 4.4-32 4.4.4 Testing and Verification 4.4-33 4.4.4.1 Tests Prior to Initial Criticality 4.4-33 4.4.4.2 Initial Power and Plant Operation 4.4-34 4-iv
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page 4.4.4.3 Component and Fuel Inspections 4.4-34 4.4.5 Instrumentation Application 4.4-34 4.4.5.1 Incore Instrumentation 4.4-34 4.4.5.2 Overtemperature and Overpower T Instrumentation 4.4-35 4.4.5.3 Instrumentation to Limit Maximum Power Output 4.4-35 References 4.4-36 4-v
| |
| | |
| WBN LIST OF TABLES Number Title 4.1-1 Reactor Design Comparison Table 4.1-2 Analytic Techniques in Core Design 4.1-3 Design Loading Conditions For Reactor Core Components 4.3-1 Reactor Core Description (First Cycle) 4.3-2 Nuclear Design Parameters (First Cycle) 4.3-3 Reactivity Requirements for Rod Cluster Control Assemblies 4.3-4 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.3-5 Axial Stability Index For a Pressurized Water Reactor Core with a 12-Foot Active Core Height 4.3-6 Typical Neutron Flux Levels (n/cm2 -sec) at Full Power 4.3-7 Comparison of Measured and Calculated Doppler Defects 4.3-8 Saxton Core II Isotopics Rod MY, Axial Zone 6 4.3-9 Critical Boron Concentrations, HZP, BOL 4.3-10 Comparison of Measured and Calculated Rod Worth 4.3-11 Comparison of Measured and Calculated Moderator Coefficients at HZP, BOL 4.3.12 Spent Fuel Storage Rack Design Basis Fuel Assembly Specification 4.4-1 Thermal and Hydraulic Comparison Table 4.4-2 Void Fractions at Nominal Reactor Conditions With Design Hot Channel Factors 4-vi
| |
| | |
| WBN LIST OF FIGURES Number Title 4.2-1 Fuel Assembly Cross Section 17 x 17 STD, P+, AIRLO+2, RFA-2 4.2-2 17 x 17 Vantage 5H Recage Fuel Assembly 4.2-2a 17 x 17 V+/P+ ZIRLO 4.2-2b 17 x 17 STD P+ ZIRLO 4.2-2c Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 STD P+, ZIRLO+2 4.2-2d Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 STD, P+, ZIRLO+2, RFA-2 4.2-2e Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 STD, WIN, P+, ZIRLO+2, RFA-2 4.2-3 Fuel Rod Schematic (Typical) 4.2-4 Mid Grid and IFM Expansion Joint Design 4.2-5 Elevation View of IFM and Mid Grid Guide Thimble Joint 4.2-6 Guide Thimble to Bottom Nozzle Joint 4.2-6a Guide Thimble to Bottom Nozzle Joint (with P-grid) 4.2-7 Top Grid to Nozzle Attachment 4.2-8 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.2-9 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.2-10 Lower Core Support Assembly (Core Barrel Assembly) 4.2-11 Upper Core Support Structure 4.2-12 Support Column 4.2-13 Plan View of Upper Core Support Structure 4.2-14 Full Length Rod Cluster Control and Drive Rod Assembly with Interfacing Components 4.2-15 Rod Cluster Control Assembly Outline 4.2-16 Hybrid Absorber Rod Assembly 4-vii
| |
| | |
| WBN LIST OF FIGURES Number Title 4.2-17 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.2-18 Burnable Absorber Assembly (Typical) 4.2-19 Burnable Absorber (Pyrex) Rod Assembly 4.2-19A Wet Annular Burnable Absorber 4.2-19B Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod 4.2-19C Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod 4.2-19D Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod Lead Use Assembly 4.2-20 Pyrex and Primary Source Assembly (Typical) 4.2-21 Encapsulated Secondary Source Assembly (Typical) 4.2-22 Thimble Plug Assembly 4.2-23 Full Length Control Rod Drive Mechanism 4.2-24 Full Length Control Rod Drive Mechanism Schematic 4.2-25 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.2-26 Nominal Latch Clearance at Minimum and Maximum Temperature 4.2-27 Control Rod Drive Mechanism Latch Clearance Thermal Effect 4.2-28 Schematic Representation of Reactor Core Model 4.3-1 Fuel Loading Arrangement, Cycle 1 4.3-2 Typical Production and Consumption of Higher Isotopes 4.3-3 Typical Boron Concentration versus First Cycle Burnup With and Without Burnable Absorber Rods 4.3-4a Burnable Absorber Rod Arrangement within an Assembly, Cycle 1 4.3-4b Burnable Absorber Rod Arrangement within an Assembly, Cycle 1 4.3-5 Burnable Absorber Loading Pattern, Cycle 1 4-viii
| |
| | |
| WBN LIST OF FIGURES Number Title 4.3-6 Normalized Power Density Distribution at Beginning of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, No Xenon for Cycle 1 4.3-7 Normalized Power Density Distribution at Beginning of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon for Cycle 1 4.3-8 Normalized Power Density Distribution at Beginning of Life, Bank D 17% Inserted, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon for Cycle 1 4.3-9 Normalized Power Density Distribution at Middle of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon for Cycle 1 4.3-10 Normalized Power Density Distribution at End of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon for Cycle 1 4.3-11 Normalized Power Density Distribution at End of Life, Bank D 17% Inserted, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon for Cycle 1 4.3-12 Rodwise Power Distribution in a Typical Assembly Near Beginning of Life, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon, Unrodded Core 4.3-13 Rodwise Power Distribution in a Typical Assembly Near End of Life, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon, Unrodded Core 4.3-14 Typical Axial Power Shapes Occurring at Beginning of Life 4.3-15 Typical Axial Power Shapes Occurring at Middle of Life 4.3-16 Typical Axial Power Shapes Occurring at End of Life 4.3-17 Comparison of Assembly Axial Power Distribution With Core Average Axial Distribution, Bank D Slightly Inserted, Typical 4.3-18 Deleted in Initial Updated FSAR 4.3-19 Deleted in Initial Updated FSAR 4.3-20 Deleted in Initial Updated FSAR 4.3-21 Normalized Maximum FQ x Power Versus Axial Height During Normal Operation 4.3-22 Peak Linear Power During Control Rod Malfunction Overpower Transients 4.3-23 Peak Linear Power During Boration/Dilution Overpower Transients (Typical) 4.3-24 Comparison Between Calculated and Measured Relative Fuel Assembly Power Distribution (Typical) 4.3-25 Comparison of Calculated and Measured Axial Shape (Typical) 4.3-26 Measured Values of FQ for Full Power Rod Configurations (Typical) 4.3-27 Doppler Temperature Coefficient at BOL and EOL Cycle 1, (Typical) 4-ix
| |
| | |
| WBN LIST OF FIGURES Number Title 4.3-28 Doppler - Only Power Coefficient - BOL, EOL, Cycle 1, (Typical) 4.3-29 Doppler Only Power Defect - BOL, EOL, Cycle 1, (Typical) 4.3-30 Moderator Temperature Coefficient - BOL, Cycle 1, No Rods, (Typical) 4.3-31 Moderator Temperature Coefficient - EOL, Cycle 1, (Typical) 4.3-32 Moderator Temperature Coefficient as a Function of Boron Concentration - BOL Cycle 1, No Rods, (Typical) 4.3-33 Moderator Temperature Coefficient During Cycle 1 at HFP, ARO Equilibrium Xenon, Critical Boron Condition, Typical 4.3-34 Total Power Coefficient - BOL, EOL, Cycle 1, (Typical) 4.3-35 Total Power Defect BOL, EOL, Cycle 1, Typical 4.3-36 Rod Cluster Control Assembly Pattern 4.3-37 Accidental Simultaneous Withdrawal of Two Control Banks EOL, HZP, Banks D and B Moving in the Same Plane, (Typical) 4.3-38 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.3-39 Deleted in initial UFSAR 4.3-40 Axial Offset versus Time PWR Core with a 12 ft. Height and 121 Assemblies 4.3-41 XY Xenon Test Thermocouple Response Quadrant Tilt Difference versus Time 4.3-42 Calculated and Measured Doppler Defect and Coefficients at BOL Two-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies, 12-foot Core 4.3-43 Comparison of Calculated and Measured Boron Concentration for 2-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies, 12-foot Core 4.3-44 Comparison of Calculated and Measured CB 2-Loop with 121 Assemblies, 12-Foot Core 4-x
| |
| | |
| 4.3-45 Comparison of Calculated and Measured CB in 3-Loop Plant, 157 Assemblies, 12-Foot Core 4.3-46 Minimum Required Burnup for Unrestricted Storage of Spent Fuel of Various Initial Enrichments.
| |
| 4.3-47 Minimum Required Burnup for 2x2 Checkerboard Arrangement of 2 Spent Fuel Assemblies with 2 New Fuel Assemblies of 5% Enrichments (Maximum).r 4.4-1 Thermal Conductivity of U02 (Data Corrected to 95% Theoretical Density) 4.4-2 Comparison of Measured versus Predicted Critical Heat Flux for the WRB-1 Correlation 4.4-2a Comparison of Measured versus Predicted Critical Heat Flux for the WRB-2M Correlation 4.4-3 TDC versus Reynolds Number for 26" Grid Spacing 4.4-4 Distribution of In-Core Instrumentation 4.4-5 Typical DNBR Evaluation of 100% Power Shapes at Conditions Representative of Loss of Flow 4-xi
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.0 REACTOR 4.1
| |
| | |
| ==SUMMARY==
| |
| DESCRIPTION This chapter describes 1) the mechanical components of the reactor and reactor core including the fuel rods and fuel assemblies, reactor internals, and the control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs), 2) the nuclear design, and 3) the thermal-hydraulic design.
| |
| The reactor core is comprised of an array of fuel assemblies which are similar in mechanical design, but different in fuel enrichment. The reference design described herein employs three enrichments in a three-region core, whereas more enrichments may be employed for a particular refueling scheme.
| |
| The initial fuel design in the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant was the 17 x 17 VANTAGE 5H design with Standard (STD) fuel rods. The discussion in this chapter refers to this design as the V5H fuel.
| |
| Starting in Cycle 2 with Region 4, the fresh fuel used was the Vantage + design with Performance+ features, which is referred to as V+/P+ fuel. Commencing with Region 8 for Cycle 6, the reload cores used the second generation Robust Fuel Assembly design, which is referred to as RFA-2 fuel.
| |
| The mechanical design features of the V+/P+ fuel include the following: integral fuel burnable absorbers (IFBA), reconstitutable top nozzle (RTN), debris filter bottom nozzle (DFBN),
| |
| extended burnup capability, axial blankets, and an advanced zirconium alloy known as ZIRLO for fuel cladding and many structural components.
| |
| The significant new mechanical features of the RFA-2 fuel design relative to the V+/P+ fuel design include the use of three Intermediate Flow Mixer (IFM) grids, thicker-walled guide thimble and instrumentation tubes, Westinghouse Integral Nozzle (WIN), and a modified structural mid-grid design.
| |
| The core is cooled and moderated by light water at a pressure of 2,250 psia in the Reactor Coolant System. The moderator coolant contains boron as a neutron absorber. The concentration of boron in the coolant is varied as required to control relatively slow reactivity changes including the effects of fuel burnup. Additional boron, in the form of burnable absorber rods, is employed as needed to decrease the moderator temperature coefficient and to control the power distribution.
| |
| Two hundred and sixty-four STD fuel rods are mechanically joined in a square array to form a fuel assembly. The fuel rods are supported in intervals along their length by grid assemblies which maintain the lateral spacing between the rods throughout the design life of the assembly.
| |
| The grid assembly consists of an "egg-crate" arrangement of interlocked straps. The straps contain spring fingers and dimples for fuel rod support as well as coolant mixing vanes. The fuel rods consist of slightly enriched uranium dioxide ceramic cylindrical pellets contained in slightly cold worked Zircaloy-4 or ZIRLO tubing which is plugged and seal welded at the ends to encapsulate the fuel. An axial blanket of natural or low enriched uranium fuel pellets may be placed at each end of the fuel stack to reduce neutron leakage and improve fuel utilization.
| |
| Annular axial blanket (which may be natural, mid-enriched or fully-enriched) may be used. The annular axial blanket pellets are used to increase the void volume for gas accommodation within the fuel rod. All fuel rods are pressurized with helium during fabrication to reduce stresses and strains to increase fatigue life.
| |
| 4.1-1
| |
| | |
| WBN The center position in the assembly is reserved for the incore instrumentation, while the remaining 24 positions in the array are equipped with guide thimbles joined to the grids and the top and bottom nozzles. Depending upon the position of the assembly in the core, the guide thimbles are used as channels for insertion of rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs), neutron source assemblies, and burnable absorber rods. Otherwise, the guide thimbles are fitted with plugging devices to limit bypass flow.
| |
| The bottom nozzle is a box-like structure which serves as a bottom structural element of the fuel assembly and directs the coolant flow distribution to the assembly.
| |
| The top nozzle assembly functions as the upper structural element of the fuel assembly in addition to providing a partial protective housing for the RCCA or other components.
| |
| The RCCAs each consist of a group of individual neutron absorber rods fastened at the top end to a common hub or spider assembly. These assemblies contain full length neutron absorber material to control the reactivity of the core under operating conditions.
| |
| The CRDMs are of the magnetic jack type. Control rods are positioned by electro-mechanical (solenoid) action utilizing gripper latches, which engage grooved drive rods which in turn are coupled to the RCCAs. The CRDMs are so designed that upon a loss of electrical power to the coils, the RCCA is released and falls by gravity to shutdown the reactor.
| |
| The components of the reactor internals are divided into three parts consisting of the lower core support structure (including the entire core barrel and neutron shield pad assembly), the upper core support structure and the in-core instrumentation support structure. The reactor internals support the core, maintain fuel alignment, limit fuel assembly movement, maintain alignment between fuel assemblies and CRDMs, direct coolant flow past the fuel elements and to the pressure vessel head, provide gamma and neutron shielding, and provide guides for the incore instrumentation.
| |
| The nuclear design analyses and evaluation establish physical locations for control rods and burnable absorbers as well as physical parameters such as fuel enrichments and boron concentration in the coolant. This ensures that the reactor core has inherent characteristics which together with corrective actions of the reactor control and emergency cooling systems, provide adequate reactivity control. This control is maintained even if the highest reactivity worth RCCA is stuck in the fully withdrawn position (Stuck Rod Criterion).
| |
| The thermal-hydraulic design analyses and evaluation establish coolant flow parameters which assure that adequate heat transfer is provided between the fuel clad and the reactor coolant.
| |
| The thermal design takes into account local variations in dimensions, power generation, flow distribution and mixing. The mixing vanes incorporated in the fuel assembly spacer grid design induce additional flow mixing between the various flow channels within a fuel assembly as well as between adjacent assemblies.
| |
| Instrumentation is provided to monitor the nuclear, thermal-hydraulic, and mechanical performance of the reactor and to provide inputs to automatic control functions.
| |
| Table 4.1-1 presents comparison of the principal nuclear, thermal-hydraulic and mechanical design parameters between Watts Bar Units 1 and 2 and the W. B. McGuire Nuclear Station Units 1 and 2 (Docket Nos. 50-369 and 50-370).
| |
| 4.1-2
| |
| | |
| WBN The effects of fuel densification were evaluated with the methods described in Section 4.2.1.
| |
| The analysis techniques employed in the core design are tabulated in Table 4.1-2. The loading conditions considered in general for the core internals and components are tabulated in Table 4.1-3. Specific or limiting loads considered for design purposes of the various components are listed as follows: fuel assemblies in Section 4.2.1.1.2; reactor internals in Section 4.2.2.3 and Table 5.2-2; neutron absorber rods, burnable absorber rods, neutron source rods and thimble plug assemblies in Section 4.2.3.1.3; and CRDMs in Section 4.2.3.1.4. The dynamic analyses, input forcing functions, and response loadings are presented in Section 3.9.
| |
| REFERENCES None 4.1-3
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-1 (Sheet 1 of 4)
| |
| REACTOR DESIGN COMPARISON TABLE WATTS BAR WATTS BAR W.B. McGUIRE THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNITS 1 AND 2
| |
| : 1. Reactor Core Heat Output, MWt 3459 3411 3411
| |
| : 2. Reactor Core Heat Output, 106 BTU/hr 11,803 11,639 11,641.7
| |
| : 3. Heat Generated in Fuel, % 97.4 97.4 97.4
| |
| : 4. System Pressure, Nominal, psia 2250 2250 2250
| |
| : 5. System Pressure, Minimum Steady State, psia 2200 2200 2220
| |
| : 6. Minimum Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio for Design Typical cell >1.25 1.23 >1.30 Transients (V+/P+), 1.23 (RFA-2)
| |
| Thimble cell >1.24 (V+/P+), 1.23 (RFA-2)
| |
| COOLANT FLOW 6
| |
| : 7. Total Thermal Flow Rate, 10 1bm/hr 138.5 138.5 144.8 6
| |
| : 8. Effective Flow Rate for Heat Transfer, 10 lb/hr 125.22 125.2 133.9 2
| |
| : 9. Effective Flow Area for Heat Transfer, ft 51.1 51.1 51.1
| |
| : 10. Average Velocity Along Fuel Rods, ft/sec 14.7 14.7 16.6 6 2
| |
| : 11. Average Mass Velocity, 10 lbm/hr-ft 2.45 2.45 2.62 COOLANT TEMPERATURE, °F
| |
| : 12. Nominal Inlet 557.3 557.8 559.1
| |
| : 13. Average Rise in Vessel 61.8 60.8 58.2
| |
| : 14. Average Rise in Core 67.5 66.5 62.5
| |
| : 15. Average in Core 593.1 593.0 592.0
| |
| : 16. Average in Vessel 588.2 588.2 588.2 HEAT TRANSFER 2
| |
| : 17. Active Heat Transfer, Surface Area, ft 59,700 59,700 59,700 2
| |
| : 18. Average Heat Flux, BTU/hr-ft 192,500 189,800 189,800 2
| |
| : 19. Maximum Heat Flux for Normal Operation, BTU/hr-ft 481,300 474,500 440,300
| |
| : 20. Average Thermal Output, kW/ft 5.52 (c) 5.45(C) 5.44
| |
| : 21. Maximum Thermal Output for Normal Operation, kW/ft 13.8 13.6 12.6
| |
| : 22. Peak Linear Power for Determination of Protection Setpoints 22.4 (a) 22.4 (a) 18.0 (a) kW/ft
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-1 (Sheet 2 of 4)
| |
| REACTOR DESIGN COMPARISON TABLE WATTS BAR WATTS BAR W.B. McGUIRE THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNITS 1 AND 2 (e) (e) (b)
| |
| : 23. Heat Flux Hot Channel Factor, FQ 2.5 2.4 2.32
| |
| : 24. Peak Fuel Central Temperature at 100% Power,°F 3290 <3290 3250
| |
| : 25. Peak Fuel Central Temperature at Maximum 4700 4700 4150
| |
| . Thermal Output for Maximum Overpower Trip Point, °F CORE MECHANICAL DESIGN PARAMETERS FUEL ASSEMBLIES
| |
| : 26. Design RCC Canless RCC Canless RCC Canless
| |
| : 27. Number of Fuel Assemblies 193 193 193
| |
| : 28. UO2 Rods per Assembly 264 264 264
| |
| : 29. Rod Pitch, in 0.496 0.496 0.496
| |
| : 30. Overall Dimensions, in 8.426 x 8.426 8.426 x 8.426 8.426 x 8.426
| |
| : 31. Fuel Weight (as UO2,)lb 222,645 222,645 222,739
| |
| : 32. Clad Weight, lb 46,994 46,994 50,913
| |
| : 33. Number of Grids per Assembly Grid Type V5 H V+/P+ RFA-2 8 - Type R Non-mixing vane 2 2 2 2 Mixing vane 6 6 6 6 P-Grid - 1 1 1 IFM - - 3 3
| |
| : 34. Loading Technique low-leakage Multiple region 3 region modified (up to 5) checkerboard FUEL RODS
| |
| : 35. Number 50,952 50,952 50,952
| |
| : 36. Outside diameter, in 0.374 0.374 0.374
| |
| : 37. Diametral Gap, in 0.0065 0.0065 0.0065
| |
| : 38. Clad Thickness, in 0.0225 0.0225 0.0225
| |
| : 39. Clad Material Zircaloy-4 (Regions 1, ZIRLO Zircaloy-4 2, or 3);
| |
| ZIRLO (Regions 4 and on)
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-1 (Sheet 3 of 4)
| |
| REACTOR DESIGN COMPARISON TABLE WATTS BAR WATTS BAR W.B. McGUIRE THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNITS 1 AND 2 FUEL PELLETS
| |
| : 40. Material UO2 Sintered UO2 Sintered UO2 Sintered
| |
| : 41. Density (% of Theoretical) 95 95 95
| |
| : 42. Diameter, in 0.3225 0.3225 0.3225
| |
| : 43. Fuel Pellet Length, Cycle 1, in. 0.530 0.5 0.530 Fuel Pellet Length, Cycle 2 and beyond, in. 0.387 Axial Blanket Pellet Length, Cycles 2, 3, and 4, in. 0.462 Axial Blanket Pellet Length, Cycle 5 and beyond, in. 0.5 Annular Pellet Length, Cycle 6 and beyond, in. 0.5 ROD CLUSTER CONTROL ASSEMBLIES
| |
| : 44. Neutron Absorber, Full Length Ag-In-Cd / B4C with Ag-In-Cd Ag-In-Cd Ag-In-Cd tips
| |
| : 45. Neutron Absorber, Part Length N/A N/A N/A
| |
| : 46. Cladding Material Type 304 Type 304 Type 304 SS-Cold Worked SS-Cold Worked SS-Cold Worked
| |
| : 47. Clad Thickness, in 0.0185/0.0385 0.0385 0.0185
| |
| : 48. Number of Full Length Clusters 57 57 53
| |
| : 49. Number of Absorber Rods per Cluster 24 24 24 CORE STRUCTURE
| |
| : 50. Core Barrel, I.D./O.D, in 148.0/152.5 148.0/152.5 148.0/152.5
| |
| : 51. Thermal Shield Neutron Pad Design Neutron Pad Design Neutron Pad Design
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-1 (Sheet 4 of 4)
| |
| REACTOR DESIGN COMPARISON TABLE WATTS BAR WATTS BAR W.B. McGUIRE THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 1 UNIT 2 UNITS 1 AND 2 STRUCTURE CHARACTERISTICS
| |
| : 52. Core Diameter, in (Equivalent) 132.7 132.7 132.7
| |
| : 53. Core Height, in (Active Fuel) 143.7 143.7 143.7 REFLECTOR THICKNESS AND COMPOSITION
| |
| : 54. Top - Water plus Steel, in ~10 ~10 ~10
| |
| : 55. Bottom - Water plus Steel, in ~10 ~10 ~10
| |
| : 56. Side - Water plus Steel in ~15 ~15 ~15 (d)
| |
| FEED ENRICHMENT, W/ O
| |
| : 57. Region 1 2.10 2.10
| |
| : 58. Region 2 2.60 2.60
| |
| : 59. Region 3 3.10 3.10 Notes:
| |
| : a. See Section 4.3.2.2.6
| |
| : b. This is the value of FQ for normal operation.
| |
| : c. Based on densified active fuel length (143.7 inches)
| |
| : d. Cycle 1
| |
| : e. See COLR for cycle specific value of FQ.
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 TABLE 4.1-2 (Sheet 1 of 3)
| |
| ANALYTIC TECHNIQUES IN CORE DESIGN Section Analysis Technique Computer Code Referenced Mechanical Design of Core Internals Loads, Deflections, and Static and Dynamic Blowdown code, 3.7.2.1 Stress Analysis Modeling FORCE, Finite 3.9.1 element structural 3.9.3 analysis code, and others Fuel Rod Design Semi-empirical thermal model of fuel rod with 4.2.1.3.1 Fuel Performance Characteristics consideration of fuel Westinghouse fuel 4.3.3.1 (temperature, internal pressure, density changes, heat rod design model 4.4.2.2 clad stress, etc.)
| |
| transfer, fission gas 4.4.3.4.2 release, etc.
| |
| Nuclear Design
| |
| : 1. Cross Sections and Group Microscopic data Modified ENDF/B 4.3.3.2 Constants Macroscopic constants library LEOPARD/ 4.3.3.2 for homogenized core CINDER type regions PHOENIX-P, PARAGON OR NEXUS/PARAGON Group constants for 4.3.3.2 control rods with NEXUS/PARAGON self-shielding
| |
| : 2. X-Y and X-Y-Z Power Distributions, 2-D and 3-D, 2-Group TURTLE 4.3.3.3 Fuel Depletion, Critical Boron Diffusion Theory PALADON (2D OR Concentrations, X-Y and X-Y-Z 3D)
| |
| Xenon Distributions, Reactivity ANC (2D OR 3D)
| |
| Coefficients THURTLE
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-2 (Sheet 2 of 3)
| |
| ANALYTIC TECHNIQUES IN CORE DESIGN Section Analysis Technique Computer Code Referenced Nuclear Design (Continued) 1-D, 2-Group Diffusion APOLLO 4.3.3.3
| |
| : 3. Axial Power Distributions, Theory Control Rod Worths, and Axial Xenon Distribution
| |
| : 4. Fuel Rod Power Integral Transport LASER 4.3.3.1 Theory
| |
| : 5. Effective Resonance Monte Carlo Weighting REPAD Temperature Function Thermal-Hydraulic Design Subchannel analysis of 4.4.3.4.1
| |
| : 1. Steady-state local fluid conditions VIPRE-01 (UNIT 1) in rod bundles, including inertial and cross flow VIPRE (UNIT 2) resistance terms, solution is based on a one-pass model which simulates the core. (Unit 1)
| |
| Subchannel analysis of local fluid conditions in rod bundles, including inertial and cross flow resistance terms, solution progresses from core-wide to hot assembly to hot channel.
| |
| (Unit 2)
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-2 (Sheet 3 of 3)
| |
| ANALYTIC TECHNIQUES IN CORE DESIGN Section Analysis Technique Computer Code Referenced
| |
| : 2. Transient Departure from Subchannel analysis of 4.4.3.4.1 Nucleate Boiling Analysis local fluid conditions VIPRE-01 (UNIT 1) in rod bundles during VIPRE (UNIT 2) transients by including accumulation terms in conservation equations; solution is based on a one-pass model which simulates the core, including the hot assembly and hot subchannel. (Unit 1)
| |
| Subchannel analysis of local fluid conditions in rod bundles during transients by including accumulation terms in conservation equations; solution is based on a five-channel model which simulated the whole core, including the got assembly and hot subchannel (Unit 2)
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.1-3 DESIGN LOADING CONDITIONS FOR REACTOR CORE COMPONENTS
| |
| : 1. Fuel Assembly Weight
| |
| : 2. Fuel Assembly Spring Forces
| |
| : 3. Internals Weight
| |
| : 4. Control Rod Trip (equivalent static load)
| |
| : 5. Differential Pressure
| |
| : 6. Spring Preloads
| |
| : 7. Coolant Flow Forces (static)
| |
| : 8. Temperature Gradients
| |
| : 9. Differences In Thermal Expansion
| |
| : a. Due to temperature differences
| |
| : b. Due to expansion of different materials
| |
| : 10. Interference Between Components
| |
| : 11. Vibration (mechanically or Hydraulically induced)
| |
| : 12. One Or More Loops Out Of Service
| |
| : 13. All Operational Transients Listed in Table 5.2-2
| |
| : 14. Pump Overspeed
| |
| : 15. Seismic Loads (operation basis earthquake and design basis earthquake)
| |
| : 16. Blowdown Forces (injection transients for the cold and hot leg break)
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN The plant conditions for design are divided into four categories in accordance with their anticipated frequency of occurrence and risk to the public: Condition I - Normal Operation and Operational Transients; Condition II - Faults of Moderate Frequency; Condition III - Infrequent Faults; Condition IV - Limiting Faults.
| |
| The reactor is designed so that its components meet the following performance and safety criteria:
| |
| : 1. The mechanical design of the reactor core components and their physical arrangement, together with corrective actions of the reactor control, protection and emergency cooling systems (when applicable) assure that:
| |
| : a. Fuel damage [As used here is defined as penetration of the fission product barrier (i.e., the fuel rod clad)], is not expected during Condition I and Condition II events. It is not possible, however, to preclude a very small number of rod failures. These are within the capability of the plant cleanup system and are consistent with plant design bases.
| |
| : b. The reactor can be brought to a safe state following a Condition III event with only a small fraction of fuel rods damaged although sufficient fuel damage might occur to preclude resumption of operation without considerable outage time.
| |
| : c. The reactor can be brought to a safe state and the core can be kept subcritical with acceptable heat transfer geometry following transients arising from Condition IV events.
| |
| : 2. The fuel assemblies are designed to accommodate expected conditions for handling during assembly inspection and refueling operations, and shipping loads.
| |
| : 3. The fuel assemblies are designed to accept control rod insertions in order to provide the required reactivity control for power operations and reactivity shutdown conditions.
| |
| : 4. All fuel assemblies have provisions for the insertion of incore instrumentation necessary for plant operation.
| |
| : 5. The reactor internals, in conjunction with the fuel assemblies, direct reactor coolant through the core to achieve acceptable flow distribution and to restrict bypass flow so that the heat transfer performance requirements can be met for all modes of operation.
| |
| In addition, the internals provide core support and distribute coolant flow to the pressure vessel head so that the temperature differences between the vessel flange and head do not result in leakage from the flange during the Condition I and II events. Required inservice inspection can be carried out as the internals are removable and provide access to the inside of the pressure vessel.
| |
| 4.2-1
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 4.2.1 Fuel 4.2.1.1 Design Bases The fuel rod and fuel assembly design bases are established to satisfy the general performance and safety criteria presented in Section 4.2 and specific criteria noted below. Design values for the properties of the materials which comprise the fuel rod, fuel assembly and incore control components are given in Reference [1] for Zircaloy clad and in Reference [31] for ZIRLO clad fuel. Other supplementary fuel design criteria/limits are given in Reference [32] and [37].
| |
| 4.2.1.1.1 Fuel Rods The integrity of the fuel rods is ensured by designing to prevent excessive fuel temperatures, excessive internal rod gas pressures due to fission gas releases, and excessive cladding stresses and strains. This is achieved by designing the fuel rods so that the following conservative design bases are satisfied during Condition I and Condition II events over the fuel lifetime:
| |
| : 1. Fuel Pellet Temperatures - The center temperature of the hottest pellet is to be below the melting temperature of the UO2 (melting point of 5,080°F[1] unirradiated and decreasing by 58°F per 10,000 MWD/MTU). While a limited amount of center melting can be tolerated, the design conservatively precludes center melting. A calculated fuel centerline temperature of 4700°F has been selected as an overpower limit to assure no fuel melting. This provides sufficient margin for uncertainties as described in Sections 4.4.1.2 and 4.4.2.10.l.
| |
| : 2. Internal Gas Pressure - The internal pressure of the lead rod (maximum internal pressure) in the reactor will be limited to a value below that which could cause, (1) the diametral gap to increase due to outward cladding creep during steady state operation and, (2) extensive DNB propagation to occur.
| |
| : 3. Clad Stress - The effective clad stress is less than that which would cause general yield of the clad. While the clad has some capability for accommodating plastic strain, the yield strength has been accepted as a conservative design basis limit.
| |
| Radial, tangential, and axial stress components due to pressure differential and fuel clad contact pressure are combined into an effective stress using the maximum-distortion-energy theory. The Von Mises criterion is used to evaluate if the yield strength has been exceeded. Von Mises criterion states that an isotropic material under multiaxial stress will begin to yield plastically when the effective stress (i.e., combined stress using maximum-distortion-energy theory) becomes equal to the material yield stress in simple tension as determined by a uniaxial tensile test. Since general yielding is to be prohibited, the volume average effective stress determined by integrating across the clad thickness is increased by an allowance for local non-uniformity effects before it is compared to the yield strength.
| |
| The yield strength correlation is appropriate for irradiated clad since the irradiated properties are attained at low exposure whereas the fuel/clad interaction conditions which can lead to minimum margin to the design basis limit always occurs at much higher exposure.
| |
| 4.2-2
| |
| | |
| WBN-1
| |
| : 4. Clad Tensile Strain - The clad tensile strain is less than 1%. This limit is consistent with proven practice.
| |
| : 5. Strain Fatigue - The cumulative strain fatigue cycles are less than the design strain fatigue life. This basis is consistent with proven practice.
| |
| The fuel rods are designed for extended burnup operation using the NRC approved Westinghouse extended burnup design methods, models and criteria in References [26], [27],
| |
| [31], [32], [33], [35] and [37]. The detailed fuel rod design establishes such parameters as pellet size and density, clad-pellet diametral gap, gas plenum size, and helium pre-pressure. The design also considers effects such as fuel density changes, fission gas release, clad creep, clad corrosion (oxidation and hydrogen pickup) and other physical properties which vary with burnup.
| |
| Irradiation testing and fuel operational experience has verified the adequacy of the fuel performance and design bases. This is discussed in References [2], [3], [27], and [31]. Fuel experience and testing results, as they become available, are used to improve fuel rod design and manufacturing processes and assure that the design bases and safety criteria are satisfied.
| |
| 4.2.1.1.2 Fuel Assembly Structure Structural integrity of the fuel assemblies is assured by setting limits on stresses and deformations due to various loads and by determining that the assemblies do not interfere with the functioning of other components. Three types of loads are considered.
| |
| : 1. Non-operational loads such as those due to shipping and handling.
| |
| : 2. Normal and abnormal loads which are defined for Conditions I and II.
| |
| : 3. Abnormal loads which are defined for Conditions III and IV.
| |
| These criteria are applied to the design and evaluation of the top and bottom nozzles, the guide thimbles, and grids and the thimble joints.
| |
| The design bases for evaluating the structural integrity of the fuel assemblies are:
| |
| : 1. Non-operational - dimensional stability, under specified g loading.
| |
| : 2. Normal Operation and Operational Transients (Condition I) and Faults of Moderate Frequency (Condition II).
| |
| For the normal operating and upset conditions (Conditions I and II, respectively), the fuel assembly component structural design criteria are classified into two material categories, namely austenitic steels and ZIRLO. The stress categories and strength theory presented in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, are used as a general guide. The maximum shear-theory (Tresca criterion) for combined stresses is used to determine the stress intensities for the austenitic steel components. The stress intensity is defined as the numerically largest difference between the various principal stresses in a three dimensional field. The design stress intensity value (Sm) for austenitic steels, such as nickel-chromium-iron alloys, is given by the lowest of the following:
| |
| 4.2-3
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : a. 1/3 of the specified minimum tensile strength or 2/3 of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature;
| |
| : b. 1/3 of the tensile strength or 90% of the yield strength at operating temperature but not to exceed 2/3 of the specified minimum yield strength at room temperature.
| |
| The stress intensity limits for the austenitic steel components are given below. All stress nomenclature is per the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III.
| |
| Stress Intensity Limits Categories Limit General Primary Membrane Stress Intensity Sm Local Primary Membrane Stress Intensity 1.5 Sm Primary Membrane plus Bending Stress Intensity 1.5 Sm Total Primary plus Secondary Stress Intensity 3.0 Sm The ZIRLO structural components which consist of guide thimbles, six inner grids, instrument tube, and fuel tubes are in turn subdivided into two categories because of material differences and functional requirements. The fuel tube design criteria is covered separately in Section 4.2.1.1.1. The maximum stress theory is also used to evaluate the guide thimble design. For conservative purposes, the ZIRLO unirradiated properties are used to define the stress limits.
| |
| : 3. Infrequent Faults (Condition III) and Limiting Faults (Condition IV).
| |
| Abnormal loads during Conditions III or IV - worst cases represented by combined seismic and blowdown loads.
| |
| : a. Deflections or failures of components cannot interfere with the reactor shutdown or emergency cooling of the fuel rods.
| |
| : b. The fuel assembly structural component stresses under faulted conditions are evaluated using primarily the methods outlined in Appendix F of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III. Since the current analytical methods utilize linear elastic analysis, the stress allowables are defined as the smaller value of 2.4 Sm or 0.70 Su for primary membrane and 3.6 Sm or 1.05 Su for primary membrane plus primary bending. For the austenitic steel fuel assembly components, the stress intensity is defined in accordance with the rules described in the previous section for normal operating conditions. For the ZIRLO components the stress intensity limits are set at two-thirds of the material yield strength, Sy, at reactor operating temperature. This results in ZIRLO stress intensity limits being the smaller of 1.6 Sy or 0.70 Su for primary membrane and 2.4 Sy or 1.05 Su for primary membrane plus bending. For conservative purposes, the ZIRLO unirradiated properties are used to define the stress limits.
| |
| 4.2-4
| |
| | |
| WBN The grid component strength criteria are based on experimental tests. The limit is established at Pc, where Pc is the experimental collapse load determined at the 95% confidence level on the true mean, as taken from the distribution of grid crush test measurements.
| |
| 4.2.1.2 Design Description The first cycle VANTAGE 5H fuel assembly [28] and fuel rod design data are given in Table 4.3-1.
| |
| Two hundred and sixty four fuel rods, twenty four guide thimble tubes, and one instrumentation thimble tube are arranged within a supporting structure to form a fuel assembly. The instrumentation thimble is located in the center position and provides a channel for insertion of an incore neutron detector, if the fuel assembly is located in an instrumented core position. The guide thimbles provide channels for insertion of either a rod cluster control assembly, a neutron source assembly, a burnable absorber assembly or a plugging device, depending on the position of the particular fuel assembly in the core. Figure 4.2-1 shows a cross-section of the fuel assembly array. Figure 4.2-2 shows the fuel assembly full length outline for the V5H fuel.
| |
| Figure 4.2-2a shows the assembly outline for the V+/P+ fuel which began with Cycles 2 and 3; Figure 4.2-2b shows the assembly outline for the V+/P+ (STD P+) fuel starting with Cycle 4; Figure 4.2-2c shows the assembly outline for the V+/P+ ZIRLO+2 fuel starting with Cycle 5 and Figure 4.2-2d shows the assembly outline for RFA-2 fuel starting with Cycle 6.
| |
| Figure 4.2.2e shows the assembly outline for RFA-2 fuel starting with Cycle 10.
| |
| Beginning with Cycle 8, RFA-2 fuel assemblies will have the alternative protective grid and the pre-oxidized fuel rod cladding on the bottom 6 to 7 inches. The fuel rods are loaded into the fuel assembly structure so that there is clearance between the fuel rod ends and the reconstitutable top nozzle (RTN) and debris filter bottom nozzle (DFBN).
| |
| Each fuel assembly is installed vertically in the reactor vessel and stands upright on the lower core plate, which is fitted with alignment pins to locate and orient the assembly. After all fuel assemblies are set in place, the upper support structure is installed. Alignment pins, built into the upper core plate, engage and locate the upper ends of the fuel assemblies. The upper core plate then bears downward against the fuel assembly top nozzle via the holddown springs to hold the fuel assemblies in place.
| |
| 4.2.1.2.1 Fuel Rods The fuel rods consist of uranium dioxide ceramic pellets contained in slightly cold worked ZIRLO tubing which is plugged and seal welded at the ends to encapsulate the fuel. The ZIRLO cladding is used for the V+/P+ and RFA-2 fuel in order to enhance fuel reliability and to achieve extended burnup. The ZIRLO may be pre-oxidized on the bottom portion of the fuel rod (beginning at the bottom endplug) for debris fretting resistance. Schematics of a typical fuel rod is shown in Figure 4.2-3. The fuel pellets are right circular cylinders consisting of slightly enriched uranium dioxide powder which has been compacted by cold pressing and then sintered to the required density. The ends of each pellet are dished slightly to allow greater axial expansion at the center of the pellets.
| |
| 4.2-5
| |
| | |
| WBN With the transition to the V+/P+ fuel, axial blanket regions may be added to the fuel rod design.
| |
| The axial blanket region is nominally 6 or 8 inches, of either natural or mid-enriched fuel pellets, located at the top and bottom of each fuel rod pellet stack. The axial blanket may also be either solid or annular in design. The natural or mid-enriched axial blankets reduce neutron leakage and improve fuel utilization. The annular blanket pellets are used to increase the void volume for gas accommodation within the fuel rod. The RFA-2 fuel may also use axial blanket pellets.
| |
| Commencing with Region 8 in Cycle 6, the annular axial blanket pellets in the RFA-2 fuel may be fully-enriched.
| |
| To avoid overstressing of the cladding or seal welds, void volume and clearances are provided within the rods to accommodate fission gases released from the fuel, differential thermal expansion between the cladding and the fuel, and fuel density changes during burnup. Shifting of the fuel within the cladding during handling or shipping prior to core loading is prevented by a stainless steel helical spring which bears on top of the fuel. During assembly the pellets are stacked in the cladding to the required fuel height, the spring is then inserted into the top end of the fuel tube and the end plugs pressed into the ends of the tube and welded. All fuel rods are internally pressurized with helium during the welding process in order to minimize compressive clad stresses and creep due to coolant operating pressures. The helium pre-pressurization may be different for each fuel region. Fuel rod pressurization is dependent on the planned fuel burnup as well as other fuel design parameters and fuel characteristics (particularly densification potential).
| |
| The fuel rods are designed such that (1) the internal gas pressure of the lead rod will not exceed the value which causes the fuel-clad diametral gap to increase due to outward cladding creep during steady state operation, (2) extensive DNB propagation will not occur, (3) the cladding stress-strain limits (Section 4.2.1.1.1) are not exceeded for Condition I and II events, and (4) clad flattening will not occur during the fuel core life.
| |
| 4.2.1.2.2 Fuel Assembly Structure The fuel assembly structure consists of a bottom nozzle, top nozzle, guide thimbles and grids.
| |
| Bottom Nozzle The debris filter bottom nozzle (DFBN) is a box-like structure which serves as a bottom structural element of the fuel assembly and directs the coolant flow distribution to the assembly.
| |
| The nozzle is designed to reduce the possibility of fuel rod damage attributed to debris-induced fretting. The square nozzle is fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel and consists of a perforated plate and four angle legs with bearing plates as shown in Figure 4.2-2. The legs form a plenum for the inlet coolant flow to the fuel assembly. The plate acts to prevent a downward ejection of the fuel rods from the fuel assembly. The bottom nozzle is fastened to the fuel assembly guide tubes by integral deformable locking cap screws which penetrate through the nozzle and mate with an inside fitting in each guide tube as shown in Figure 4.2-6.
| |
| Coolant flow through the fuel assembly is directed from the plenum in the bottom nozzle upward through the penetrations in the plate to the channels between the fuel rods. The penetrations in the plate are positioned between the rows of the fuel rods.
| |
| 4.2-6
| |
| | |
| WBN Axial loads (holddown) imposed on the fuel assembly and the weight of the fuel assembly are transmitted through the bottom nozzle to the lower core plate. Indexing and positioning of the fuel assembly is controlled by alignment holes in two diagonally opposite bearing plates which mate with locating pins in the lower core-plate. Any lateral loads on the fuel assembly are transmitted to the lower core plate through the locating pins.
| |
| Top Nozzle The top nozzle assembly functions as the upper structural element of the fuel assembly in addition to providing a partial protective housing for the rod cluster control assembly or other components. It consists of an adapter plate, enclosure, top plate, and pads. The top nozzle assembly has holddown springs mounted on the top plate as shown in Figure 4.2-2. The springs and bolts are made of Inconel whereas other components are made of Type 304L stainless steel.
| |
| The square adapter plate is provided with round and semi-circular ended slots to permit the flow of coolant upward through the top nozzle. The ligaments in the plate cover the tops of the fuel rods and prevent their upward ejection from the fuel assembly. The enclosure is a metal shroud which sets the distance between the adapter plate and the top plate. The top plate has a large square hole in the center to permit access for the control rods and the control rod spiders.
| |
| Holddown springs are mounted on the top plate and are fastened in place by bolts and clamps located at two diagonally opposite corners. On the other two corners, integral pads are positioned which contain alignment holes for locating the upper end of the fuel assembly.
| |
| In the Westinghouse Intergral Nozzle (WIN) design, a stainless steel nozzle insert is mechanically connected to the top nozzle adapter plate by means of a pre-formed circumferential bulge near the top of the insert. The insert engages a mating groove in the wall of the adapter plate thimble tube thru-hole. The insert has four (4) equally spaced axial slots which allow the insert to deflect inwardly at the elevation of the bulge, thus permitting the installation or removal of the nozzle. The insert bulge is positively held in the adapter plate mating groove by placing a lock tube with a uniform ID identical to that of the thimble tube into the insert.
| |
| To remove the top nozzle, a tool is first inserted through a lock tube and expanded radially to engage the bottom edge of the tube. An axial force is then exerted on the tool which overrides the local lock tube deformations and withdraws the lock tube from the insert. After the lock tubes have been withdrawn, the nozzle is removed by raising it off the upper slotted ends of the nozzle inserts which deflect inwardly under the axial lift load. With the top nozzle removed, direct access is provided for fuel rod examinations or replacement. Reconstitution is completed by the remounting of the nozzle and the insertion of lock tubes. The design bases and evaluation of the reconstitutable top nozzle are given in Section 2.3.2 in Reference [28].
| |
| 4.2-7
| |
| | |
| WBN Guide Thimble and Instrument Tube The guide thimbles are structural members which also provide channels for the neutron absorber rods, burnable absorber rods, neutron source rods, or thimble plugs. Each one is fabricated from ZIRLO tubing having two different diameters. The larger diameter at the top provides a relatively large annular area to permit rapid insertion of the control rods during a reactor trip as well as to accommodate the flow of coolant during normal operation. The lower portion of the guide thimbles has a reduced diameter to produce a dashpot action near the end of the control rod travel during a reactor trip. Four holes are provided on the thimble tube above the dashpot to reduce the rod drop time. The dashpot is closed at the bottom by means of an end plug which is provided with a small flow port to avoid fluid stagnation in the dashpot volume during normal operation and to accommodate the outflow of water from the dashpot during a reactor trip. The lower end of the guide thimble is fitted with an end plug which is then fastened into the bottom nozzle by an integral locking cap screw. The top end of the guide thimbles are fastened to tubular nozzle insert sleeve by three expansion swages. The insert is locked into the top nozzle adapter plate using a lock tube as shown in Figure 4.2-7.
| |
| Grids are fastened to the guide thimble assemblies to create an integrated structure. The fastening method depicted in Figures 4.2-4 and 4.2-5 is used for all but the top and bottom grids.
| |
| An expanding tool is inserted into the inner diameter of the ZIRLO thimble tube at the elevation of the stainless steel sleeves that have been previously attached to the grid assembly.
| |
| These mid grid sleeves are made of ZIRLO and are laser welded to the ZIRLO grid assemblies. The multi-lobed tool forces the thimble and sleeve outward to a predetermined diameter, thus joining the two components.
| |
| The bottom grid assembly is joined to the assembly as shown in Figure 4.2-6. The stainless steel insert is attached to the bottom grid and later captured between the guide thimble end plug and the bottom nozzle by means of a stainless steel thimble screw.
| |
| The described methods of grid fastening are standard and have been used successfully since the introduction of ZIRLO guide thimbles in 1969.
| |
| The central instrumentation tube of each fuel assembly is constrained by seating in counterbores in the bottom nozzle at its lower end and is expanded at the top and mid grids in the same manner as the previously described expansion of the guide thimbles to the grids. This tube is a constant diameter and guides the incore neutron detectors. Sufficient diametral clearance exists for the Incore Instrument Thimble Assembly to traverse the tube without binding. Instrumentation tubes are expanded at the top and mid grids in the same manner as the previously discussed expansion of the guide thimbles to the grids.
| |
| Grid Assemblies The fuel rods, as shown in Figure 4.2-2, are supported at intervals along their length by structural grid assemblies which maintain the lateral spacing between the rods. Each fuel rod is supported laterally within each grid cell by a combination of support dimples and springs (six support locations per cell; i.e, four dimples and two springs). The magnitude of grid spacing spring force on the fuel rods is set high enough to minimize possible fretting, without overstressing the cladding at the contact points. All grid assemblies allow axial thermal expansion of the fuel rods without imposing restraint sufficient to develop buckling or distortion.
| |
| 4.2-8
| |
| | |
| WBN The top and bottom (non-mixing vanes) grids are made of Inconel 718 strap materials, chosen for its strength and high corrosion resistance. The six intermediate (mixing vane) grids of the VANTAGE 5H design are made of Zircaloy straps (chosen for its low neutron absorption properties). The six intermediate (mixing vane) grids of the V+/P+, and RFA-2 fuel are made of ZIRLO straps. Inner straps include mixing vanes which project into the coolant stream and promote mixing of the coolant in the high heat flux region of the assemblies.
| |
| Commencing with Cycle 6, the fresh RFA-2 fuel incorporates Intermediate Flow Mixer (IFM) grids. The IFM grids are located in the three uppermost spans between the ZIRLO mixing vane structural mid-grids and incorporate a similar mixing vane array. The IFM grids are fabricated from ZIRLO. The primary function of the IFM grids is to provide enhanced mid-span flow mixing in the hottest fuel assembly spans. Each IFM grid cell contains four dimples which are designed to prevent mid-span channel closure in the spans containing IFMs and to prevent fuel rod contact with the mixing vanes. This simplified cell support arrangement allows for a shortened grid height (compared to the mid-grid design) so that the IFM can accomplish its flow mixing objective with minimal pressure drop.
| |
| For the V+/P+ and RFA-2 fuel, a protective grid is included at the bottom of the assembly, to provide an additional debris barrier, thereby improve fuel reliability. The protective grid also provides grid/rod fretting resistance by supporting the bottom of the fuel rod.
| |
| All grid assemblies consist of individual slotted straps assembled in an interlocking "egg-crate" arrangement. Zircaloy/ZIRLO grid strap joints and grid/sleeve joints are fabricated by laser welding, whereas all Inconel grid joints are brazed. The outside straps on all grids contain mixing vanes which, in addition to their mixing function, aid in guiding the grids and fuel assemblies past projecting surfaces during handling or during loading and unloading of the core.
| |
| 4.2.1.3 Design Evaluation 4.2.1.3.1 Fuel Rods The fuel rods are designed to assure the design bases are satisfied for Condition I and II events. This assures that the fuel performance and safety criteria (Section 4.2) are satisfied.
| |
| Materials - Fuel Cladding The desired fuel rod clad is a material which has a superior combination of neutron economy (low absorption cross section), high strength (to resist deformation due to differential pressures and mechanical interaction between fuel and clad), high corrosion resistance (to coolant, fuel and fission products), and high reliability. ZIRLO has this desired combination of clad properties. As shown in Reference [3], there is considerable PWR operating experience on the capability of ZIRLO as clad materials. Clad hydriding has not been a significant cause of clad perforation since current controls on fuel contained moisture levels were instituted[3].
| |
| Metallographic examination of irradiated commercial fuel rods has shown occurrences of fuel/clad chemical interaction. Reaction layers of < 1 mil in thickness have been observed between fuel and clad at limited points around the circumference. Westinghouse metallographic data indicates that this interface layer remains very thin even at high burnup. Thus, there is no indication of propagation of the layer and eventual clad penetration.
| |
| 4.2-9
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 Stress corrosion cracking is another postulated phenomenon related to fuel/clad chemical interaction. Reactor tests have shown that in the presence of high clad tensile stresses, large concentrations of iodine can chemically attack the Zircaloy tubing and can lead to eventual clad cracking. Westinghouse has no evidence that this mechanism is operative in commercial fuel.
| |
| The ZIRLO alloy for the V+/P+ and RFA-2 fuel achieves a significant improvement in clad and guide thimble corrosion resistance and dimensional stability under irradiation. ZIRLO corrosion performance has been evaluated in long-term, out-of-pile tests over a wide range of temperatures (600°F in water tests, up to 932°F in steam tests). Tests have also been conducted in lithiated water environments. The ZIRLO alloy has generally exhibited lower corrosion rates than those of Zircaloy-4. Reference [34] provides additional details regarding the ZIRLO corrosion performance. Reference [37] describes the NRC approved Westinghouse fuel performance model for cladding corrosion (oxidation and hydrogen pickup).
| |
| Materials - Fuel Pellets Sintered, high density uranium dioxide fuel chemically reacts only slightly with the clad, at core operating temperatures and pressures. In the event of clad defects, the high resistance of uranium dioxide to attack by water protects against fuel deterioration although limited fuel erosion can occur. As has been shown by operating experience and extensive experimental work, the thermal design parameters conservatively account for changes in the thermal performance of the fuel elements due to pellet fracture which may occur during power operation.
| |
| The consequences of defects in the clad are greatly reduced by the ability of uranium dioxide to retain fission products including those which are gaseous or highly volatile. Observations from several operating Westinghouse PWRs [2] and [3] have shown that fuel pellets can densify under irradiation to a density higher than the manufactured values. Fuel densification and subsequent incomplete settling of the fuel pellets result in local and distributed gaps in the fuel rods.
| |
| An extensive analytical and experimental effort has been conducted by Westinghouse to characterize the fuel densification phenomenon and identify improvements in pellet manufacturing to eliminate or minimize this anomaly. [5] and [3]
| |
| Fuel rod design methodology has been introduced that reduces the densification power spike factor to 1.0 and Reference [33] demonstrates that clad flattening will not occur in Westinghouse fuel designs.
| |
| Materials - Strength Considerations One of the most important limiting factors in fuel element duty is the mechanical interaction of fuel and clad. This fuel/clad interaction produces cyclic stresses and strains in the clad, and these in turn deplete clad fatigue life. The reduction of fuel/clad interaction is therefore a principal goal of design. In order to achieve this goal and to enhance the cyclic operational capability of the fuel rod, the technology for using prepressurized fuel rods in Westinghouse PWRs has been developed.
| |
| 4.2-10
| |
| | |
| WBN Initially the gap between the fuel and clad is sufficient to prevent hard contact between the two.
| |
| However, during power operation a gradual compressive creep of the clad onto the fuel pellet occurs due to the external pressure exerted on the rod by the coolant. Clad compressive creep eventually results in hard fuel/clad contact. During this period of fuel/clad contact, changes in power level could result in significant changes in clad stresses and strains. By using prepressurized fuel rods to partially offset the effect of the coolant external pressure, the rate of clad creep toward the surface of the fuel is reduced. Fuel rod prepressurization delays the time at which substantial fuel/clad interaction and hard contact occur and hence significantly reduces the number and extent of cyclic stresses and strains experienced by the clad both before and after fuel/clad contact. These factors result in an increase in the fatigue life margin of the clad and lead to greater clad reliability. If gaps should form in the fuel stacks, clad flattening will be prevented by the rod prepressurization so that the flattening time will be greater than the fuel core life.
| |
| A two dimensional (r,) finite element model has been established to investigate the effects of radial pellet cracks on stress concentrations in the clad. Stress concentration, herein, is defined as the difference between the maximum clad stress in the direction and the mean clad stress.
| |
| The first case has the fuel and clad in mechanical equilibrium and as a result the stresses in the clad are close to zero. In subsequent cases the pellet power is increased in steps and the resultant fuel thermal expansion imposes tensile stress in the clad. In addition to uniform clad stresses, stress concentrations develop in the clad adjacent to radial cracks in the pellet. These radial cracks have a tendency to open during a power increase but the frictional forces between fuel and clad oppose the opening of these cracks and result in localized increases in clad stress. As the power is further increased, large tensile stresses exceed the ultimate tensile strength of U02, additional cracks in the fuel are created which limits the magnitude of the stress concentration in the clad.
| |
| As part of the standard fuel rod design analysis, the maximum stress concentration evaluated from finite element calculations is added to the volume averaged effective stress in the clad as determined from one dimensional stress/strain calculations. The resultant clad stress is then compared to the temperature dependent ZIRLO yield stress.
| |
| Steady-State Performance Evaluation In the calculation of the steady-state performance of a nuclear fuel rod, the following interacting factors must be considered:
| |
| : l. Clad creep and elastic deflection.
| |
| : 2. Pellet density changes, thermal expansion, gas release, and thermal properties as a function of temperature and fuel burnup.
| |
| : 3. Internal pressure as a function of fission gas release, rod geometry, and temperature distribution.
| |
| 4.2-11
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 These effects are evaluated using an overall fuel rod design model.[26],[31],[35],[37] The model modifications for time dependent fuel densification are given in References [26] and [35]. With these interacting factors considered, the model determines the fuel rod performance characteristics for a given rod geometry, power history, and axial power shape. In particular, internal gas pressure, fuel and clad temperatures, clad corrosion and clad deflections are calculated. The fuel rod is divided lengthwise into several sections and radially into a number of annular zones. Fuel density changes, clad stresses, strains and deformations, and fission gas releases are calculated separately for each segment. The effects are integrated to obtain the internal rod pressure.
| |
| The initial rod internal pressure is selected to delay fuel/clad mechanical interaction and to avoid the potential for flattened rod formation. It is limited however, by the rod internal pressure design basis given in Section 4.2.1.1.1. The plenum height of the fuel rod has been designed to ensure that the maximum internal pressure of the fuel rod will not exceed the value which would cause the fuel clad diametral gap to increase during steady-state operation.
| |
| The gap conductance between the pellet surface and the clad inner diameter is calculated as a function of the composition, temperature, and pressure of the gas mixture, and the gap size or contact pressure between clad and pellet. After computing the fuel temperature for each pellet annular zone, the fractional fission gas release is calculated based on local fuel temperature and burnup. The total amount of gas released is based on the average fractional release within each axial and radial zone and the gas generation rate which is a function of burnup. Finally, the gas released is summed over all zones and the pressure is calculated.
| |
| The model shows good agreement in fit for a variety of published and proprietary data on fission gas release, fuel temperatures and clad deflections.[26],[35] Included in this spectrum are variations in power, time, fuel density, and geometry. The in-pile fuel temperature measurement comparisons used are referenced in Section 4.4.2.2.
| |
| Initially, the gap between the fuel and cladding is sufficient to prevent hard contact between the two. However, during power operation a gradual compressive creep of the cladding onto the fuel pellet occurs due to the external pressure exerted on the rod by the coolant. Cladding compressive creep eventually results in fuel/clad contact. During this period of fuel/clad contact, changes in power level could result in changes in cladding stresses and strains. By using prepressurized fuel rods to partially offset the effect of the coolant external pressure, the rate of cladding creep toward the surface of the fuel is reduced. Fuel rod prepressurization delays the time at which fuel/clad contact occurs and hence, significantly reduces the number and extent of cyclic stresses and strains experienced by the cladding both before and after fuel/clad contact.
| |
| These factors result in an increase in the fatigue life margin of the cladding and lead to greater cladding reliability. If gaps should form in the fuel stacks, cladding flattening will be prevented by the rod prepressurization so that the flattening time will be greater then the fuel core life.
| |
| 4.2-12
| |
| | |
| WBN The clad stresses at a constant local fuel rod power are low. Compressive stresses are created by the pressure differential between the coolant pressure and the rod internal gas pressure.
| |
| Because of the prepressurization with helium, the volume average effective stresses are always less than approximately 15,000 psi at the pressurization level used in this fuel rod design.
| |
| Stresses due to the temperature gradient are not included in this average effective stress because thermal stresses are, in general, negative at the clad inside diameter and positive at the clad outside diameter and their contribution to the clad volume average stress is small.
| |
| Furthermore, the thermal stress decreases with time during steady-state operation due to stress relaxation. The stress due to pressure differential is highest in the minimum power rod at the beginning-of-life (due to low internal gas pressure) and the thermal stress is highest in the maximum power rod (due to steep temperature gradient).
| |
| Tensile stresses could be created once the clad has come in contact with the pellet. These stresses would be induced by the fuel pellet swelling during irradiation. There is very limited clad pushout after pellet-clad contact. Fuel swelling can result in small clad strains (< 1%) for expected discharge burnups but the associated clad stresses are very low because of clad creep (thermal and irradiation-induced creep). Furthermore, the 1 percent strain criterion is extremely conservative for fuel-swelling driven clad strain because the strain rate associated with solid fission products swelling is very slow (~5x 10-7 hr-1). In-pile experiments[30] have shown that zircaloy tubing exhibits "super-plasticity" at slow strain rates during neutron irradiation. Uniform clad strains of >10% have been achieved under these conditions with no sign of plastic instability.
| |
| Pellet thermal expansion due to power increases is considered the only mechanism by which significant stresses and strains can be imposed on the clad. Power increases in commercial reactors can result from fuel shuffling, (e.g., Region 3 positioned near the center of the core for Cycle 2 operation after operating near the periphery during Cycle 1) reactor power escalation following extended reduced power operation, and control rod movement. In the mechanical design model, lead rods are depleted using best estimate power histories as determined by core physics calculations. During the depletion, the amount of diametral gap closure is evaluated based upon the pellet expansion-cracking model, clad creep model, and fuel swelling model. At various times during the depletion the power is increased locally on the rod to the burnup dependent attainable power density as determined by core physics calculations. The radial, tangential, and axial clad stresses resulting from the power increases are combined into a volume average effective clad stress.
| |
| The von Mises criterion is used to evaluate if the clad yield stress has been exceeded. This criterion states that an isotropic material in multiaxial stress will begin to yield plastically when the effective stress exceeds the yield stress as determined by a uniaxial tensile test. The yield stress correlation is that for irradiated cladding since fuel/clad interaction occurs at high burnup.
| |
| Furthermore, the effective stress is increased by an allowance, which accounts for stress concentrations in the clad adjacent to radial cracks in the pellet, prior to the comparison with the yield stress. This allowance was evaluated using a two-dimensional (r,) finite element model.
| |
| Slow transient power increases can result in large clad strains without exceeding the clad yield stress because of clad creep and stress relaxation. Therefore, in addition to the yield stress criterion, a criterion on allowable clad positive strain is necessary. Based upon high strain rate burst and tensile test data on irradiated tubing, 1% strain was determined to be the lower limit on irradiated clad ductility and thus adopted as a design criterion.
| |
| 4.2-13
| |
| | |
| WBN In addition to the mechanical design models and design criteria, Westinghouse relies on performance data accumulated through transient power test programs in experimental and commercial reactors, and through normal operation in commercial reactors.
| |
| It is recognized that a possible limitation to the satisfactory behavior of the fuel rods in a reactor which is subjected to daily load follow is the failure of the cladding by low cycle strain fatigue.
| |
| During their normal residence time in reactor, the fuel rods may be subjected to ~1000 cycles or more with typical changes in power level from 50 to 100% of their steady-state values.
| |
| The assessment of the fatigue life of the fuel rod cladding is subjected to a considerable uncertainty due to the difficulty of evaluating the strain range which results from the cyclic interaction of the fuel pellets and claddings. This difficulty arises, for example, from such highly unpredictable phenomena as pellet cracking, fragmentation, and relocation. Nevertheless, since early 1968, Westinghouse has been investigating this particular phenomenon both analytically and experimentally. Strain fatigue tests on irradiated and nonirradiated hydrided Zr-4 claddings were performed which permitted a definition of a conservative fatigue life limit and recommendation of a methodology to treat the strain fatigue evaluation of the Westinghouse reference fuel rod designs.
| |
| However, Westinghouse is convinced that the final proof of the adequacy of a given fuel rod design to meet the load follow requirements can only come from in-pile experiments performed on actual reactors. The Westinghouse experience in load follow operation dates back to early 1970 with the load follow operation of the Saxton reactor. Successful load follow operation has been performed on Point Beach unit 1 (300 load follow cycles) and Point Beach unit 2 (150 load follow cycles). In both cases, there was no significant coolant activity increase that could be associated with the load follow mode of operation. Reference [3] provides the most recent experience with Westinghouse fuel rod designs.
| |
| The following paragraphs present briefly the Westinghouse analytical approach to strain fatigue.
| |
| A comprehensive review of the available strain-fatigue models was conducted by Westinghouse as early as 1968.
| |
| This included the Langer-O'Donnel model[9], the Yao-Munse model, and the Manson-Halford model. Upon completion of this review and using the results of the Westinghouse experimental programs discussed below, it was concluded that the approach defined by Langer-O'Donnel would be retained and the empirical factors of their correlation modified in order to conservatively bound the results of the Westinghouse testing program.
| |
| The Langer-O'Donnel empirical correlation has the following form:
| |
| E (100)
| |
| Sa = ln + Se 4 N f 100 RA where: Sa = 1/2 E t = pseudo-stress amplitude which causes failure in Nf cycles (lb/in2)
| |
| )t = total strain range (in/in)
| |
| E = Young's Modulus (lb/in2)
| |
| Nf = number of cycles to failure RA = reduction in area at fracture in a uniaxial tensile test (%)
| |
| Se = endurance limit (lb/in2) 4.2-14
| |
| | |
| WBN Both RA and Se are empirical constants which depend on the type of material, the temperature and irradiation. The Westinghouse testing program was subdivided in the following sub-programs:
| |
| : 1. A rotating bend fatigue experiment on unirradiated Zircaloy-4 specimens at room temperature and at 725°F. Both hydrided and non-hydrided Zircaloy-4 cladding were tested.
| |
| : 2. A biaxial fatigue experiment in gas autoclave on unirradiated Zircaloy-4 cladding, both hydrided and nonhydrided.
| |
| : 3. A fatigue test program on irradiated cladding from the CVTR and Yankee Core V conducted at Battelle Memorial Institute.
| |
| The results of these test programs provided information on different cladding conditions including the effect of irradiation, of hydrogen level, and of temperature.
| |
| The Westinghouse design equations followed the concept for the fatigue design criterion according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III. Namely,
| |
| : 1. The calculated pseudo-stress amplitude (Sa) has to be multiplied by a factor of 2 in order to obtain the allowable number of cycles (Nf).
| |
| : 2. The allowable cycles for a given Sa is 5% of Nf, or a safety factor of 20 on cycles.
| |
| The lesser of the two allowable number of cycles is selected. The cumulative fatigue life fraction is then computed as:
| |
| k nk N
| |
| 1 fk 1
| |
| where: nk = number of diurnal cycles of mode k.
| |
| The potential effects of operation with waterlogged fuel are discussed in Section 4.4.3.6. Water logging is not considered to be a concern during operational transients.
| |
| Rod Bowing Reference [10] presents the model used for evaluation of fuel rod bowing. To the present time this model has been used for bow assessment in 14 x 14, 15 x 15, and 17 x 17 type cores.
| |
| 4.2-15
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 4.2.1.3.2 Fuel Assembly Structure Stresses and Deflections The potential sources of high stresses in the assembly are avoided by the design. For example, stresses in the fuel rod due to thermal expansion and ZIRLO irradiation growth are limited by the relative motion of the rod as it slips over the grid spring and dimple surfaces. Clearances between the fuel rod ends and nozzles are provided so that ZIRLO irradiation growth will not result in end interferences. Stresses in the fuel assembly caused by tripping of the rod cluster control assembly have little influence on fatigue because of the small number of events during the life of an assembly. Assembly components and prototype fuel assemblies made from production parts have been subjected to structural tests to verify that the design bases requirements are met.[7]
| |
| The fuel assembly design loads for shipping are established and accelerometers are permanently placed into the new fuel shipping cask to monitor, and detect fuel assembly accel-erations that would result from loads in excess of the criteria. Past history and experience has indicated that loads which exceeded the allowable limits rarely occur. Exceeding the limits requires re-inspection of the fuel assembly for damage. Tests on various fuel assembly components such as the grid assembly, sleeves, inserts and structure joints have been performed to assure that the shipping design limits do not result in impairment of fuel assembly function. The methodology for the seismic analysis of the fuel assembly is presented in References [7], [24], and [28].
| |
| Dimensional Stability A prototype fuel assembly has been subjected to column loads in excess of those expected in normal service and faulted conditions.[7][28]
| |
| The coolant flow channels are established and maintained by the structure composed of grids and guide thimbles. The lateral spacing between fuel rods is provided and controlled by the support dimples and springs of adjacent grid cells. Contact of the fuel rods on the dimples is maintained through small distortions of the rod and skeleton structure. Lateral motion of the fuel rods is opposed by the spring force and the internal moments generated between the spring and the support dimples. Grid testing is discussed in References [7] and [28].
| |
| No interference with control rod insertion into thimble tubes will occur during a postulated loss of coolant accident transient due to fuel rod swelling, thermal expansion, or bowing. In the early phase of the transient following the coolant break, the high axial loads which potentially could be generated by the difference in thermal expansion between fuel clad and thimbles are relieved by slippage of the fuel rods through the grids. The relatively low drag force restraint on the fuel rods will only induce minor thermal bowing, which is not sufficient to close the fuel rod-to-thimble tube gap. This rod-to-grid slip mechanism occurs simultaneously with control rod drop. Sub-sequent to the control rod insertion the transient temperature increase of the fuel rod clad can result in swelling, which is sufficient to contact the thimbles.
| |
| 4.2-16
| |
| | |
| WBN Vibration and Wear Fuel rod vibrations are basically flow induced. The effect of the flow induced vibration on the fuel assembly and individual fuel rods is minimal. The cyclic stress range associated with deflections of such small magnitude is insignificant and has no effect on the structural integrity of the fuel rod.
| |
| The reaction on the grid support due to vibration motions is also correspondingly small and definitely much less than the spring preload. Firm contact is therefore maintained. No significant wear of the clad or grid supports is expected during the life of the fuel assembly.
| |
| The conclusion that the effect of flow induced vibrations on the fuel assembly and fuel rod is minimal is based on test results and analysis documented in the Hydraulic Flow Test of the 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly report [20], which takes into consideration the condition normally encountered in reactor operation. Hydraulic flow test results of the VANTAGE 5H assemblies are discussed in Reference [28]. Flow test results for the RFA-2 assembly are discussed in Reference [36].
| |
| 4.2.1.3.3 Operational Experience A discussion of fuel operating experience is given in Reference [3].
| |
| 4.2.1.3.4 Test Rod and Test Assembly Experience This experience is presented in Sections 8 and 23 of Reference [2] and in Reference [28],
| |
| Addendum 1-A, Section D.
| |
| 4.2.1.3.5 Evaluation of the Reactor Core for a Limiting LOCA Load - Accumulator Line Break The fuel assembly response resulting from the most limiting main coolant pipe break (accumulator line break) was analyzed using time history numerical techniques. Since the resulting vessel motion induces primarily lateral loads on the reactor core, a finite element model was used to assess the fuel assembly deflections and impact forces.
| |
| The reactor core finite element model, which simulates the fuel assembly interaction during lateral excitation, consists of fuel assemblies arranged in a planar array with inter-assembly gaps. For Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, arrays of fifteen, thirteen, eleven, and seven fuel assemblies were used in the model. The typical reactor model with an array of fifteen fuel assemblies is shown in Figure 4.2-28. Each fuel assembly is simplified as a lumped mass-spring model. The time history motion for the upper and lower core plates and the barrel at the upper core plate elevation are simultaneously applied to the simulated reactor core model as illustrated in Figure 4.2-28. The three time history motions were obtained from the analysis of the reactor vessel and internals.
| |
| The fuel assembly response, namely, displacements and grid impact forces, was obtained from the reactor core model using the core plate and barrel motions resulting from the limiting LOCA accumulator line break. The maximum fuel assembly deflection occurred in a peripheral fuel assembly for this analysis. The fuel assembly stresses resulting from this deflection in combination with the vertical impact load were evaluated and indicated substantial margins compared to the allowable values.
| |
| 4.2-17
| |
| | |
| WBN The fuel assembly grid impact forces were also obtained from the reactor core time history response. The maximum impact force occurred at the peripheral fuel assembly location adjacent to the baffle wall. The grid impact forces were rapidly attenuated for fuel assembly positions inward from the peripheral fuel. Only a small (outer) portion of the core experienced significant grid impact forces. The maximum grid impact forces are required to be less than the allowable grid crush strength. A calculation of the maximum LOCA and seismic grid impact forces, combined using the square root sum of the squares method (in accordance with NUREG 0800, Section 4.2, Appendix A), demonstrated that the maximum value is less than the allowable grid strength for both the homogeneous core (RFA-2 with IFMs) and the mixed core (RFA-2 with IFMs and V+/P+ without IFMs).
| |
| 4.2.1.4 Tests and Inspections 4.2.1.4.1 Quality Assurance Program The Quality Assurance Program Plan of the Westinghouse Energy System Business Unit, as summarized in Reference [11], has been developed to serve the Business Unit in planning and monitoring its activities for the design and manufacture of nuclear fuel and related activities.
| |
| The program provides for control over all activities affecting product quality, commencing with design and development and continuing through procurement, materials handling, fabrication, testing and inspection, storage, and transportation. The program also provides for the indoctrination and training of personnel and for the auditing of activities affecting product quality through a formal auditing program.
| |
| Westinghouse drawings and product process, and material specifications identify the inspection to be performed.
| |
| 4.2.1.4.2 Quality Control Quality control philosophy is generally based on the following inspections being performed to a 95% confidence that at least 95% of the product meets specifications, unless otherwise noted.
| |
| : 1. Fuel System Components and Parts The characteristics inspected depend upon the component parts and include dimensional and visual examinations, audits of test reports, material certification, and non-destructive testing, such as X-Ray and ultrasonic.
| |
| All material used in the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant core is accepted and released by Quality Control.
| |
| : 2. Pellets Inspection is performed for dimensional characteristics such as diameter, density, length and squareness of ends. Additional visual inspections are performed for cracks, chips and surface conditions according to approved standards.
| |
| Density is determined in terms of weight per unit length and is plotted on zone charts used in controlling the process. Chemical analyses are taken on a specified sample basis throughout pellet production.
| |
| 4.2-18
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 3. Rod Inspection Fuel rod, control rodlet, burnable absorber, and primary, and secondary source rod inspection consists of the following non-destructive examination techniques and methods, as applicable.
| |
| : a. Leak Testing Each rod is tested using a calibrated mass spectrometer with helium being the detectable gas.
| |
| : b. Enclosure Welds All weld enclosures are ultrasonic tested or x-rayed. X-rays are taken in accordance with Westinghouse specifications meeting the requirements of ASTM-E-142.
| |
| : c. Dimensional All rods are dimensionally inspected prior to final release. The requirements include such items as length, camber, and visual appearance.
| |
| : d. Plenum Dimensions All of the fuel rods are inspected by gamma-scanning, fluoroscope, x-ray or other approved methods as discussed in Section 4.2.1.4.3 to insure proper plenum dimensions.
| |
| : e. Pellet-to-Pellet Gaps All of the fuel rods are inspected by fluoroscope, gamma-scanning or other approved methods as discussed in Section 4.2.1.4.3 to insure that no significant gaps exist between pellets.
| |
| : f. Enrichment All of the fuel rods are gamma-scanned to verify enrichment control prior to acceptance for assembly loading.
| |
| : g. Traceability Traceability of rods and associated rod components is established by Quality Control.
| |
| : 4. Assemblies Each fuel rod, control rod, burnable absorber, and primary, and secondary source rod assembly is inspected for drawing and/or specification requirements.
| |
| 4.2-19
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 5. Other Inspections The following inspections are performed as part of the routine inspection operation:
| |
| : a. Tool and gage inspection and control includes standardization to primary and/or secondary working standards. Tool inspection is performed at prescribed intervals on all serialized tools. Complete records are kept of calibration and conditions of tools.
| |
| : b. Audits are performed of inspection activities and records to assure that prescribed methods are followed and that records are correct and orderly maintained.
| |
| : c. Surveillance inspection where appropriate, and audits of outside contractors are performed to insure conformance with specified requirements.
| |
| : 6. Process Control To prevent the possibility of mixing enrichments during fuel manufacture and assembly, strict enrichment segregation and other process controls are exercised.
| |
| The UO2 powder is kept in sealed containers. The contents are fully identified. A Westinghouse identification tag completely describing the contents is affixed to the con-tainers before transfer to powder storage. Isotopic content is confirmed by sample isotopic analysis.
| |
| Powder withdrawal from storage can be made by only one authorized group, which directs the powder to the correct pellet production line. All pellet production lines are physically separated from each other and pellets of only a single nominal enrichment and density are produced in a given production line at any given time.
| |
| Finished pellets are placed on trays identified with the same color code as the powder containers and transferred to segregated storage racks within the confines of the pelleting area. Samples from each pellet lot are tested for isotopic content and impurity levels prior to acceptance by Quality Control. Physical barriers prevent mixing of pellets of different nominal densities and enrichments in this storage area. Unused powder and substandard pellets are returned to storage in the original color coded containers.
| |
| Loading of pellets into the fuel cladding is performed in isolated production lines and only one enrichment is loaded on a line at a time.
| |
| A serialized traceability code is placed on each fuel tube which identifies the contract and enrichment. End plugs are inserted; the bottom end plug is permanently identified to the contract and enrichment; and inert welded to seal the tube. The fuel tube remains coded, and traceability identified until just prior to installation in the fuel assembly. At the time of installation into an assembly, a matrix is generated to identify each rod in its position within a given assembly After the fuel rods are installed, an inspector verifies that all fuel rods in an assembly carry the correct identification character describing the fuel enrichment and density for the core region being fabricated. The top nozzle is inscribed with a permanent identification number providing traceability to the fuel contained in the assembly.
| |
| 4.2-20
| |
| | |
| WBN Similar traceability is provided for burnable absorbers, source rods and control rodlets as required.
| |
| 4.2.1.4.3 Tests and Inspections by Others If any Tests and Inspections are to be performed on behalf of the fuel supplier, the quality control procedures, inspection plans, etc., to be utilized will be reviewed and approved by the fuel supplier to insure that they are equivalent to the description provided above and are performed properly to meet all requirements.
| |
| 4.2.1.4.4 Onsite Inspection Surveillance of fuel and reactor performance is routinely conducted on Westinghouse reactors.
| |
| Power distribution is monitored using the excore, movable or fixed incore detectors. Coolant activity and chemistry is followed which permits early detection of any fuel clad defects.
| |
| Depending on the results of this monitoring, fuel inspections are performed.
| |
| 4.2.2 Reactor Vessel Internals 4.2.2.1 Design Bases The design bases for the mechanical design of the reactor vessel internals components are as follows:
| |
| : 1. The reactor internals, in conjunction with the fuel assemblies, shall direct reactor coolant through the core to achieve acceptable flow distribution and to restrict bypass flow so that the heat transfer performance requirements are met for all modes of operation. In addition, required cooling for the pressure vessel head shall be provided so that the temperature differences between the vessel flange and head do not result in leakage from the flange during reactor operation.
| |
| : 2. In addition to neutron shielding provided by the reactor coolant, neutron pads are provided to limit the exposure of the pressure vessel in order to maintain the required ductility of the material for all modes of operation.
| |
| : 3. Provisions shall be made for installing in-core instrumentation useful for the plant operation and vessel material test specimens required for a pressure vessel irradiation surveillance program.
| |
| : 4. The core internals are designed to withstand mechanical loads arising from the SSE and 1/2 SSE and pipe ruptures and meet the requirement of Item 5 below.
| |
| : 5. The reactor shall have mechanical provisions which are sufficient to adequately support the core and internals and to assure that the core is intact with acceptable heat transfer geometry following transients arising from abnormal operating conditions.
| |
| : 6. Following the design basis accident, the plant shall be capable of being shutdown and cooled in an orderly fashion so that fuel cladding temperature is kept within specified limits. This implies that the deformation of certain critical reactor internals must be kept sufficiently small to allow core cooling.
| |
| The functional limitations for the core structures during the design basis accident are shown in Table 3.9-5. To insure no column loading of rod cluster control guide tubes, the upper core plate deflection is limited to not exceed the value shown in Table 3.9-5.
| |
| 4.2-21
| |
| | |
| WBN Details of the dynamic analyses, input forcing functions, and response loadings are presented in Section 3.9.
| |
| 4.2.2.2 Description and Drawings The reactor vessel internals are described as follows:
| |
| The components of the reactor internals consist of the lower core support structure (including the entire core barrel and neutron pads), the upper core support structure and the in-core instrumentation support structure. The reactor internals support the core, maintain fuel alignment, limit fuel assembly movement, maintain alignment between fuel assemblies and con-trol rod drive mechanisms, direct coolant flow past the fuel elements, direct coolant flow to the pressure vessel head, provide gamma and neutron shielding, and guides for the in-core instrumentation. The coolant flows from the vessel inlet nozzles down the annulus between the core barrel and the vessel wall and then into a plenum at the bottom of the vessel. It then reverses and flows up through the core support and through the lower core plate. The lower core plate is sized to provide the desired inlet flow distribution to the core. After passing through the core, the coolant enters the region of the upper support structure and then flows radially to the core barrel outlet nozzles and directly through the vessel outlet nozzles. A small portion of the coolant flows between the baffle plates and the core barrel to provide additional cooling of the barrel. Similarly, a small amount of the entering flow is directed into the vessel head plenum and exits through the vessel outlet nozzles.
| |
| The major material for the reactor internals is Type 304 stainless steel. Additional reactor vessel internals material information is provided in Table 5.2-12.
| |
| Reactor internals are removable from the vessel for the purpose of their inspection as well as the inspection of the vessel internal surface.
| |
| Lower Core Support Structure The major containment and support member of the reactor internals is the lower core support structure, shown in Figure 4.2-10. This support structure assembly consists of the core barrel, the core baffle, and the lower core plate and support columns, the neutron pads, and the core support which is welded to the core barrel. All the major material for this structure is Type 304 stainless steel. The lower core support structure is supported at its upper flange from a ledge in the reactor vessel and its lower end is restrained from transverse motion by a radial support system attached to the vessel wall. Within the core barrel are an axial baffle and a lower core plate, both of which are attached to the core barrel wall and form the enclosure periphery of the core. The lower core support structure and core barrel serve to provide passageways and direct the coolant flow. The lower core plate is positioned at the bottom level of the core below the baffle plates and provides support and orientation for the fuel assemblies. The lower core plate is a member through which the necessary flow distribution holes for each fuel assembly are machined. Fuel assembly locating pins (two for each assembly) are also inserted into this plate. Columns are placed between the lower core plate and the core support of the core barrel to provide stiffness and to transmit the core load to the core support. Adequate coolant distribution is obtained through the use of the lower core plate and core support.
| |
| Rectangular specimen guides in which material samples can be inserted and irradiated during reactor operation are welded to the neutron pads and extended to the top of the panels. These samples are held in the rectangular specimen guides by a preloaded spring device at the top and bottom.
| |
| 4.2-22
| |
| | |
| WBN Vertically downward loads from weight, fuel assembly preload, control rod dynamic loading, hydraulic loads and earthquake acceleration are carried by the lower core plate into the lower core plate support flange on the core barrel shell and through the lower support columns to the core support and thence through the core barrel shell to the core barrel flange supported by the vessel flange. Transverse loads from earthquake acceleration, coolant cross flow, and vibration are carried by the core barrel shell and distributed between the lower radial support to the vessel wall, and to the vessel flange. Transverse loads of the fuel assemblies are transmitted to the core barrel shell by direct connection of the lower core plate to the barrel wall and by upper core plate alignment pins which are welded into the core barrel.
| |
| The radial support system of the core barrel is accomplished by "key" and "keyway" joints to the reactor vessel wall. At six equally spaced points around the circumference, an Inconel clevis block is welded to the vessel inner diameter. Another Inconel block is bolted to each of these blocks, and has a "keyway" geometry. Opposite each of these is a "key" which is welded to the lower core support. At assembly, as the internals are lowered into the vessel, the keys engage the keyways in the axial direction. With this design, the internals are provided with a support at the furthest extremity, and may be viewed as a beam fixed at the top and simply supported at the bottom.
| |
| Radial and axial expansions of the core barrel are accommodated, but transverse movement of the core barrel is restricted by this design. With this system, cyclic stresses in the internal structures are within the ASME Section III limits. In the event of an abnormal downward vertical displacement of the internals following a hypothetical failure, energy absorbing devices limit the displacement of the core after contacting the vessel bottom head. The load is then transferred through the energy absorbing devices of the lower internals to the vessel.
| |
| The energy absorbers are mounted on a base plate which is contoured on its bottom surface to the reactor vessel bottom internal geometry. Their number and design are determined so as to limit the stresses imposed on all components except the energy absorber to less than yield.
| |
| Assuming a downward vertical displacement, the potential energy of the system is absorbed mostly by the strain energy of the energy absorbing devices.
| |
| Upper Core Support Assembly The upper core support structure, shown in Figures 4.2-11, 4.2-12, and 4.2-13 consists of the upper support assembly and the upper core plate between which are contained support col-umns and guide tube assemblies. The support columns establish the spacing between the top support plate assembly and the upper core plate and are fastened at top and bottom to these plates. The support columns serve to transmit the fuel assembly holddown loads from the upper core plate to the upper support and thence to the vessel flange. The support columns position the upper core plate and upper support which act as the boundaries for the flow plenum at the outlet of the core. A support column or flow downcomer is provided at each fuel assembly position that does not contain accommodation for a control rod with the exception of the peripheral low power fuel assembly locations. The fuel assemblies which do not have a support column or flow downcomer above them are located in front of the inlet and outlet nozzles of the vessel. Figure 4.2-12 illustrates a typical support column.
| |
| The guide tube assemblies, (See Figures 4.2-11 and 4.2-14) shield and guide the control rod drive rods and control rods. The assemblies are fastened to the upper support and are guided by pins in the upper core plate for proper orientation and support. Additional guidance for the control rod drive rods is provided by the upper guide tube extension which is attached to the upper support.
| |
| 4.2-23
| |
| | |
| WBN The upper core support assembly, which is removed as a unit during refueling operation, is positioned in its proper orientation with respect to the lower support structure by slots in the upper core plate which engage flat-sided upper core plate alignment pins which are welded into the core barrel. At an elevation in the core barrel where the upper core plate is positioned, the flat-sided pins are located at angular positions of 90° from each other. As the upper support structure is lowered into the lower internals, the slots in the plate engage the flat-sided pins axial direction. Lateral displacement of the plate and of the upper support assembly is restricted by this design. Fuel assembly locating pins protrude from the bottom of the upper core plate and engage the fuel assemblies as the upper assembly is lowered into place. Proper alignment of the lower core support structure, the upper core support assembly, the fuel assemblies and control rods are thereby assured by this system of locating pins and guidance arrangement.
| |
| The upper core support assembly is restrained from any axial movements by a large circumferential spring which rests between the upper barrel flange and the upper core support assembly. The spring is compressed when the reactor vessel head is installed on the pressure vessel.
| |
| Vertical loads from weight, earthquake acceleration, hydraulic loads and fuel assembly preload are transmitted through the upper core plate via the support columns to the upper support assembly and then into the reactor vessel head. Transverse loads from coolant cross flow, earthquake acceleration, and possible vibrations are distributed by the support columns to the upper support and upper core plate. The upper support plate is particularly stiff to minimize deflection.
| |
| In-Core Instrumentation Support Structures The incore instrumentation support structures consist of an upper system to convey and support thermocouples penetrating the vessel through the head (Unit 1 Only) and a lower system to convey and support flux thimbles or the Incore Instrumentation Thimble Assemblies (IITAs) penetrating the vessel through the bottom (Figure 7.7-9a shows the Basic Flux-Mapping System(Unit 1) and Figure 7.7-9b shows the Incore Instrumentation System (Unit 2)).
| |
| For Unit 1, the upper system utilizes the reactor vessel head penetrations. Instrumentation port columns are slip-connected to in-line columns that are in turn fastened to the upper support plate. These port columns protrude through the head penetrations. The thermocouples are carried through these port columns and the upper support plate at positions above their readout locations. The thermocouple conduits are supported from the columns of the upper core support system. The thermocouple conduits are 304 stainless steel tubes.
| |
| For Unit 1, in addition to the upper incore instrumentation, there are reactor vessel bottom port columns which carry the retractable, cold worked stainless steel flux thimbles that are pushed upward into the reactor core. For Unit 2, there are reactor vessel bottom port columns which carry the stainless steel Incore Instrumentation Thimble Assemblies (IITAs) that are pushed upward into the reactor core. Thimble guide tubes extend from the bottom of the reactor vessel down through the concrete shield area and up to a thimble seal table. The minimum bend radii are about 144 inches. During normal operation, the thimbles are in the extented position in the core. The thimbles are retracted for maintenance or in order to avoid interference within the core during refueling only when the RCS is depressurized. To establish the pressure barrier between the RCS and the containment atmosphere, the thimbles are closed at the leading (core) ends and sealed against the thimble guide tubes at the trailing (seal table) ends with mechanical seals.
| |
| 4.2-24
| |
| | |
| WBN The incore instrumentation support structure is designed for adequate support of instrumentation during reactor operation and is rugged enough to resist damage or distortion under the conditions imposed by handling during the refueling sequence. These are the only conditions which affect the incore instrumentation support structure. Reactor vessel surveillance specimen capsules are covered in Section 5.4.3.6.
| |
| 4.2.2.3 Design Loading Conditions The design loading conditions that provide the basis for the design of the reactor internals are:
| |
| : 1. Fuel Assembly Weight
| |
| : 2. Fuel Assembly Spring Forces
| |
| : 3. Internals Weight
| |
| : 4. Control Rod Trip (equivalent static load)
| |
| : 5. Differential Pressure
| |
| : 6. Spring Preloads
| |
| : 7. Coolant Flow Forces (static)
| |
| : 8. Temperature Gradients
| |
| : 9. Differences in thermal expansion
| |
| : a. Due to temperature differences
| |
| : b. Due to expansion of different materials
| |
| : 10. Interference between components
| |
| : 11. Vibration (mechanically or hydraulically induced)
| |
| : 12. All operational transients listed in Table 5.2-2
| |
| : 13. Pump over-speed
| |
| : 14. Seismic loads (operation basis earthquake and design basis earthquake)
| |
| : 15. Blowdown forces injection transients for the cold and hot leg break.
| |
| Combined seismic and blowdown forces are included in the stress analysis as a design loading condition by statistically combining the maximum amplitude of each force.
| |
| The main objectives of the design analysis are to satisfy allowable stress limits, to assure an adequate design margin, and to establish deformation limits which are concerned primarily with the functioning of the components. The stress limits are established not only to assure that peak stresses will not reach unacceptable values, but also limit the amplitude of the oscillatory stress component in consideration of fatigue characteristics of the materials. Dynamic analysis on the reactor internals is provided in Section 3.9.
| |
| 4.2-25
| |
| | |
| WBN As part of the evaluation of design loading conditions, extensive testing and inspections are performed, from the initial selection of raw materials up to and including component installation and plant operation. Among these tests and inspections are those performed during component fabrication, plant construction, startup and check out, and during plant operation.
| |
| 4.2.2.4 Design Loading Categories The combination of design loadings fit into either the normal upset or faulted conditions as defined in the ASME Section III Code.
| |
| Loads and deflections imposed on components due to shock and vibration are determined analytically and experimentally in both scaled models and operating reactors. The cyclic stresses due to these dynamic loads and deflections are combined with the stresses imposed by loads from component weights, hydraulic forces and thermal gradients for the determination of the total stresses of the internals.
| |
| The reactor internals are designed to withstand stresses originating from various operating conditions as summarized in Table 5.2-2.
| |
| The scope of the stress analysis problem is very large requiring many different techniques and methods, both static and dynamic. The analysis performed depends on the mode of operation under consideration.
| |
| Allowable Deflections For normal operating conditions, downward vertical deflection of the lower core support plate is negligible.
| |
| For the loss of coolant accident plus the 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake condition, the deflection criteria of critical internal structures are the limiting values given in Table 3.9-5. The corresponding no loss of function limits are included in Table 3.9-5 for comparison purposes with the allowed criteria.
| |
| The criteria for the core drop accident are based upon analyses which have been performed to determine the total downward displacement of the internal structures following a hypothesized core drop resulting from loss of the normal core barrel supports. The initial clearance between the secondary core support structures and the reactor vessel lower head in the hot condition is approximately one half inch. An additional displacement of approximately 3/4 inch would occur due to strain of the energy absorbing devices of the secondary core support; thus the total drop distance is about 1-1/4 inches which is not sufficient to permit the grips of the rod cluster control assembly to come out of the guide thimble in the fuel assemblies.
| |
| 4.2-26
| |
| | |
| WBN Specifically, the secondary core support is a device which will never be used, except during a hypothetical accident of the core support (core barrel, barrel flange, etc.). There are 4 supports in each reactor. This device limits the fall of the core and absorbs the energy of the fall which otherwise would be imparted to the vessel. The energy of the fall is calculated assuming a complete and instantaneous failure of the primary core support and is absorbed during the plastic deformation of the controlled volume of stainless steel, loaded in tension. The maximum deformation of this austenitic stainless piece is limited to approximately 15%, after which a positive stop is provided to insure support.
| |
| 4.2.2.5 Design Criteria Basis The basis for the design stress and deflection criteria is identified below:
| |
| Allowable Stress The initial design of Watts Bar was before the establishment of Subsection NG of the ASME Code, and no specific stress report was written for this application. However, previous evaluations were performed using the January 1971 Draft of Section III of the ASME B & PV Code. Later work by the NSSS vendor, such as for the V5H fuel conversion, did make use of more recent versions of the ASME code. Essentially all the fabrication and inspection requirements of Subsection NG have been satisfied.
| |
| Exceptions to code requirements include 'code stamp' not being applied to the reactor internals and no specific stress report written for Watts Bar Nuclear Plant.
| |
| The 10 CFR 50 Appendix B is complied with and the resulting stresses and deformations are below established limits.
| |
| 4.2.3 Reactivity Control System 4.2.3.1 Design Bases Bases for temperature, stress on structural members, and material compatibility are imposed on the design of the reactivity control components.
| |
| 4.2.3.1.1 Design Stresses The reactivity control system is designed to withstand stresses originating from various operating conditions as summarized in Table 5.2-2.
| |
| 4.2-27
| |
| | |
| WBN Allowable Stresses For normal operating conditions, Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Code is used. Pressure boundary components are analyzed as Class I components under Article NB-3000.
| |
| Dynamic Analysis The cyclic stresses due to dynamic loads from component weights, hydraulic forces and thermal gradients are used for the determination of the total stresses of the reactivity control system.
| |
| 4.2.3.1.2 Material Compatibility Materials are selected for compatibility in a PWR environment, for adequate mechanical properties at room and operating temperature, for resistance to adverse property changes in a radioactive environment, and for compatibility with interfacing components.
| |
| 4.2.3.1.3 Reactivity Control Components The reactivity control components are described below:
| |
| These components are the rod cluster control assemblies, control rod drive mechanisms, neutron source assemblies, burnable absorber assemblies, and thimble plug assemblies.
| |
| Although the thimble plug assembly does not directly contribute to the reactivity control of the reactor, it is presented as a reactivity control system component in this document because it is needed to restrict bypass flow through those thimbles not occupied by absorber, source, or burnable absorber rods.
| |
| The design bases for each of the mentioned components are in the following paragraphs.
| |
| Rod Cluster Control Assemblies (Absorber Rods)
| |
| The following are considered design conditions under Article NB-3000 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III. The control rod which is cold rolled Type 304 stainless steel is the only non-code material used in the control rod assembly. The stress intensity limit Sm for this material is defined at 2/3 of the 0.2% offset yield stress.
| |
| : 1. The external pressure equal to the Reactor Coolant System operating pressure.
| |
| : 2. The wear allowance equivalent to 1,000 reactor trips.
| |
| : 3. Bending of the rod due to a misalignment in the guide tube.
| |
| : 4. Forces imposed on the rods during rod drop.
| |
| : 5. Loads caused by accelerations imposed by the control rod drive mechanism.
| |
| : 6. Radiation exposure for maximum core life.
| |
| : 7. Temperature effects at operating conditions.
| |
| 4.2-28
| |
| | |
| WBN The absorber materials temperatures shall not exceed 1454°F which is the lower melting point of the two absorber materials.[22]
| |
| Burnable Absorber Rods The Westinghouse designed wet annular burnable absorber (WABA) is used in initial and reload cores. Reference [29] verifies that the WABA design meets burnable absorber design criteria.
| |
| Neutron Source Rods The neutron source rods are designed to withstand the following:
| |
| : 1. The external pressure equal to the Reactor Coolant System operating pressure and
| |
| : 2. An internal pressure equal to an initial prepressurization and the pressure generated by released gases over the source rod life.
| |
| Thimble Plug Assembly The thimble plug assemblies satisfy the following:
| |
| : 1. Accommodate the differential thermal expansion between the fuel assembly and the core internals,
| |
| : 2. Maintain positive contact with the fuel assembly and the core internals.
| |
| : 3. Limit the flow through each occupied thimble to acceptable design value.
| |
| 4.2.3.1.4 Control Rod Drive Mechanisms The control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs) pressure housings are Class I components designed to meet the stress requirements for normal operating conditions of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Both static and alternating stress intensities are considered. The stresses originating from the required design transients are included in the analysis.
| |
| A dynamic seismic analysis was required on the CRDMs with a seismic disturbance postulated to confirm the ability of the pressure housing to meet ASME Code, Section III allowable stresses.
| |
| Provisions for the use of part-length control rods were included in the original design. However, part-length control rods are no longer required and the control rods are now the full-length type.
| |
| The part-length CRDMs are physically and electrically disabled. The part-length CRDM housing and associated pressure retention components remain part of the RCS pressure boundary.
| |
| Analyses have been performed without part-length control rods. Therefore, the part-length control rods are no longer specified in the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant design basis.
| |
| CRDM Operability at WBN is Assured by the Following Actions:
| |
| : 1. Since control rods fall into the core because of gravitational acceleration and loss of power to the grippers releases the control rods, the CRDM is a fail-safe component.
| |
| : 2. Rod drop time measurements during startup perform verification of operability of control rod insertion.
| |
| 4.2-29
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 3. Rod drop capability under abnormal conditions has been demonstrated by:
| |
| : a. Prototype flow tests which were performed for flows in excess of 150% of design flow over a wide range of temperatures.
| |
| : b. Scram deflection tests on CRDM's.
| |
| : c. Scram deflection tests on guide tubes and fuel assemblies.
| |
| : d. In addition, a Westinghouse licensee has performed dynamic tests on a prototype CRDM which provides additional evidence of the ability to insert control rods during a seismic event.
| |
| The ability to insert control rods is assured by the fail-safe CRDM design employed. Rod drop time tests provide confirmation of acceptable control rod insertion performance. Furthermore, capability under abnormal conditions has been demonstrated by tests performed by Westinghouse and Westinghouse licensees. The results of these tests confirm operability under abnormal conditions.
| |
| Control Rod Drive Mechanisms Operational Requirements The basic operational requirements for the CRDMs are:
| |
| : 1. 5/8 inch step,
| |
| : 2. 144 inch nominal travel,
| |
| : 3. 360 pound maximum load,
| |
| : 4. Step in or out at 45 inches/minute (72 steps/minute),
| |
| : 5. Electrical power interruption shall initiate release of drive rod assembly,
| |
| : 6. Trip delay time of less than 150 milliseconds - Free fall of drive rod assembly shall begin less than 150 milliseconds after power interruption no matter what holding or stepping action is being executed with any load and coolant temperature of 100°F to 550°F.
| |
| : 7. 40 year design life with normal refurbishment.
| |
| 4.2.3.2 Design Description Reactivity control is provided by Integral Fuel Burnable Absorbers (IFBA), Wet Annular Burnable Absorbers (WABA) neutron absorbing rods and a soluble chemical neutron absorber (boric acid). The boric acid concentration is varied to control long-term reactivity changes such as:
| |
| : 1. Fuel depletion and fission product buildup.
| |
| : 2. Cold to hot, zero power reactivity change.
| |
| : 3. Reactivity change produced by intermediate term fission products such as xenon and samarium.
| |
| 4.2-30
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 4. Burnable absorber depletion.
| |
| Chemical and volume control is covered in Section 9.3.4.
| |
| The rod cluster control assemblies provide reactivity control for:
| |
| : 1. Shutdown.
| |
| : 2. Reactivity changes due to coolant temperature changes in the power range.
| |
| : 3. Reactivity changes associated with the power coefficient of reactivity.
| |
| : 4. Reactivity changes due to void formation.
| |
| The first fuel cycle contains more excess reactivity than subsequent cycles due to the loading of all fresh (unburned) fuel. If soluble boron were the sole means of control, the moderator temperature coefficient would be positive. It is desirable to have a negative moderator temperature coefficient throughout the entire cycle in order to reduce possible deleterious effects caused by a positive coefficient during loss of coolant or loss of flow accidents. This is accomplished by the use of burnable absorbers.
| |
| The neutron source assemblies provide a means of monitoring the core during periods of low neutron activity.
| |
| The most effective reactivity control components are the rod cluster control assemblies and their corresponding CRDM, which are the only kinetic parts in the reactor. Figure 4.2-14 identifies the rod cluster control and CRDM assembly, in addition to the arrangement of these components in the reactor relative to the interfacing fuel assembly and guide tube. In the following paragraphs, each reactivity control component is described in detail.
| |
| The guidance system for the control rod cluster is provided by the guide tube as shown in Figure 4.2-14. The guide tube provides two regimes of guidance: 1) In the lower section, a continuous guidance system provides support immediately above the core. This system protects the rod against excessive deformation and wear due to hydraulic loading. 2) The region above the continuous section provides support and guidance at uniformly spaced intervals.
| |
| The envelope of support is determined by the pattern of the control rod cluster as shown in Figure 4.2-15. The guide tube assures alignment and support of the control rods, spider body, and drive rod while maintaining trip times at or below required limits.
| |
| 4.2-31
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.2.3.2.1 Reactivity Control Components Rod Cluster Control Assembly The rod cluster control assemblies are divided into two categories: control and shutdown. The control groups compensate for reactivity changes due to variations in operating conditions of the reactor, power and temperature variations. Two criteria have been employed for selection of the control group. First, the total reactivity worth must be adequate to meet the nuclear requirements of the reactor. Second, in view of the fact that these rods may be partially inserted at power operation, the total power peaking factor should be low enough to ensure that the power capability is met. The control and shutdown group provides adequate shutdown margin, which is defined as the amount of negative reactivity by which the core would be subcritical at hot shutdown if all rod cluster control assemblies are tripped, assuming that the highest worth assembly remains fully withdrawn and assuming no changes in xenon or boron concentration.
| |
| A rod cluster control assembly comprises a group of individual neutron absorber rods fastened at the top end to a common spider assembly, as illustrated in Figure 4.2-15.
| |
| The absorber material used in the Ag-In-Cd control rods is a solid Silver-Indium-Cadmium (Ag-In-Cd) alloy slug which is essentially black to thermal neutrons and has sufficient additional resonance absorption to significantly increase its worth. The absorber material is sealed in cold worked stainless steel tubes to prevent them from coming in direct contact with the coolant. In construction, the Ag-In-Cd slugs are inserted into cold-worked stainless tubing which is then sealed at the bottom and top by welded end plugs as shown in Figure 4.2-16. Sufficient diametral and end clearance are provided to accommodate relative thermal expansions.
| |
| Alternative absorber materials used in the control rods are B4C (boron carbide) pellets plus silver-indium-cadmium alloy slugs which are essentially "black" to thermal neutrons. These materials have sufficient additional resonance absorption to significantly increase their worth.
| |
| The B4C pellets are stacked on top of the extruded AG-IN-CD slugs and are sealed in stainless steel tubes to prevent them from coming in direct contact with the coolant. In construction, the B4C pellets and the silver-indium-cadmium slugs are inserted into cold-worked stainless steel tubing which is then sealed at the bottom and the top by welded end plugs as shown in Figure 4.2-16. Sufficient diametral and end clearance is provided to accommodate relative thermal expansions and material swelling.
| |
| The bottom plugs are made bullet-nosed to reduce the hydraulic drag during reactor trip and to guide smoothly into the dashpot section of the fuel assembly guide thimbles. The upper plug is threaded for assembly to the spider and has a reduced end section to make the joint more flexible.
| |
| The material used in the absorber rod end plugs is Type 308 stainless steel. The design stresses used for the Type 308 material are the same as those defined in the ASME Code, Section III, for Type 304 stainless steel. At room temperature the yield and ultimate stresses per ASTM-580 are exactly the same for the two alloys. In view of the similarity of the alloy composition, the temperature dependence of strength for the two materials is also assumed to be the same.
| |
| 4.2-32
| |
| | |
| WBN The allowable stresses used as a function of temperature are listed in Table 1.1-2 of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The fatigue strength for the Type 308 material is based on the S-N curve for austenitic stainless steels in Figure 1.9-2 of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. There are no other applications of stressed wrought Type 308 stainless steel in the control rod assembly. The spider assembly is in the form of a central hub with radial vanes containing cylindrical fingers from which the absorber rods are suspended. Handling grooves and internal grooves for connection to the drive rod assembly are machined into the upper end of the hub. A coil spring inside the spider body absorbs the impact energy at the end of a trip insertion. The radial vanes are joined to the hub by tack weld and braze and the fingers are joined to the vanes by brazing. A centerpost which holds the spring and its retainer is threaded into the hub within the skirt and welded to prevent loosening in service. Components of the spider assembly are made from Types 304 and 306 stainless steel except for the retainer which is of 17-4 PH material and the springs which are Inconel-718.
| |
| The absorber rods are fastened securely to the spider to assure trouble free service. The rods are first threaded into the spider fingers and then pinned to maintain joint tightness, after which the pins are welded in place. The end plug below the pin position is designed with a reduced section to permit flexing of the rods to correct for small operating or assembly misalignments.
| |
| The overall length is such that when the assembly is withdrawn through its full travel the tips of the absorber rods remain engaged in the guide thimbles so that alignment between rods and thimbles is always maintained. Since the rods are long and slender, they are relatively free to conform to any small misalignments with the guide thimble.
| |
| Burnable Absorber and IFBA Each burnable absorber assembly consists of borosilicate or WABA burnable absorber rods attached to a hold down assembly. Conceptual burnable absorber assemblies are shown in Figure 4.2-18. WABA rods may be used in place of the borosilicate absorber rods.
| |
| The borosilicate absorber rods consist of borosilicate glass tubes contained within Type 304 stainless steel tubular cladding which is plugged and seal welded at the ends to encapsulate the glass. The glass is also supported along the length of its inside diameter by a thin-wall tubular inner liner. The top end of the liner is open to permit the diffused helium to pass into the void volume and the liner overhangs the glass. The liner has an outward flange at the bottom end to maintain the position of the liner with the glass. A typical borosilicate burnable absorber rod is shown in longitudinal and transverse cross-sections in Figure 4.2-19.
| |
| A WABA rod (Figure 4.2-19A) consists of annular pellets of alumina-boron carbide (Al203-B4C) burnable absorber material contained within two concentric zircaloy tubes. These zircaloy tubes, which form the inner and outer clad for the WABA rod, are plugged and welded at each end to encapsulate the annular stack of absorber material. The assembled rod is then internally pressurized to 650 psig and seal welded. The absorber stack lengths are positioned axially within the WABA rods by the use of zircaloy bottom-end spacers. An annular plenum is provided within the rod to accommodate the helium gas released from absorber material depletion during irradiation. The reactor coolant flows inside the inner tube and outside the outer tube of the annular rod. Further design details are given in Section 3.0 of Reference [29].
| |
| 4.2-33
| |
| | |
| WBN The burnable absorber rods are statically suspended and positioned in selected guide thimbles within the fuel assemblies. The absorber rods in each assembly are attached together at the top end of the rods to a holddown assembly by a flat, perforated retaining plate which fits within the fuel assembly top nozzle and rests on the adapter plate. The absorber rod assembly is held down and restrained against vertical motion through a spring pack which is attached to the plate and is compressed by the upper core plate when the reactor upper internals assembly is lowered into the reactor. This arrangement ensures that the absorber rods cannot be ejected from the core by flow forces. Each rod is permanently attached to the base plate by a nut which is crimped or brazed/welded into place.
| |
| The borosilicate rod cladding is slightly-cold-worked Type 304 stainless steel, and the WABA rod cladding is Zircaloy-4 or ZIRLO. The other structural materials are Type 304 or 308 stainless steel except for the springs which are Inconel-718. The borosilicate glass tube provides sufficient boron content to meet the criteria discussed in Section 4.3.1.
| |
| IFBA consist of a thin zirconium-diboride (ZrB2) coating on some of the fuel pellets. The axial stack of the ZrB2 coated pellets, the total number used in the core, and the placement pattern are determined for each cycle of operation. IFBAs offer an advantage in that discrete burnable absorber assembly handling is avoided during refueling and there are a greater number of available locations within the core to position the absorber.
| |
| Neutron Source Assembly The purpose of the neutron source assembly is to provide base neutron level to ensure that the detectors are operational and responding to core multiplication neutrons. Since there is very little neutron activity during loading, refueling, shutdown, and approach to criticality, a neutron source is placed in the reactor to provide a positive neutron count. During approach to criticality, at least 1/2 cps on the source range detectors attributable to neutrons is required.
| |
| The detectors, called source range detectors, are used primarily when the core is subcritical and during special subcritical modes of operations.
| |
| The source assembly also permits detection of changes in the core multiplication factor during core loading, refueling, and approach to criticality. This can be done since the multiplication factor is related to an inverse function of the detector count rate. Therefore a change in the multiplication factor can be detected during addition of fuel assemblies while loading the core, a change in control rod positions, and changes in boron concentration.
| |
| Both primary and secondary neutron source rods are used. The primary source rod, containing a radioactive material, spontaneously emits neutrons during initial core loading and reactor startup. After the primary source rod decays beyond the desired neutron flux level, neutrons are then supplied by the secondary source rod. The secondary source rod contains a stable material, which must be activated by neutron bombardment during reactor operation. The activation results in the subsequent release of neutrons. This becomes a source of neutrons during periods of low neutron flux, such as during refueling and subsequent startups.
| |
| The initial reactor core employs four source assemblies; two primary source assemblies and two secondary source assemblies. Reload cores contain a sufficient number of neutron source assemblies to provide adequate neutron activity for the source range detector(s). Each primary source assembly contains one primary source rod and between zero and twenty-three burnable absorber rods. A secondary source assembly contains a symmetrical grouping of six secondary source rods and between zero and eighteen burnable absorber rods. Locations not filled with a source or burnable absorber rod contain a thimble plug. Conceptual source assemblies are shown in Figures 4.2-20 and 4.2-21.
| |
| 4.2-34
| |
| | |
| WBN Neutron source assemblies are inserted into the guide thimbles in fuel assemblies at selected unrodded locations typically at diametrically opposite sides of the core. A source assembly contains a holddown assembly identical to that of the burnable absorber assembly.
| |
| The primary and secondary source rods are clad in stainless steel. The secondary source rods contain Antimony-Beryllium (Sb-Be) pellets stacked to a height of approximately 88 inches. The primary source rods contain capsules of californium source material and alumina spacer rods to position the source material within the cladding. The rods in each assembly are permanently fastened at the top end to a holddown assembly, which is identical to that of the burnable absorber assemblies.
| |
| The other structural members are constructed of Type 304 stainless steel except for the springs.
| |
| The springs exposed to the reactor coolant are wound from an age hardened nickel base alloy for corrosion resistance and high strength.
| |
| Thimble Plug Assembly In order to limit bypass flow through the guide thimbles in fuel assemblies which do not contain either control rods, source rods, or burnable absorber rods, the fuel assemblies at those locations are fitted with thimble plug assemblies.
| |
| The thimble plug assemblies as shown in Figure 4.2-22 consist of a flat base plate with short rods suspended from the bottom surface and a spring pack assembly. The twenty-four short rods, called thimble plugs, project into the upper ends of the guide thimbles to reduce the bypass flow. Similar short rods are also used on the source assemblies and burnable absorber assemblies to plug the ends of all vacant fuel assembly guide thimbles. At installation in the core, the thimble plug assemblies interface with both the upper core plate and with the fuel assembly top nozzles by resting on the adaptor plate. The spring pack is compressed by the upper core plate when the upper internals assembly is lowered into place. Each thimble plug is permanently attached to the base plate by a nut which is locked to the threaded end of the plug by a small lock bar welded to the nut.
| |
| The components in the thimble plug assembly, except for the springs, are constructed from Type 304 stainless steel. The springs are wound from an age hardened nickel base alloy for corrosion resistance and high strength.
| |
| 4.2-35
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.2.3.2.2 Control Rod Drive Mechanism (CRDM)
| |
| Parts of the CRDM that are exposed to reactor coolant are fabricated of metals which resist the corrosive action of the primary coolant. Three types of metals are used exclusively: stainless steels, nickelchrome-iron alloy and cobalt based alloys. In the case of stainless steels, only austenitic and martensitic stainless steels are used. The martensitic stainless steels are not used in the heat treated conditions which cause susceptibility to stress corrosion cracking or accelerated corrosion in the Westinghouse PWR water chemistry. These martensitic stainless steels are procured in accordance with ASME Code Case 1337-8 (Unit 1) or 1337-3 (Unit 2) wherein the minimum tempering temperature is 1125°F.
| |
| The discussions provided in Sections 5.2.5, 5.2.5.1, 5.2.5.2, 5.2.5.3, 5.2.5.4, 5.2.5.5 and 5.2.5.6 concerning the processes, inspections and tests on austenitic stainless steel components to assure freedom from increased susceptibility to intergranular corrosion caused by sensitization, and the discussions provided in Sections 5.2.5.5 and 5.2.5.7 on the control of welding of austenitic stainless steels, especially control of delta ferrite, are applicable to the austenitic stainless steel components of the control rod drive mechanisms.
| |
| Wherever magnetic flux is carried by parts exposed to the main coolant, 400 series stainless steel is used. Cobalt based alloys are used for the pins and latch tips. Nickel-chrome-iron alloy is used for the springs of latch assemblies and Type 304 stainless steel is used for all pressure containing parts as listed in Table 5.2-8.
| |
| Hard chrome plating provides wear surfaces on the sliding parts and prevents galling between mating parts.
| |
| Position indicators are mounted on the control rod drive mechanism rod travel housings. Each assembly detects the drive rod position by means of 42 discrete coils that magnetically sense the entry and presence of the rod drive line through its center line over the normal length of the drive rod travel.
| |
| Control rod drive mechanisms are located on the dome of the reactor vessel. They are coupled to rod control clusters which have absorber material over the entire length of the control rods and derive their name from this feature. The control rod drive mechanism is shown in Figure 4.2-23 and schematically in Figure 4.2-24.
| |
| The primary function of the control rod drive mechanism is to insert or withdraw rod cluster control assemblies within the core to control average core temperature and to shutdown the reactor.
| |
| 4.2-36
| |
| | |
| WBN The full length control rod drive mechanism is a magnetically operated jack. A magnetic jack is an arrangement of three electromagnets which are energized in a controlled sequence by a power cycler to insert or withdraw rod cluster control assemblies in the reactor core in discrete steps. Rapid insertion of the rod cluster control assemblies occurs when electrical power is interrupted.
| |
| The control rod drive mechanism consists of four separate subassemblies. They are the pressure vessel, coil stack assembly, latch assembly, and the drive rod assembly.
| |
| : 1. The pressure vessel includes a latch housing and a rod travel housing which are connected by a threaded, seal welded, maintenance joint which facilitates replacement of the latch assembly. The closure at the top of the rod travel housing is a threaded plug with a canopy seal weld for pressure integrity. This closure contains a threaded plug used for venting.
| |
| The latch housing is the lower portion of the vessel and contains the latch assembly.
| |
| The rod travel housing is the upper portion of the vessel and provides space for the drive rod during its upward movement as the control rods are withdrawn from the core.
| |
| : 2. The coil stack assembly includes the coil housings, an electrical conduit and connector, and three operating coils; 1) the stationary gripper coil, 2) the moveable gripper coil, and
| |
| : 3) the lift coil.
| |
| The coil stack assembly is a separate unit which is installed on the drive mechanism by sliding it over the outside of the latch housing. It rests on the base of the latch housing without mechanical attachment.
| |
| Energizing the operating coils causes movement of the pole pieces and latches in the latch assembly.
| |
| : 3. The latch assembly includes the guide tube, stationary pole pieces, moveable pole pieces, and two sets of latches; 1) the moveable gripper latches and 2) the stationary gripper latches.
| |
| The latches engage grooves in the drive rod assembly. The moveable gripper latches are moved up or down in 5/8 inch steps by the lift pole to raise or lower the drive rod.
| |
| The stationary gripper latches hold the drive rod assembly while the moveable gripper latches are repositioned for the next 5/8 inch step.
| |
| : 4. The drive rod assembly includes a flexible coupling, a drive rod, a disconnect button, a disconnect rod, and a locking button.
| |
| The drive rod has 5/8 inch grooves which receive the latches during holding or moving of the drive rod. The flexible coupling is attached to the drive rod and provides the means for coupling to the rod cluster control assembly.
| |
| The disconnect rod and associated parts provide positive locking of the coupling to the rod cluster control assembly and permits remote disconnection of the drive rod.
| |
| The control rod drive mechanism is a trip design. Tripping can occur during any part of the power cycler sequencing if electrical power to the coils is interrupted.
| |
| 4.2-37
| |
| | |
| WBN Pressure vessel assembly (latch housing) is threaded and seal welded on an adapter on top of the reactor vessel.
| |
| The mechanism is capable of raising or lowering a 360 pound load, (which includes the drive rod-weight) at a rate of 45 inches/minute. Withdrawal of the rod cluster control assembly is accomplished by magnetic forces while insertion is by gravity.
| |
| The mechanism internals are designed to operate in 650°F reactor coolant. The pressure vessel is designed to contain reactor coolant at 650°F and 2500 psia. The three operating coils are designed to operate at 392°F with forced air cooling required to maintain that temperature.
| |
| The control rod drive mechanism shown schematically in Figure 4.2-24 withdraws and inserts a rod cluster control assembly as shaped electrical pulses are received by the operating coils. An ON or OFF sequence causes either withdrawal or insertion of the control rod. Position of the control rod is measured by 42 discrete coils mounted on the position indicator assembly surrounding the rod travel housing. Each coil magnetically senses the entry and presence of the top of the ferromagnetic drive rod assembly as it moves through the coil center line.
| |
| During plant operation the stationary gripper coil of the drive mechanism holds the rod cluster control assembly in a static position until a stepping sequence is initiated, at which time the moveable gripper coil and lift coil are energized sequentially.
| |
| Rod Cluster Control Assembly Withdrawal The rod cluster control assembly is withdrawn by repetition of the following sequence of events (refer to Figure 4.2-24):
| |
| : 1. Movable Gripper Coil (B) - ON The latch locking plunger raises and swings the movable gripper latches into the drive rod assembly groove. A 1/16 inch axial clearance exists between the latch teeth and the drive rod.
| |
| : 2. Stationary Gripper Coil (A) - OFF The force of gravity, acting upon the drive rod assembly and attached control rod, causes the stationary gripper latches and plunger to move downward 1/16 inch until the load of the drive rod assembly and attached control rod is transferred to the movable gripper latches. The plunger continues to move downward and swings the stationary gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
| |
| : 3. Lift Coil (C) - ON The 5/8 inch gap between the movable gripper pole and the lift pole closes and the drive rod assembly raises one step length (5/8 inch).
| |
| : 4. Stationary Gripper Coil (A) - ON The plunger raises and closes the gap below the stationary gripper pole. The three links, pinned to the plunger, swing and the stationary gripper latches into a drive rod assembly groove. The latches contact the drive rod assembly and lift it (and the attached control rod) 1/16 inch. The 1/16 inch vertical drive rod assembly movement transfers the drive rod assembly load from the movable gripper latches to the stationary gripper latches.
| |
| 4.2-38
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 5. Moveable Gripper Coil (B) - OFF The latch locking plunger separates from the movable gripper pole under the force of a spring and gravity. Three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three movable gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
| |
| : 6. Lift Coil (C) - OFF The gap between the movable gripper pole and lift pole opens. The movable gripper latches drop 5/8 inch to a position adjacent to a drive rod assembly groove.
| |
| : 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for the next 5/8 inch step.
| |
| The sequence described above (Items 1 through 6) is termed as one step or one cycle. The rod cluster control assembly moves 5/8 inch for each step or cycle. The sequence is repeated at a rate of up to 72 steps per minute and the drive rod assembly (which has a 5/8 inch groove pitch) is raised 72 grooves per minute. The rod cluster control assembly is thus withdrawn at a rate up to 45 inches per minute.
| |
| Rod Cluster Control Assembly Insertion The sequence for rod cluster control assembly insertion is similar to that for control rod withdrawal, except the timing of lift coil (C) ON and OFF is changed to permit lowering the control assembly.
| |
| : 1. Lift Coil (C) - ON The 5/8 inch gap between the movable gripper and lift pole closes. The movable gripper latches are raised to a position adjacent to a drive rod assembly groove.
| |
| : 2. Moveable Gripper Coil (B) - ON The latch locking plunger raises and swings the movable gripper latches into a drive rod assembly groove. A 1/16 inch axial clearance exists between the latch teeth and the drive rod assembly.
| |
| : 3. Stationary Gripper Coil (A) - OFF The force of gravity, acting upon the drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assembly, causes the stationary gripper latches and plunger to move downward 1/16 inch until the load of the drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assembly is transferred to the movable gripper latches. The plunger continues to move downward and swings the stationary gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
| |
| : 4. Lift Coil (C) - OFF The force of gravity and spring force separates the movable gripper pole from the lift pole and the drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assembly drop down 5/8 inch.
| |
| 4.2-39
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 5. Stationary Gripper (A) - ON The plunger raises and closes the gap below the stationary gripper pole. The three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three stationary gripper latches into a drive rod assembly groove. The latches contact the drive rod assembly and lift it (and the attached control rod) 1/16 inch. The 1/16 inch vertical drive rod assembly movement transfers the drive rod assembly load from the movable gripper latches to the stationary gripper latches.
| |
| : 6. Movable Gripper Coil (B) - OFF The latch locking plunger separates from the movable gripper pole under the force of a spring and gravity. Three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three movable gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
| |
| : 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for the next 5/8 inch step.
| |
| The sequence is repeated, as for rod cluster control assembly withdrawal, up to 72 times per minute which gives an insertion rate of 45 inches per minute.
| |
| Holding and Tripping of the Control Rods During most of the plant operating time, the control rod drive mechanisms hold the rod cluster control assemblies withdrawn from the core in a static position. In the holding mode, only one coil, the stationary gripper coil (A), is energized on each mechanism. The drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assemblies hang suspended from the three latches.
| |
| If power to the stationary gripper coil is cut off, the combined weight of the drive rod assembly and the rod cluster control assembly is sufficient to move the latches out of the drive rod assembly groove. The control rod falls by gravity into the core. The trip occurs as the magnetic field, holding the stationary gripper plunger half against the stationary gripper pole, collapses and the stationary gripper plunger half is forced down by the weight acting upon the latches.
| |
| After the rod cluster control assembly is released by the mechanism, it falls freely until the control rods enter the dashpot section of the guide thimbles in the fuel assembly.
| |
| 4.2.3.3 Design Evaluation 4.2.3.3.1 Reactivity Control Components The components are analyzed for loads corresponding to normal, upset, emergency and faulted conditions. The analysis performed depends on the mode of operation under consideration.
| |
| The scope of the analysis requires many different techniques and methods, both static and dynamic.
| |
| 4.2-40
| |
| | |
| WBN Some of the loads that are considered on each component where applicable are as follows:
| |
| : 1. Control Rod Trip (equivalent static load)
| |
| : 2. Differential Pressure
| |
| : 3. Spring Preloads
| |
| : 4. Coolant Flow Forces (static)
| |
| : 5. Temperature Gradients
| |
| : 6. Differences in thermal expansion
| |
| : a. Due to temperature differences
| |
| : b. Due to expansion of different materials
| |
| : 7. Interference between components
| |
| : 8. Vibration (mechanically or hydraulically induced)
| |
| : 9. All operational transients listed in Table 5.2-2
| |
| : 10. Pump Overspeed
| |
| : 11. Seismic Loads (operation basis earthquake and design basis earthquake)
| |
| : 12. Blowdown forces (injection transients for the cold and hot leg break)
| |
| : 13. Material swelling
| |
| : 14. Gas Generation Pressure The main objective of the analysis was to satisfy allowable stress limits, to assure an adequate design margin, and to establish deformation limits which are concerned primarily with the functioning of the components. The stress limits were established not only to assure that peak stresses will not reach unacceptable values, but also to limit the amplitude of the oscillatory stress component in consideration of fatigue characteristics of the materials. Standard methods of strength of materials were used to establish the stresses and deflections of these components. The dynamic behavior of the reactivity control components has been studied using experimental test data [20] and experience from operating reactors.
| |
| The design of reactivity component rods provides sufficient cold void volume within the burnable absorber, source rods, and neutron absorber rods containing full length silver-indium-cadmium or alternatively B4C to limit the internal pressures to a value which satisfies the criteria in Section 4.2.3.1. A gas plenum at the top of the absorber, source, and burnable absorber rods provides void volume for the pressure buildup. Void volume for the helium in the burnable absorber rods is also obtained through the use of glass in tubular form which provides a central void along the length of the rods. Helium gas is not released by the AG-IN-CD neutron absorber rod material but is released by the B4C absorber material. The internal pressure of source rods continues to increase from ambient until end of life. The stress analysis of reactivity component rods assumes 100% gas release to the rod void volume and satisfies the criteria in Section 4.2.3.1.
| |
| 4.2-41
| |
| | |
| WBN Based on available data for properties of the borosilicate glass and on nuclear and thermal calculations for the burnable absorber rods, gross swelling or cracking of the glass tubing is not expected during operation. Some minor creep of the glass at the hot spot on the inner surface of the tube could occur but would continue only until the glass came in contact with the inner liner. The wall thickness of the inner liner is sized to provide adequate support in the event of slumping and to collapse locally before rupture of the exterior cladding if unexpected large volume changes due to swelling or cracking should occur. The top of the inner liner is open to allow communication to the central void by the helium which diffuses out of the glass.
| |
| Sufficient diametral and end clearances have been provided in the neutron absorber, burnable absorber and source rods to accommodate the relative thermal expansions and material swelling between the enclosed material and the surrounding clad and end plugs. There is no bending or warping induced in the rods although the clearance offered by the guide thimble would permit a postulated warpage to occur without restraint on the rods. Bending, therefore, is not considered in the analysis of the rods. The radial and axial temperature profiles have been determined by considering gap conductance, thermal expansion, and neutron and/or gamma heating of the contained material as well as gamma heating of the clad. The maximum neutron absorber material temperature is less than the melting temperature for the AG-IN-CD and the B4C pellets. The maximum temperatures occur axially at only the highest flux region. The maximum borosilicate glass temperature was calculated to be about 1200°F and takes place following the initial rise to power. The glass temperature then decreases rapidly for the following reasons: 1) reduction in power generation due to B10 depletion; 2) better gap conductance as the helium produced diffuses to the gap; and 3) external gap reduction due to borosilicate glass creep. Rod, guide thimble, and dashpot flow analysis performed indicates that the flow is sufficient to prevent coolant boiling and maintain clad temperatures at which the clad material has adequate strength to resist coolant operating pressures and rod internal pressures.
| |
| The Westinghouse designed WABA is used in reload cores. Reference [29] verifies that the WABA design meets burnable absorber design criteria.
| |
| There is significant operating experience with ZIRLO guide thimbles in Westinghouse-designed reactor cores.[3] Reference [28] verifies that the zircaloy guide thimbles in the V5H fuel assembly skeleton comply with the design criteria.
| |
| Temperatures for thimbles at the bottom of the fuel assemblies range from approximately 530°F to 563°F. Mid-assembly temperatures reach a high of about 593°F while the maximum temperatures at the top of the assemblies are about 641°F.
| |
| 4.2-42
| |
| | |
| WBN Analysis on the rod cluster control spider indicates the spider is structurally adequate to withstand the various operating loads including the higher loads which occur during the drive mechanism stepping action and rod drop. Experimental verification of the spider structural capability has been completed.
| |
| The materials selected are considered to be the best available from the standpoint of resistance to irradiation damage and compatibility with the reactor environment. The materials selected partially dictate the reactor environment (e.g., Cl control in the coolant). The current design type reactivity controls exclusive of the full length silver-indium-cadmium or alternatively B4C control rod assembly, have been in service for a number of years. Operational experience with Westinghouse-designed RCCAs is provided in Reference [3].
| |
| At high fluencies the austenitic materials increase in strength with a corresponding decreased ductility (as measured by tensile tests) but energy absorption (as measured by impact tests) remains quite high. Corrosion of the materials exposed to the coolant is quite low and proper control of Cl and O2 in the coolant will prevent the occurrence of stress corrosion. The austenitic stainless steel base materials used are processed and fabricated to preclude sensitization. Although the control rod spiders are fabricated by furnace brazing, the procedure used requires that the pieces be rapidly cooled so that the time-at-temperature is minimized.
| |
| The time that is spent by the control rod spiders in the sensitization range, 800 - 1500°F, is not more than 0.2 hours, as a maximum, during fabrication to preclude sensitization. The 17-4 PH parts are aged at the highest standard aging temperature of 1100°F to avoid stress corrosion problems exhibited by aging at lower temperatures.
| |
| Based on the following considerations, it is judged that the potential for interference with rod cluster control assembly movement due to unusual local corrosion phenomena of the Zircaloy guide thimbles is very low. Operational experience to date and limited PIE data on irradiated thimbles are in support of this conclusion. Since ZIRLO has demonstrated superior corrosion resistance compared to Zircaloy in both autoclave tests and extensive in-reactor irradiation experience, this conclusion is applicable to ZIRLO guide thimbles as well.
| |
| : 1. Gap Considerations The minimum hot diametral gap in the reduced dash pot area of the thimble is smaller than the minimum hot diametral gap in the upper thimble area. Thus, the dashpot area constitutes the region of maximum interest relative to any possible effects of localized corrosion.
| |
| 4.2-43
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 2. Intrinsic Corrosion Using conservative calculations of corrosion kinetics in the dashpot area of the thimble (Tcoolant = 600°F and t = 1500 calendar days) it was determined that approximately 0.44 mils of oxide would be found on the Zircaloy. Taking the Pilling-Bedworth ratio at 1.56, then:
| |
| mils metal = 0.44 mils = 0.28 mils 1.56 and the decrease in tube inside diameter is:
| |
| 2 x (0.44 - 0.28) = 0.32 mils or 0.00032 inches.
| |
| This latter value is considered to be very small compared to the minimum hot gap and the risk of interference with rod movement due to inherent corrosion is considered negligibly low.
| |
| Corrosion of the stainless steel control rod clad is also considered negligible relative to potential for annulus blockage.
| |
| : 3. Deformation Enhanced Corrosion and Hydriding Maximum deformation in the expanded area of the thimble is taken to be less than 60%.
| |
| Studies of the effect of cold work on Zircaloy alloys under both steam and water conditions show no significant effects attributable to residual cold work on corrosion or hydriding behavior.[14,15] Preliminary examinations of thimbles taken from the Point Beach reactor indicate essentially equivalent corrosion rates in both bulged and unbulged areas. Thus, it is judged appropriate to estimate maximum corrosion effects by utilization of normal corrosion and hydriding models for the nominal metallurgical condition of the thimble.
| |
| : 4. Crevice Corrosion Under certain conditions, the Zircaloy alloys are susceptible to serious caustic assisted corrosion. Since LiOH is used for pH control in the primary coolant, the potential for such corrosion exists in the Westinghouse design. Studies show that caustic assisted attack can occur in crevices with low LiOH concentrations, but only under conditions of nucleate boiling[16,17]. Other work where crud, Cl-, Fe++, and F- were tested under conditions with no heat transfer, indicated no specific attack in crevices although in 0.01 M LiF, a general overall attack of the Zircaloy was noted.
| |
| 4.2-44
| |
| | |
| WBN Since the Westinghouse design is conservatively designed to preclude nucleate boiling in the annulus of the sleeve and thimble, and the overall Li+, Cl-, F-, etc., concentrations are controlled by the primary coolant specification, it is judged that crevice corrosion will not occur. Observations to date on irradiated thimbles support this expectation.
| |
| : 5. Effects of Surface Contamination The use of any materials containing compounds of elements which are suspected to be detrimental if permitted to contact a fuel assembly component is subjected to control by specification. Materials considered particularly detrimental to zircaloy are not used in the bulging operation. After fabrication, the completed fuel assembly is subjected to an aqueous cleaning operation. Tooling development studies, tests made to determine localized thinning, hydriding orientation studies relating to effects of plastic deformation, and limited post irradiation examination studies of expanded joints indicate no cases of significant surface contamination. These tests have not been formally documented.
| |
| Taking all of these factors into account, and also the fact that the as received surface condition of the thimble tubing is controlled by purchase specification, it is judged that the risk of significant corrosion due to surface contamination is quite low.
| |
| Analysis of the rod cluster control assemblies show that if the drive mechanism housing ruptures, the rod cluster control assembly will be ejected from the core by the pressure differential of the operating pressure and ambient pressure across the drive rod assembly. The ejection is also predicted on the failure of the drive mechanism to retain the drive rod/rod cluster control assembly position. It should be pointed out that a drive mechanism housing rupture will cause the ejection of only one rod cluster control assembly with the other assemblies remaining in the core. Analysis also showed that a pressure drop in excess of 4000 psi must occur across a two-fingered vane to break the vane/spider body joint causing ejection of two neutron absorber rods from the core. Since the greatest pressure drop in the system is only 2250 psi, a pressure drop in excess of 4000 psi is not possible. Thus, the ejection of the neutron absorber rods is not possible.
| |
| Ejection of a burnable absorber or thimble plug assembly is conceivable based on the postulation that the hold down bar fails and that the base plate and burnable absorber rods are severely deformed. In the unlikely event that failure of the hold down bar occurs, the upward displacement of the burnable absorber assembly only permits the base plate to contact the upper core plate. Since this displacement is small, the major portion of the borosilicate glass tubing remains positioned within the core. In the case of the thimble plug assembly, the thimble plugs will partially remain in the fuel assembly guide thimbles thus maintaining a majority of the desired flow impedance. Further displacement or complete ejection would necessitate the square base plate and burnable absorber rods be forced, thus plastically deformed, to fit up through a smaller diameter hole. It is expected that this condition requires a substantially higher force or pressure drop than that of the hold down bar failure.
| |
| 4.2-45
| |
| | |
| WBN Experience with control rods, burnable absorber rods, and source rods are discussed in Reference [3].
| |
| The mechanical design of the reactivity control components provides for the protection of the active elements to prevent the loss of control capability and functional failure of critical components. The components have been reviewed for potential failure and consequences of a functional failure of critical parts. The results of the review are summarized below.
| |
| Rod Cluster Control Assembly
| |
| : 1. The basic absorbing materials are sealed from contact with the primary coolant and the fuel assembly and guidance surfaces by a high quality stainless steel clad. Potential loss of absorber mass or reduction in reactivity control material due to mechanical or chemical erosion or wear is therefore reliably prevented.
| |
| : 2. A breach of the cladding for a limited number of absorber rods for any postulated reason does not result in serious consequences. The full length silver-indium-cadmium or alternatively B4C absorber is relatively inert and would still remain remote from high coolant velocity regions.
| |
| : 3. The individually clad absorber rods are doubly secured to the retaining spider vane by a threaded joint and a welded lock pin. This joint has been qualified by functional testing and actual service in operating plants. It should also be noted that in several instances of control rod jamming caused by foreign particles, the individual rods at the site of the jam have borne the full capacity of the control rod drive mechanism and higher impact loads to dislodge the jam without failure. The conclusion to be drawn from this experience is that this joint is extremely insensitive to potential mechanical damage. A failure of the joint would result in the almost complete insertion of the individual rod into the core, during normal operating conditions. This results in reduced reactivity which is a fail safe condition.
| |
| : 4. The spider finger braze joint by which the individual rods are fastened to the vanes has also experienced the service described above and been subjected to the same jam freeing procedures also without failure. A failure of this joint would also result in the almost complete insertion of the individual rod into the core, during normal operating conditions.
| |
| : 5. The radial vanes are attached to the spider body, again by a brazed joint. The joints are designed to a theoretical strength in excess of that of the components joined.
| |
| 4.2-46
| |
| | |
| WBN It is a feature of the design that the guidance of the rod cluster control is accomplished by the inner fingers of these vanes. They are therefore the most susceptible to mechanical damage. Since these vanes carry two rods, failure of the vane-to-hub joint such as the isolated incidents at Connecticut-Yankee does not prevent the free insertion of the rod pair[3]. Neither does such a failure interfere with the continuous free operation of the drive line, also as experienced at Connecticut-Yankee[3].
| |
| Failure of the vane-to-hub joint of a single rod vane could potentially result in failure of the separated vane and rod to insert. This could occur only at withdrawal elevations where the spider is above the continuous guidance section of the guide tube (in the upper internals). A rotation of the disconnected vane could cause it to hang on one of the guide cards in the intermediate guide tube. Such an occurrence would be evident from the failure of the rod cluster control to insert below a certain elevation but with free motion above this point.
| |
| This possibility is considered extremely remote because the single rod vanes are subjected to only vertical loads and very light lateral reactions from the rods. The consequences of such a failure are not considered critical since only one drive line of the reactivity control system would be involved. This condition is readily observed and can be cleared at shutdown.
| |
| : 6. The spider hub being of single unit cylindrical construction is very rugged and of extremely low potential for damage. It is difficult to postulate any condition to cause failure. Should some unforeseen event cause fracture of the hub above the vanes, the lower portion with the vanes and rods attached would insert by gravity into the core causing a reactivity decrease. The rod could then not be removed by the drive line, again a fail safe condition. Fracture below the vanes cannot be postulated since loads, including scram impact, are taken above the vane elevation.
| |
| : 7. The rod cluster control rods are provided a clear channel for insertion by the guide thimbles of the fuel assemblies. Providing this physical barrier between the fuel rod and the intended insertion channel protects against all fuel rod failures. Distortion of the fuel rods by bending cannot apply sufficient force to damage or significantly distort the guide thimble. Fuel rod distortion by swelling, though precluded by design, would be terminated by fracture before contact with the guide thimble occurs. If such were not the case, it would be expected that a force reaction at the point of contact would cause a slight deflection of the guide thimble. The radius of curvature of the deflected shape of the guide thimbles would be sufficiently large to have a negligible influence on rod cluster control insertion.
| |
| 4.2-47
| |
| | |
| WBN Burnable Absorber Assemblies The burnable absorber assemblies are static temporary reactivity control elements. The axial position is assured by the hold down assembly which bears against the upper core plate. Their lateral position is maintained by the guide thimbles of the fuel assemblies.
| |
| The individual rods are shouldered against the underside of the retainer plate and securely fastened at the top by a threaded nut which is then crimped or locked in place by a welded pin.
| |
| The square dimension of the retainer plate is larger than the diameter of the flow holes through the core plate. Failure of the hold down bar or spring pack therefore does not result in ejection of the burnable absorber rods from the core.
| |
| The only incident that could potentially result in ejection of the burnable absorber rods is a multiple fracture of the retainer plate. This is not considered credible because of the light loads borne by this component. During normal operation the loads borne by the plate are approximately 5 pounds/rod or a total of 100 pounds distributed at the points of attachment.
| |
| Even a multiple fracture of the retainer plate would result in jamming of the plate segments against the upper core plate, again preventing ejection. Excessive reactivity increase due to burnable absorber ejection is therefore prevented.
| |
| The burnable absorber rod is clad with the same type of stainless steel cladding as is used for the rod cluster control rods. The burnable absorber is a borosilicate glass tube which is maintained in position by a central hollow stainless steel tube. Burnable absorber rods are placed in static assemblies and are not subjected to motion which might damage the rods.
| |
| Further, the guide thimbles of the fuel assembly afford protection from damage.
| |
| During thousands of rod years of accumulated borosilicate glass burnable absorber (BA) rod experience, there have been only six (6) occurrences of BA clad penetrations or probable penetration. These occurred on borosilicate glass rods that were either assembled on secondary source assemblies which are subjected to multiple core cycles, or on BA assemblies which also had undergone multi-cycle use.
| |
| In most of these cases[4] the rods were found to be fractured with all or part of the individual broken rods being stuck in the fuel assembly guide thimbles (Reference Section 4.2, WCAP-8183, Revision 15). This exposed the borosilicate glass to the primary coolant. The fuel assemblies with the stuck BA rods were recycled through one or more additional cycles with no operational problems. Based on these results, the consequences of breaching of the clad of borosilicate glass BAs were found to be minor and to pose no operational problems.
| |
| 4.2-48
| |
| | |
| WBN To further insure trouble free performance, present designs no longer use borosilicate glass BA rods attached to the secondary source assemblies. Recycling of regular glass BA assemblies is only done occasionally to improve core performance. The Westinghouse designed WABA is used in reload cores. Reference [29] verified that the WABA design meets burnable absorber design criteria.
| |
| Drive Rod Assemblies Postulated failures of the drive rod assemblies either by fracture or uncoupling lead to the fail safe condition. If the drive rod assembly fractures at any elevation, that portion remaining coupled falls with, and is guided by the rod cluster control assembly. This results in a reactivity decrease.
| |
| 4.2.3.3.2 Control Rod Drive Mechanism Material Selection Pressure retaining materials comply with Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and are fabricated from austenitic (Type 304) stainless steel.
| |
| Magnetic pole pieces are fabricated from Type 410 stainless steel. Non-magnetic parts, except pins and springs, are fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel. Haynes 25 is used to fabricate link pins. Springs are made from nickel-chrome-iron alloy. Latch arm tips are clad with Stellite-6 to provide improved wearability. Hard chrome plate and Stellite-6 are used selectively for bearing and wear surfaces.
| |
| At the start of the development program, a survey was made to determine whether a material better than Type 410 stainless steel was available for the magnetic pole pieces. Ideal material requirements are as follows:
| |
| : 1. High magnetic saturation value
| |
| : 2. High permeability
| |
| : 3. Low coercive force
| |
| : 4. High resistivity
| |
| : 5. High curie temperature 4.2-49
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 6. Corrosion resistant
| |
| : 7. High impact strength
| |
| : 8. Non-oriented
| |
| : 9. High machinability
| |
| : 10. Resistance to radiation damage After a comprehensive material trade-off study was made it was decided that the Type 410 stainless steel was satisfactory for this application.
| |
| The cast coil housings require a magnetic material. Both low-carbon cast steel and ductile iron have been successfully tested for this application. The choice, made on the basis of cost, indicates that ductile iron was specified on the control rod drive mechanism. The finished housings are zinc plated to provide corrosion resistance.
| |
| Coils are wound on bobbins of molded Dow Corning 302 material, with double glass-insulated copper wire. Coils are then vacuum-impregnated with silicon varnish. A wrapping of mica sheet is secured to the coil outside diameter. The result is a well-insulated coil capable of sustained operation at 200 degrees centigrade.
| |
| The drive shaft assembly utilizes a Type 410 stainless steel drive rod. The coupling is machined from Type 403 stainless steel. Other parts are Type 304 stainless steel with the exception of the springs which are nickel-chrome-iron alloy and the locking button which is Haynes 25.
| |
| Radiation Damage As required by the equipment specification, the control rod drive mechanisms are designed to meet a radiation requirement of 10 rads/hour. Materials have been selected to meet this requirement. The above radiation level which amounts to 1.753 x 106 rads in twenty years will not limit control rod drive mechanism life. Control rod drive mechanisms at Yankee Rowe, which were operated from 1960 to 1992, did not experience problems due to radiation.
| |
| Positioning Requirements The mechanism has a step length of 5/8 inch which determines the positioning capabilities of the control rod drive mechanism. (Note: Positioning requirements are determined by reactor physics.)
| |
| 4.2-50
| |
| | |
| WBN Evaluation of Material's Adequacy The ability of the pressure housing components to perform throughout the design lifetime as defined in the equipment specification is confirmed by the stress analysis report required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III. Internal components subjected to wear will withstand a minimum of 3,000,000 steps without refurbishment as confirmed by life tests. Latch assembly inspection is recommended after 2.0/2.5 x 106 steps have been accumulated on a single control rod drive mechanism (Refer to Section 4.2.3.4.2).
| |
| Results of Dimensional and Tolerance Analysis With respect to the control rod drive mechanism system as a whole, critical clearances are present in the following areas:
| |
| : 1. Latch assembly (Diametral clearances)
| |
| : 2. Latch arm-drive rod clearances
| |
| : 3. Coil stack assembly-thermal clearances
| |
| : 4. Coil fit in coil housing The following write-up defines clearances that are designed to provide reliable operation in the control rod drive mechanism in these four critical areas. These clearances have been proven by life tests and actual field performance at operating plants.
| |
| Latch Assembly - Thermal Clearances The magnetic latch has several clearances where parts made of Type 410 stainless steel fit over parts made from Type 304 stainless steel. Differential thermal expansion is therefore important. Minimum clearances of these parts at 68°F is 0.011 inches. At the maximum design temperature of 650°F, minimum clearance is 0.0045 inches and at the maximum expected operating temperature of 550°F, is 0.0057 inches.
| |
| Latch Arm - Drive Rod Clearances The control rod drive mechanism incorporates a load transfer action. The movable or stationary gripper latch is not under load during engagement, as previously explained, due to load transfer action.
| |
| 4.2-51
| |
| | |
| WBN Figure 4.2-26 shows latch clearance variation with the drive rod as a result of minimum and maximum temperatures. Figure 4.2-27 shows clearance variations over the design temperature range.
| |
| Coil Stack Assembly - Thermal Clearances The assembly clearance of the coil stack assembly over the latch housing was selected so that the assembly could be removed under all anticipated conditions of thermal expansion.
| |
| At 70°F inside diameter of the coil stack is 7.308/7.298 inches. The outside diameter of the latch housing is 7.260/7.270 inches.
| |
| Thermal expansion of the mechanism due to operating temperature of the control rod drive mechanism results in minimum inside diameter of the coil stack being 7.310 inches at 222°F and the maximum latch housing diameter being 7.302 inches at 532°F.
| |
| Under extreme tolerance conditions listed above it is necessary to allow time for a 70°F coil housing to heat during a replacement operation.
| |
| Four stack assemblies were removed from four hot control rod drive mechanisms mounted on 11.035 inch centers on a 550°F test loop, allowed to cool, and then replaced without incident as a test to prove the preceding.
| |
| Coil Fit in Coil Housing Control rod drive mechanism and coil housing clearances are selected so that coil heat up results in a close to tight fit. This is done to facilitate thermal transfer and coil cooling in a hot control rod drive mechanism.
| |
| 4.2.3.4 Tests, Verification, and Inspections 4.2.3.4.1 Reactivity Control Components Tests and inspections are performed on each reactivity control component to verify the mechanical characteristics. In the case of the rod cluster control assembly, prototype testing has been conducted and both manufacturing tests/inspections and functional testing at the plant site are performed.
| |
| 4.2-52
| |
| | |
| WBN During the component manufacturing phase, the following requirements apply to the reactivity control components to assure the proper functioning during reactor operation:
| |
| : 1. All materials are procured to specifications to attain the desired standard of quality.
| |
| : 2. A spider from each braze lot is proof tested by applying a 5000 pound load to the spider body, so that approximately 208.3 pounds is applied to each finger. This proof load provides a bending moment at the spider body approximately equivalent to 1.4 times the load caused by the acceleration imposed by the control rod drive mechanism. All spiders are tested in this manner.
| |
| : 3. All clad/end-plug welds are checked for integrity by visual inspection, x-ray, and helium leak check. All the seal welds in the neutron absorber rods, burnable absorber rods and source rods are checked in this manner.
| |
| : 4. To assure proper fitup with the fuel assembly, the rod cluster control, burnable absorber and source assemblies are installed in the fuel assembly without restriction or binding in the dry condition with a force not to exceed 15 pounds. Also a straightness of 0.01 in/ft is required on the entire inserted length of each rod assembly, except burnable absorber rods, where the straightness requirement is 0.012 in/ft.
| |
| The rod cluster control assemblies were functionally tested, following initial core loading but prior to criticality to demonstrate reliable operation of the assemblies. Each assembly was operated one time at no flow/cold conditions and one time at full flow/hot conditions. The assemblies were also trip tested at full flow/hot conditions. Those assemblies whose trip times fall outside a certain tolerance were tested an additional 3 times at full flow/hot conditions. Thus each assembly was adequately tested to verify that the assemblies are properly functioning.
| |
| 4.2.3.4.2 Control Rod Drive Mechanisms Quality assurance procedures during production of control rod drive mechanisms include material selection, process control, mechanism component tests and inspections during production and hydrotests.
| |
| After all manufacturing procedures had been developed, several prototype control rod drive mechanisms and drive rod assemblies were life tested with the entire drive line under environmental conditions of temperature, pressure and flow. Acceptance tests confirm the approximate 3 x 106 step unrefurbished life capability of the control rod drive mechanism and drive rod assembly.
| |
| 4.2-53
| |
| | |
| WBN These tests include verification that the trip time achieved by the control rod drive mechanisms meet the design requirement from start of rod cluster control assembly motion to top of dashpot.
| |
| This trip time requirement was confirmed for each control rod drive mechanism prior to initial reactor operation, as required by Technical Specifications.
| |
| It is expected that control rod drive mechanisms will meet specified operating requirements for the duration of plant life with normal refurbishment. If a rod cluster control assembly cannot be moved by its mechanism, then adjustments in the boron concentration ensure that adequate shutdown margin would be achieved following a trip. However, a technical specification pertaining to an inoperable rod cluster control assembly has been set.
| |
| In order to demonstrate proper operation of the control rod drive mechanism and to ensure acceptable core power distributions during operation, partial rod cluster control assembly movement checks are performed on the rod cluster control assemblies during reactor critical operation. (Refer to Plant Technical Specifications). In addition, drop tests of the rod cluster control assemblies are performed after each refueling shutdown to demonstrate continued ability to meet trip time requirements.
| |
| The trip time requirement is confirmed for each control rod drive mechanism at hot, full flow conditions prior to reactor operation in accordance with Technical Specifications.
| |
| Mechanical performance of a full-scale B4C control rod cluster assembly at reactor operating temperature, pressure, and various flow conditions has been demonstrated in the Westinghouse D-loop test facility located at Forest Hills, Pennsylvania. The tests were conducted in a similar manner to those of the 17 x 17 fuel assembly and control rod, the results of which were previously reported in references [21] and [22].
| |
| There are no significant differences between the prototype control rod drive mechanisms and the production units. Design materials, tolerances and fabrication techniques (Section 4.2.3.3.2) are the same. Actual experience in operating Westinghouse plants indicates excellent performance of control rod drive mechanisms.
| |
| All units are production tested prior to shipment to confirm ability of the control rod drive mechanism to meet design specification-operational requirements.
| |
| 4.2-54
| |
| | |
| WBN Each production control rod drive mechanism undergoes a production test as listed below:
| |
| Test Acceptance Criteria Cold (ambient) hydrostatic ASME Section III Confirm step length and load transfer Step Length (stationary gripper to movable gripper or 5/8 + 0.015 inches axial movement movable gripper to stationary gripper) Load Transfer 0.047 inches is minimum; 0.055 is nominal at cold test conditions Cold (ambient) performance Test at Operating Speed Design load - 5 full travel excursions 45 inches/minute Trip Delay Free fall of drive rod to begin within 150 msec 4.2.3.5 Instrumentation Applications Instrumentation for determining reactor coolant average temperature (Tavg) is provided to create demand signals for moving groups of rod cluster control assemblies to provide load follow (determined as a function of turbine impulse pressure) during normal operation and to counteract operational transients. The hot and cold leg resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) are described in Section 7.2. The location of the RTDs in each loop is shown on the flow diagrams in Chapter 5. The Reactor Control System which controls the reactor coolant average temperature by regulation of control rod bank position is described in Section 7.7.
| |
| Rod position indication instrumentation is provided to sense the actual position of each control rod so that the actual position of the individual rod may be displayed to the operator. Signals are also supplied by this system as input to the rod deviation comparator. The rod position indication system is described in Chapter 7.
| |
| The reactor makeup control system whose functions are to permit adjustment of the reactor coolant boron concentration for reactivity control (as well to maintain the desired operating fluid inventory in the volume control tank), consists of a group of instruments arranged to provide a manually preselected makeup composition that is borated or diluted as required to the charging pump suction header or the volume control tank. This system, as well as other systems including boron sampling provisions that are part of the Chemical and Volume Control System, are described in Section 9.3.
| |
| 4.2-55
| |
| | |
| WBN When the reactor is critical, the normal indication of reactivity status in the core is the position of the control bank in relation to reactor power (as indicated by the Reactor Coolant System loop T) and coolant average temperature.
| |
| These parameters are used to calculate insertion limits for the control banks to give warning to the operator of excessive rod insertion. Monitoring of the neutron flux for various phases of reactor power operation as well as of core loading, shutdown, startup, and refueling is by means of the Nuclear Instrumentation System. The monitoring functions and readout and indication characteristics for the following means of monitoring reactivity are included in the discussion on safety related display instrumentation in Section 7.5:
| |
| : 1. Nuclear Instrumentation System
| |
| : 2. Temperature Indicators
| |
| : a. T average (Measured)
| |
| : b. T (Measured)
| |
| : c. Auctioneered T average
| |
| : d. T reference
| |
| : 3. Demand Position of Rod Cluster Control Assembly Group
| |
| : 4. Actual Rod Position Indicator.
| |
| 4.2.4 Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod - Tritium Production Core There is NO production of tritium through the irradiation of Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rods (TPBARs) at WBN Unit 2. Therefore, this FSAR Section 4.2.4 is NOT applicable for Unit 2.
| |
| The Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod (TPBAR) consists of concentric cylindrical subcomponents clad with 316 stainless steel (316SS), as shown in Figure 4.2-19B and 4.2-19C.
| |
| The 316 SS cladding provides the pressure barrier between the TPBAR internals and the reactor coolant system. To retain tritium and prevent the inward diffusion of hydrogen from the reactor coolant, the inner surface of the cladding is coated with an aluminized barrier. Inside the TPBAR there are pellet stack assemblies consisting of a Zirconium liner around which are stacked LiAlO2 absorber pellets. The pellet stacks are surrounded by a nickel plated zirconium getter tube, which runs the full length of the pellet stacks. Each pellet stack is approximately 12 inches in length and a sufficient number of stacks are inserted to make up the desired total stack length. The overall stack length of LiAlO2 typically ranges from 126 to 132 inches. Tritium produced in the absorber pellets reacts with the getter to form solid zirconium tritide precipitates in the Zirconium getter.
| |
| Pacific National Nuclear Laboratory (PNNL) was responsible for the design of the TPBARs, which are then inserted into Westinghouse manufactured 17 x 17 fuel assemblies. As needed on a reload basis, Westinghouse incorporates the TPBARs into the core design and subsequent safety analyses and operational data for Watts Bar.
| |
| For cycle 12, a number of TPBAR lead use assemblies (LUAs) with minor design enhancements were introduced, as shown in Figure 4.2-19D. The key differences were a full length liner, nominal half inch pellets, and a sealed getter. These changes were made to support TPBAR assembly/fabrication and have no adverse impacts to the approved TPBAR design.
| |
| 4.2-56
| |
| | |
| WBN REFERENCES
| |
| : 1. Beaumont, M. D., et al., Properties of Fuel and Core Components Materials, WCAP-9179, Revision 1 (proprietary) and WCAP-9224 (non-proprietary), 1978.
| |
| : 2. Eggleston, F. T., "Safety Related Research and Development for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors-Program Summaries, Winter 1976 -Summer 1978," WCAP-8768, Revision 2, October 1977.
| |
| : 3. Slagle, W. H., "Operational Experience with Westinghouse Cores (through December 31, 1994), WCAP-8183, Revision 23, January 1996.
| |
| : 4. Supplemental information on fuel design transmitted from R. Salvatore, Westinghouse NES, to D. Knuth, AEC, as attachments to letters NS-SL-518 (12/22/73), NS-SL-521 (12/29/72), NS-SL-524 (12/29/72) and NS-SL-543 (1/12/73), (Westinghouse Proprietary);
| |
| and supplemental information on fuel design transmitted from R. Salvatori, Westinghouse NES, to D. Knuth, AEC, as attachments to letters NS-SL-527 (1/2/73) and NS-SL-544 (1/12/73).
| |
| : 5. Hellman, J. M., (Ed.), "Fuel Densification Experimental Results and Model for Reactor Operation," WCAP-8218-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8219-A (Non-Proprietary), March 1975.
| |
| : 6. Deleted in initial UFSAR
| |
| : 7. Gesinski, L., Chiang, D. and Nakazato, S., "Safety Analysis of the 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly for Combined Seismic and Loss of Coolant Accident," WCAP-8236 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8288 (Non-Proprietary), December 1973.
| |
| : 8. Deleted in initial UFSAR.
| |
| : 9. O'Donnell, W. J. and Langer, B. F., "Fatigue Design Basis for Zircaloy Components,"
| |
| Nuclear Science and Engineering, 20,1-12, 1964.
| |
| : 10. Cadek, F. F., Cerni, S., Hellman, J. M., Reavis, W. J., "Fuel Rod Bowing," WCAP 8691 (Proprietary) and WCAP 8692 (Non-Proprietary), December 1975.
| |
| : 11. Westinghouse Electric Corporation Energy System Business Unit Quality Management System, QMS, Revision 2, April 1997.
| |
| : 12. Deleted in initial UFSAR
| |
| : 13. Deleted in initial UFSAR
| |
| : 14. Carver, M. D. and Antrim, C. W., "Zirconium Progress Report for the Period June 15 -
| |
| September 15, 1956," USBM-U-210.
| |
| 4.2-57
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 15. Burns, W. A. and Maffei, H. P., "ASTM Special Technical Publication No. 368."
| |
| : 16. Anderson, W. K. and McGoff, M. J., "Corrosion of Zircaloy in Crevices Under Nucleate Boiling Conditions," KAPL-2203, 1962.
| |
| : 17. Berry, W. E., White, E. L., and Fink, F. W., "Zircaloy-4 Corrosion in Halide Solutions and at Crevices in High Temperature Water," BMI-1571, 1962.
| |
| : 18. Deleted in UFSAR Amendment 4.
| |
| : 19. Kuchirka, P.J., Properties of Fuel and Core Component Materials, WCAP-9224 (Non-Proprietary), July 1978.
| |
| : 20. DeMario, E. E., "Hydraulic Flow Test of the 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly," WCAP 8278 (Proprietary) and WCAP 8279 (Non-Proprietary), February 1974.
| |
| : 21. Cooper, F. W., Jr., "l7xl7 Drive Line Components Tests Phase IB, II, III, D-Loop-Drop and Deflection," WCAP-8446 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8449, December 1974.
| |
| : 22. Skarita, J., (Ed.), "Hybrid B4C Absorber Control Rod Evaluation Report," WCAP-8846, September 1976.
| |
| : 23. Deleted in UFSAR Amendment 4.
| |
| : 24. Gesinski, L.,et. al., "Safety Analysis of the 17 X 17 Fuel Assembly for Combined Seismic and Loss-of-Coolant Accident," WCAP-8288, Addendum 1, April 1974.
| |
| : 25. Deleted in initial Updated FSAR.
| |
| : 26. Weiner, R. A., et al, "Improved Fuel Performance Models for Westinghouse Fuel Rod Designs and Safety Evaluations," WCAP-10851-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-11873-A (Non-Proprietary), August 1988.
| |
| : 27. Davidson, S. L., (Ed.), et al, "Extended Burnup Evaluation of Westinghouse Fuel," WCAP-10125-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-10126-A (Non-Proprietary), December 1985.
| |
| : 28. Davidson, S. L., and Kramer, W. R., (Ed.), "Reference Core Report VANTAGE 5 Fuel Assembly," WCAP-10444-P-A and WCAP-10445-NP-A, September 1985, and Addendum 2A, February 1989.
| |
| : 29. Skaritka, J., et al, "Westinghouse Wet Annular Burnable Absorber Evaluation Report,"
| |
| WCAP-10021-NP-A, Revision 1 (Non-Proprietary), October 1983.
| |
| 4.2-58
| |
| | |
| WBN-1
| |
| : 30. Watkins, B., and Wood, D. S., "The Significance of Irradiation-Induced Creep on Reactor Performance of a Zircaloy-2 Pressure Tube," Applications -Related Phenomena for Zirconium and its Alloys, ASTM STP 458. American Society for Testing and Materials, 1969, pp 226-240.
| |
| : 31. Davidson, S. L. and Ryan, T. L., (Eds.), VANTAGE+ Fuel Assembly Reference Core Report, WCAP-12610-P-A, April 1995.
| |
| : 32. Davidson, S. L., (Ed.), Westinghouse Fuel Criteria Evaluation Process, WCAP-12488-A, October 1994; and Addendum 1 to WCAP-12488-A, Revision to Design Criteria, WCAP-12488-A, Addendum 1-A, Revision 1 (Proprietary), January 2002.
| |
| : 33. Kersting, P. J., et al, Assessment of Clad Flattening and Densification Power Spike Factor Elimination in Westinghouse Nuclear Fuel, WCAP-13589-A, March 1995.
| |
| : 34. Sabol, G. P.., et al., Development of a Cladding for High Burn-UP, Zirconium in the Nuclear Industry: Eighth International Symposium, ASTM-STP-1023. San Diego, California, June 1988.
| |
| : 35. Foster, J. P., Sidener , S., Westinghouse Improved Performance Analysis and Design Model (PAD 4.0), WCAP-15063-P-A, Revision 1, with Errata, July 2000.
| |
| : 36. Letter from H. A. Sepp, (Westinghouse) to J. S. Wermiel (NRC), Fuel Criterion Evaluation Process (FCEP) Notification of the RFA-2 Design, Revision 1 (Proprietary), LTR-NRC 55, November 13, 2002.
| |
| : 37. Lenehan, R., et all, Westinghouse Clad Corrosion Model for ZIRLO and Optimized ZIRLO, WCAP-12610-P-A & CENPD-404-P-A Addendum 2-A, October 2013.
| |
| 4.2-59
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Cross Section 17 x 17 STD, P+, ZIRLO+2, RFA-2 FIGURE 4.2-1
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 STD, P+, ZIRLO+2 RFA-2 FIGURE 4.2-2
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 V+/P+ ZIRLO FIGURE 4.2-2a
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 P+ ZIRLO FIGURE 4.2-2b
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 P+ ZIRLO + 2 FIGURE 4.2-2c
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 Vantage 5H Recage Fuel Assembly FIGURE 4.2-2d
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Assembly Outline 17 x 17 P+ ZIRLO + 2 Top & Bottom Reconstitutable RFA Outline FIGURE 4.2-2e
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Rod Schematic (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.2-3
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Mid Grid and IFM Expansion Joint Design Plan View FIGURE 4.2-4
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT IFM and MD Grid Guide Thimble Joint Elevation View FIGURE 4.2-5
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Guide Thimble to Bottom Nozzle Joint FIGURE 4.2-6
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Guide Thimble to Bottom Nozzle Joint (with P-grid)
| |
| FIGURE 4.2-6a
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Top Grid to Nozzle Attachment FIGURE 4.2-7
| |
| | |
| FIGURE 4.2-8 DELETED
| |
| | |
| FIGURE 4.2-9 DELETED
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Lower Core Support Assembly (Core Barrel Assembly)
| |
| FIGURE 4.2-10
| |
| | |
| UNIT 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT UNIT 2 Upper Core Support Structure FIGURE 4.2-11
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Support Column FIGURE 4.2-12
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Upper Core Support Structure Plan View FIGURE 4.2-13
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Full Length Rod Cluster Control And Drive Assembly with Interfacing Components FIGURE 4.2-14
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Rod Cluster Control Assembly Outline FIGURE 4.2-15
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Control Rod Assemblies FIGURE 4.2-16
| |
| | |
| FIGURE 4.2-17 DELETED
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Control Rod Assemblies FIGURE 4.2-18
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Burnable Absorber (PYREX)
| |
| Rod Assembly Unit 1 FIGURE 4.2-19
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT WET ANNULAR BURNABLE ABSORBER FIGURE 4.2-19A
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod FIGURE 4.2-19b
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod FIGURE 4.2-19c
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rod Lead Test Assembly FIGURE 4.2-19d
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Pyrex and Primary Source Assembly (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.2-20
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Encapsulated Secondary Source Assembly (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.2-21
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Thimble Plug Assembly (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.2-22
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Full Length Control Rod Drive Mechanism FIGURE 4.2-23
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Full Length Control Rod Drive Mechanism Schematic FIGURE 4.2-24
| |
| | |
| FIGURE 4.2-25 DELETED
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Nominal Latch Clearance at Minimum and Maximum Temperature FIGURE 4.2-26
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Control Rod Drive Mechanism Latch Clearance Thermal Effect FIGURE 4.2-27
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Schematic Representation of Reactor Core Model FIGURE 4.2-28
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3 NUCLEAR DESIGN 4.3.1 DESIGN BASES This section describes the design bases and functional requirements used in the nuclear design of the fuel and reactivity control system and relates these design bases to the NRC General Design Criteria (GDC) presented in 10 CFR 50, Appendix A. Where appropriate, supplemental criteria such as the Final Acceptance Criteria for Emergency Core Cooling Systems are addressed. Before discussing the nuclear design bases it is appropriate to briefly review the four major categories ascribed to conditions of plant operation. It should be noted that this section shows core design and performance information which shall be regarded as illustrative or typical and is not a commitment to a specific value or configuration. The final information will be in the Safety Evaluation and Core Operating Limits Report that document the final design.
| |
| The full spectrum of plant conditions is divided into four categories, in accordance with the anticipated frequency of occurrence and risk to the public:
| |
| : 1. Condition I - Normal Operation and Operational Transients
| |
| : 2. Condition II - Faults of Moderate Frequency
| |
| : 3. Condition III - Infrequent Faults
| |
| : 4. Condition IV - Limiting Faults In general the Condition I occurrences are accommodated with margin between any plant parameter and the value of that parameter which would require either automatic or manual protective action. Condition II incidents are accommodated with, at most, a shutdown of the reactor with the plant capable of returning to operation after corrective action. Fuel damage, defined as penetration of the fission product barrier, i.e., the fuel rod clad, is not expected during Condition I and Condition II events. It is not possible to preclude a very small number of rod failures for these events; however, the resulting fission product activity that would potentially result is within the design capability of the Chemical and Volume Control System (CVCS) and is consistent with the plant design bases.
| |
| Condition III incidents do not cause more than a small fraction of the fuel elements in the reactor to be damaged, although sufficient fuel element damage might occur to preclude immediate resumption of operation. The release of radioactive material due to Condition III incidents is not sufficient to interrupt or restrict public use of these areas beyond the exclusion radius.
| |
| Furthermore, a Condition III incident does not, by itself, generate a Condition IV fault or result in a consequential loss of function of the reactor coolant or reactor containment barriers.
| |
| Condition IV occurrences are faults that are not expected to occur but are defined as limiting faults which must be designed against. Condition IV faults shall not cause a release of radioactive material that exceeds the limits of 10 CFR 100.
| |
| 4.3-1
| |
| | |
| WBN The core design power distribution limits related to fuel integrity are met for Condition I occurrences through conservative design and maintained by the action of the control system.
| |
| The requirements for Condition II occurrences are met by providing an adequate protection system which monitors reactor parameters. The Control and Protection Systems are described in Chapter 7 and the consequences of Condition II, III and IV occurrences are given in Chapter 15.
| |
| 4.3.1.1 Fuel Burnup Basis The fuel rod design basis is described in Section 4.2. The nuclear design basis, along with the design basis in Section 4.3.1.3, satisfies GDC-10.
| |
| Discussion Fuel burnup is a measure of fuel depletion which represents the integrated energy output of the fuel (MWD/MTU) and is a convenient means for quantifying fuel exposure criteria.
| |
| The core design lifetime or design discharge burnup is achieved by installing sufficient initial excess reactivity in each fuel region and by following a fuel replacement program (such as that described in Section 4.3.2) that meets all safety related criteria in each cycle of operation.
| |
| Initial excess reactivity installed in the fuel, although not a design basis, must be sufficient to maintain core criticality at full power operating conditions throughout cycle life with equilibrium xenon, samarium, and other fission products present. The end of design cycle life is defined to occur when the chemical shim concentration is essentially zero with control rods present to the degree necessary for operational requirements (e.g., the controlling bank at the "bite" position).
| |
| In terms of chemical shim boron concentration, this represents approximately 10 ppm with no control rod insertion.
| |
| A limitation on initial installed excess reactivity or average discharge burnup is not required other than as is quantified in terms of other design bases such as core negative reactivity feedback and shutdown margin discussed below.
| |
| 4.3.1.2 Negative Reactivity Feedbacks (Reactivity Coefficient)
| |
| Basis The fuel temperature coefficient will be negative and the moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity will be non-positive for power operating conditions, thereby providing negative reactivity feedback characteristics. The design basis meets GDC-11.
| |
| 4.3-2
| |
| | |
| WBN Discussion When compensation for a rapid increase in reactivity is considered, there are two major effects.
| |
| These are the resonance absorption effects (Doppler) associated with changing fuel temperature and the spectrum effect resulting from changing moderator density. These basic physics characteristics are often identified by reactivity coefficients. The use of slightly enriched uranium ensures that the Doppler coefficient of reactivity is negative. This coefficient provides the most rapid reactivity compensation. The core is also designed to have an overall negative moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity so that average coolant temperature or void content provides another, slower compensatory effect. The negative moderator temperature coefficient can be achieved through use of fixed burnable absorbers, integral fuel burnable absorbers (IFBAs), if present, and/or control rods which decrease the concentration of soluble boron required for reactivity control.
| |
| Restrictions on burnable absorber content (quantity and distribution) are not applied as a design basis other than as related to achieving a non-positive moderator temperature coefficient at power operating conditions as discussed in Section 4.3.2.
| |
| 4.3.1.3 Control of Power Distribution Basis The nuclear design basis is that, with at least a 95% confidence level:
| |
| : 1. The fuel will not be operated at a linear power greater than the average linear power multiplied by FQ(z) under normal operating conditions including an allowance of 0.6%
| |
| (Unit 1) or 2% (Unit 2) for calorimetric error. FQ(z) is the heat flux hot channel factor and is specified in the Watts Bar Core Operating Limit Report (COLR).
| |
| : 2. Under abnormal conditions, including the maximum overpower condition, the fuel peak power will not cause melting as defined in Section 4.4.1.2.
| |
| : 3. The fuel will not operate with a power distribution that violates the departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) design basis (i.e., the DNBR shall not be less than the safety analysis limits, as discussed in Section 4.4.1) under Condition I and II events including the maximum overpower condition.
| |
| : 4. Fuel management will be such that rod powers and burnups are consistent with the assumptions in the fuel rod mechanical integrity analysis of Section 4.2.
| |
| The above basis meets GDC-10.
| |
| 4.3-3
| |
| | |
| WBN Discussion Calculations of extreme power shapes which affect fuel design limits are performed with proven methods and verified frequently with measurements from operating reactors. The conditions under which limiting power shapes are assumed to occur are conservatively chosen with regard to any permissible operating state.
| |
| Even though there is good agreement between calculated peak power and measurements, a nuclear uncertainty margin is applied to the calculated peak local power. Such a margin is provided both for the analysis for normal operating states and for anticipated transients.
| |
| 4.3.1.4 Maximum Controlled Reactivity Insertion Rate Basis The maximum reactivity insertion rate due to withdrawal of Rod Cluster Control Assemblies or by boron dilution is limited. This limit, expressed as a maximum reactivity change rate of 75 pcm/sec[1], is set such that peak heat generation rate and DNBR do not exceed the maximum allowable at overpower conditions. This satisfies GDC-25. [Pcm = 10-5 (i.e., footnote in Table 4.3-2)].
| |
| The maximum reactivity worth of control rods and the maximum rates of reactivity insertion employing control rods are limited so that a rod withdrawal or rod ejection accident will not cause rupture of the coolant pressure boundary or disruption of the core internals to a degree which would impair core cooling capacity (see Chapter 15).
| |
| Following any Condition IV event (rod ejection, steamline break, etc.) the reactor can be brought to the shutdown condition and the core will maintain acceptable heat transfer geometry. This satisfies GDC-28.
| |
| Discussion Reactivity addition associated with an accidental withdrawal of a control bank (or banks) is limited by the maximum rod speed (or travel rate) and by the worth of the bank(s). For the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant reactor the maximum control rod speed is limited such that the maximum rate of reactivity change considering two control banks moving is less than 75 pcm/sec.
| |
| 4.3.1.5 Shutdown Margins With Vessel Head in Place Basis Minimum shutdown margin requirements as specified in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications are required in all power operating modes, hot standby, hot shutdown, and cold shutdown conditions.
| |
| 4.3-4
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 In all analyses involving reactor trip, the single, highest worth Rod Cluster Control Assembly (RCCA) is postulated to remain untripped in its full-out position (stuck rod criterion). This satisfies GDC-26.
| |
| Discussion Two independent reactivity control systems are provided: control rods and soluble boron in the coolant. The control rod system can compensate for the reactivity effects of the fuel and water temperature changes accompanying power level changes over the range from full load to no load. The control rod system also provides the minimum shutdown margin under Condition I events and is capable of making the core subcritical rapidly enough to prevent exceeding acceptable fuel damage limits assuming that the highest worth control rod is stuck out upon trip.
| |
| The boron system can compensate for all xenon burnout reactivity changes and will maintain the reactor in the cold shutdown condition. Thus, backup and emergency shutdown provisions are provided by a mechanical and a chemical shim control system which satisfies GDC-26.
| |
| 4.3.1.6 Shutdown Margin for Refueling Basis When fuel assemblies are in the pressure vessel and the vessel head is not in place, keff will be maintained at or below 0.95 with control rods and soluble boron. Further, the fuel will be maintained sufficiently subcritical that removal of all rod cluster control assemblies will not result in criticality.
| |
| Discussion ANSI Standard N18.2 specifies a keff not to exceed 0.95 in spent fuel storage racks and transfer equipment flooded with pure water and a keff not to exceed 0.98 in normally dry new fuel storage racks assuming optimum moderation. No criterion is given for the refueling operation, however a 5% margin, which is consistent with spent fuel storage and transfer and the new fuel storage, is adequate for the controlled and continuously monitored operations involved.
| |
| The boron concentration required to meet the refueling shutdown criteria is specified in the COLR. Verification that this shutdown criteria is met, including uncertainties, is achieved using standard design methods such as ARK[34] , PHOENIX-P/ANC[39] or NEXUS/ANC[63] and TURTLE[9], PALADON[27], or ANC [38] codes. The subcriticality of the core is continuously monitored as specified in the Technical Specifications.
| |
| 4.3-5
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.1.7 Stability Basis The core will be inherently stable to power oscillations at the fundamental mode. This satisfies GDC-12.
| |
| Spatial power oscillations, should they occur, can be reliably and readily detected and suppressed.
| |
| Discussion Oscillations of the total power output of the core, from whatever cause, are readily detected by the loop temperature sensors and by the nuclear instrumentation. The core is protected by these systems and a reactor trip would occur if power unacceptably increased, preserving the design margins to fuel design limits. The stability of the turbine/steam generator/core systems and the reactor control system is such that total core power oscillations are not normally possible. The redundancy of the protection circuits ensures an extremely low probability of exceeding design power levels.
| |
| The core is designed so that diametral and azimuthal oscillations due to spatial xenon effects are self-damping and no operator action or control action is required to suppress them. The stability to diametral oscillations is so great that this excitation is highly improbable. Convergent azimuthal oscillations can be excited by prohibited motion of individual control rods. Such oscillations are observable and alarmed, when exceeding limits, using the excore detectors.
| |
| Indications are also available from incore thermocouples (Unit 1) or the fixed incore neutron detectors (Unit 2) and loop temperature measurements. More detailed information can be obtained using either the incore detector system or the power distribution monitoring system.
| |
| These horizontal plane oscillations are self-damping by virtue of reactivity feedback effects designed into the core.
| |
| However, axial xenon and spatial power oscillations may occur late in core life. The control bank and excore detectors are provided for control and monitoring of axial power distributions.
| |
| Assurance that fuel design limits are not exceeded is provided by reactor overpower T and overtemperature T (which uses the measured axial power imbalance as an input) trip functions.
| |
| 4.3.1.8 Anticipated Transients Without Trip The effects of anticipated transients with failure to trip are not considered in the design bases of the plant. Analysis has shown that the likelihood of such a hypothetical event is negligibly small. Furthermore, analysis of the consequences of a hypothetical failure to trip following anticipated transients has shown that no significant core damage would result and system peak pressures would be limited such that the primary stress anywhere in the system boundary is less than the "emergency conditions" defined in the ASME Nuclear Power Plant Components
| |
| [1]
| |
| Code, Section III, and no failure of the reactor coolant system would result.
| |
| 4.3-6
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2 Description 4.3.2.1 Nuclear Design Description The reactor core consists of a specified number of fuel rods which are held in bundles by spacer grids and top and bottom fittings. The fuel rods are constructed of ZIRLO cylindrical tubes containing UO2 fuel pellets. The bundles, known as fuel assemblies, are arranged in a pattern which approximates a right circular cylinder.
| |
| Each fuel assembly contains a 17 x 17 rod array composed of 264 fuel rods, 24 guide thimbles and an incore instrumentation thimble. The fuel rods within a given assembly have the same nominal uranium enrichment in both the radial and axial planes, although the top and the bottom portions may contain natural or low enriched uranium. Figure 4.2-1 shows a cross sectional view of a 17 x 17 fuel assembly and the related thimble locations. Further details of the fuel assembly are given in Section 4.2.1.
| |
| Fuel assemblies of three different enrichments are used in the initial core loading to establish a favorable radial power distribution. Figure 4.3-1 shows the fuel loading pattern to be used in the first core. Two regions consisting of the two lower enrichments are interspersed so as to form a checkerboard pattern in the central portion of the core. The third region is arranged around the periphery of the core and contains the highest enrichment. The enrichments for the first core are shown in Table 4.3-1.
| |
| For reload cores, the exact pattern, initial and final positions of assemblies, and the number of fresh assemblies and their placement are dependent on the energy requirements for the next cycle, and the burnup and power histories of the previous cycle.
| |
| The core average enrichment is determined by the amount of fissionable material required to provide the desired core lifetime and energy requirements. The physics of the burnout process is such that operation of the reactor depletes the amount of fuel available due to the absorption of neutrons by the U-235 atoms and their subsequent fission. In addition, the fission process results in the formation of fission products, some of which readily absorb neutrons. These effects, depletion and the buildup of fission products, are partially offset by the buildup of plutonium from the non-fission absorption of neutrons in U-238, as shown in Figure 4.3-2 for the 17 x 17 fuel assembly. Therefore, at the beginning of any cycle, a reactivity reserve equal to the depletion of the fissionable fuel and the buildup of fission product absorbers over the specified cycle life must be 'built' into the reactor. This excess reactivity is controlled by removable neutron absorbing material in the form of boron dissolved in the primary coolant and burnable absorber rods or ZrB2-coated fuel pellets in IFBAs (when present).
| |
| 4.3-7
| |
| | |
| WBN The concentration of boric acid in the primary coolant is varied to provide control and to compensate for long-term reactivity requirements. The concentration of the soluble neutron absorber is controlled by means of the Chemical and Volume Control System (CVCS) to compensate for reactivity changes due to fuel burnup, fission product buildup including xenon and samarium, burnable absorber depletion, and the cold-to-operating moderator temperature change. Rapid transient reactivity requirements and safety shutdown requirements are met with control rods.
| |
| As the boron concentration is increased, the moderator temperature coefficient becomes less negative. The use of a soluble absorber alone would result in a positive moderator coefficient at beginning-of-life for the first cycle. Therefore, burnable absorbers are used in the first core to sufficiently reduce the soluble boron concentration to ensure that the moderator temperature coefficient is negative at power operating conditions. During operation the neutron absorber content in these rods is depleted thus adding positive reactivity to offset some of the negative reactivity from fuel depletion and fission product buildup. The depletion rate of the burnable absorber rods is not critical since chemical shim is always available and flexible enough to cover any possible deviations in the expected burnable poison depletion rate. Figure 4.3-3 is a graph of a typical core depletion with and without burnable absorber rods. Note that even at end-of-life conditions some residual poison remains in the burnable absorber rods resulting in a net decrease in the first cycle lifetime.
| |
| In addition to reactivity control, the burnable absorber rods are strategically located to provide a favorable radial power distribution. Figures 4.3-4a and 4.3-4b show the burnable absorber distribution within a fuel assembly for the several burnable absorber patterns used in a 17 x 17 array. The burnable absorber loading pattern is shown in Figure 4.3-5.
| |
| Tables 4.3-1 through 4.3-3 contain a summary of the reactor core design parameters for the first fuel cycle, including reactivity coefficients, delayed neutron fraction and neutron lifetimes.
| |
| Sufficient information is included to permit an independent calculation of the nuclear performance characteristics of the core.
| |
| 4.3.2.2 Power Distributions The accuracy of power distribution calculations has been confirmed through approximately one thousand flux maps during some twenty years of operation under conditions very similar to those expected for Watts Bar. Details of this confirmation are given in Reference [2] and in Section 4.3.2.2.6.
| |
| 4.3.2.2.1 Definitions Power distributions are quantified in terms of hot channel factors. These factors are a measure of the peak pellet power within the reactor core and the total energy produced in a coolant channel, relative to the total reactor power output, and are expressed in terms of quantities related to the nuclear or thermal design, namely:
| |
| 4.3-8
| |
| | |
| WBN Power density is the thermal power produced per unit volume of the core (kW/liter).
| |
| Linear power density is the thermal power produced per unit length of active fuel (kW/ft). Since fuel assembly geometry is standardized, this is the unit of power density most commonly used.
| |
| For all practical purposes, it differs from kW/liter by a constant factor which includes geometry and the fraction of the total thermal power which is generated in the fuel rod.
| |
| Average linear power density is the total thermal power produced in the fuel rods divided by the total active fuel length of all rods in the core.
| |
| Local heat flux is the heat flux at the surface of the cladding (BTU-ft-2-hr-1). For nominal rod parameters this differs from linear power density by a constant factor.
| |
| Rod power or rod integral power is the length integrated linear power density in one rod (kW).
| |
| Average rod power is the total thermal power produced in the fuel rods divided by the number of fuel rods (assuming all rods have equal length).
| |
| The hot channel factors used in the discussion of power distributions in this section are defined as follows:
| |
| FQ, Heat Flux Hot Channel Factor, is defined as the maximum local heat flux on the surface of a fuel rod divided by the average fuel rod heat flux, allowing for manufacturing tolerances on fuel pellets and rods, and including fuel densification effects.
| |
| FNQ, Nuclear Heat Flux Hot Channel Factor, is defined as the maximum local fuel rod linear power density divided by the average fuel rod linear power density, assuming nominal fuel pellet and rod parameters.
| |
| FEQ, Engineering Heat Flux Hot Channel Factor, is the allowance on heat flux required for manufacturing tolerances. The engineering factor allows for local variations in enrichment, pellet density and diameter, surface area of the fuel rod, and eccentricity of the gap between pellet and clad. Statistically combined, the net effect is a factor of 1.03 to be applied to fuel rod surface heat flux.
| |
| FNH , Nuclear Enthalpy Rise Hot Channel Factor, is defined as the ratio of the integral of linear power along the rod with the highest integrated power to the average rod power.
| |
| Manufacturing tolerances, hot channel power distribution and surrounding channel power distributions are explicitly treated in the calculation of the DNBR described in Section 4.4.
| |
| 4.3-9
| |
| | |
| WBN It is convenient for the purposes of discussion to define subfactors of FQ. However, design limits are set in terms of the total peaking factor.
| |
| FQ = Total peaking factor or heat flux hot-channel factor
| |
| = Maximum kW/ft Average kW/ft Without densification effects, FQ = FQN x FQE
| |
| = FNXY x FNZ x FNU x FQE where FQN and FQE are defined above.
| |
| FNU = the measurement uncertainty associated with either a full core flux map with moveable or fixed incore detectors or as described in Reference [58] for the power distribution monitoring system.
| |
| FXYN = ratio of peak power density to average power density in the horizontal plane of peak local power.
| |
| FNZ = ratio of the power per unit core height in the horizontal plane of peak local power to the average value of power per unit core height. If the plane of peak local power coincides with the plane of maximum power per unit core height, then FZN is the core average axial peaking factor.
| |
| To include the allowances made for densification effects, which are height dependent, the following quantities are defined.
| |
| S(Z) = the allowance made for densification effects at height Z in the core.
| |
| P(Z) = ratio of the power per unit core height in the horizontal plane at height Z to the average value of power per unit core height.
| |
| FXYN(Z) = ratio of peak power density to average power density in the horizontal plane at height Z.
| |
| 4.3-10
| |
| | |
| WBN Then FQ = Total peaking factor
| |
| = Maximum kW/ft Average kW/ft Including densification effects, N
| |
| FQ = max[ F XY ( Z ) xP( Z )]xS ( Z ) xFUN xFQE (Unit 1 Only)
| |
| FQ = max[ FXYN ( Z ) xP( Z )]xxFUN xFQE (Unit 2 Only) 4.3.2.2.2 Radial Power Distributions The power shape in horizontal sections of a typical core at full power is a function of the fuel assembly and burnable absorber loading patterns, the control rod pattern, and fuel burnup distribution. Thus, at any time in the cycle, any horizontal section of the core can be characterized as unrodded or with Bank D control rods. These two situations combined with burnup effects determine the radial power shapes which can exist in the core at full power. The effect on radial power shapes of power level, xenon, samarium and moderator density effects are considered also but these are quite small. The effect of nonuniform flow distribution is negligible. While radial power distributions in various planes of the core are often illustrated, the core radial enthalpy rise distribution as determined by the integral of power up each channel is of greater interest. Figures 4.3-6 through 4.3-11 show representative radial power distributions for one quarter of the core for representative operating conditions. These conditions are: 1) hot full power (HFP) at beginning-of-life (BOL), unrodded, no xenon, 2) HFP at BOL, unrodded, equilibrium xenon, 3) HFP at BOL, Bank D in 17%, equilibrium xenon, 4) HFP at middle-of-life (MOL), unrodded, equilibrium xenon, 5) HFP at end-of-life (EOL), unrodded, equilibrium xenon, and 6) HFP at EOL, Bank D in 17%, equilibrium xenon.
| |
| Since the position of the hot channel varies from time to time, a single reference radial design power distribution is selected for DNB calculations. This reference power distribution is conservatively chosen to concentrate power in one area of the core, minimizing the benefits of flow redistribution. Assembly powers are normalized to core average power.
| |
| 4.3.2.2.3 Assembly Power Distributions For the purpose of illustration, assembly power distributions from the BOL and EOL conditions corresponding to Figures 4.3-7 and 4.3-10, respectively, are given for the same assembly in Figures 4.3-12 and 4.3-13, respectively.
| |
| 4.3-11
| |
| | |
| WBN Since the detailed power distribution surrounding the hot channel varies from time to time, a conservatively flat assembly power distribution is assumed in the DNB analysis, described in Section 4.4, with the rod of maximum integrated power artificially raised to the design value of FNH. Care is taken in the nuclear design of all fuel cycles and all operating conditions to ensure that a flatter assembly power distribution does not occur with limiting values of FNH.
| |
| 4.3.2.2.4 Axial Power Distribution The shape of the power profile in the axial direction is largely under the control of the operator through the manual operation of the control rods or automatic motion of the rods in response to manual operation of the CVCS. Nuclear effects which cause variations in the axial power shape include burnable absorber length, axial blankets, moderator density, Doppler effect on resonance absorption, spatial distribution of xenon, and burnup. Automatically controlled variations in total power output and rod motion are also important in determining the axial power shape at any time. Signals are available to the operator from the excore detectors which are long ion chambers outside the reactor vessel running parallel to the axis of the core. Separate signals are taken from the top and bottom halves of the chambers. The difference between top and bottom signals from each of four pairs of detectors is displayed on the control panel and called the flux imbalance, I. Calculations of the core average peaking factor for many plants and measurements from operating plants under many operating situations are associated with either I or axial offset in such a way that an upper bound can be placed on the peaking factor.
| |
| For these correlations axial offset is defined as:
| |
| ft - fb axial offset =
| |
| ft + fb and ft and fb are the top and bottom detector current readings, respectively.
| |
| Representative axial power shapes from Reference [3] for BOL, MOL, and EOL conditions are shown in Figures 4.3-14 through 4.3-16. These figures cover a wide range of axial offset, including values achieved by skewing xenon distributions.
| |
| The radial power distributions shown in Figures 4.3-8 and 4.3-11 involving the partial insertion of control rods represent a synthesis of power shapes from the rodded and unrodded planes.
| |
| The applicability of the separability assumption upon which this procedure is based is ensured through extensive three-dimensional calculations of possible rodded conditions. As an example, Figure 4.3-17 compares the axial power distribution for several assemblies, at different distances from inserted control rods, with the core average axial distribution.
| |
| 4.3-12
| |
| | |
| WBN The only significant difference from the average occurs in the low power peripheral assemblies, thus, confirming the validity of the separability assumption.
| |
| 4.3.2.2.5 Limiting Power Distributions According to the ANSI classification of plant conditions (see Chapter 15), Condition I occurrences are those which are frequently or regularly expected in the course of power operation, maintenance, or maneuvering of the plant. As such, Condition I occurrences are accommodated with margin between any plant parameter and the value of that parameter which would require either automatic or manual protective action. Inasmuch as Condition I events frequently or regularly occur, they must be considered from the point of view of affecting the consequences of fault conditions (Conditions II, III, and IV). In this regard, analysis of each fault condition described is generally based on a conservative set of initial conditions corresponding to the most adverse set of conditions which can occur during Condition I operation.
| |
| The list of steady state and shutdown conditions, permissible deviations and operational transients is given in Section 15.1. Implicit in the definition of normal operation is proper and timely action by the reactor operator. That is, the operator follows recommended operating procedures for maintaining appropriate power distributions and takes any necessary remedial actions when alerted to do so by the plant instrumentation. Thus, as stated above, the worst or limiting power distribution which can occur during normal operation is to be considered as the starting point for analysis of Conditions II, III, and IV events.
| |
| Improper procedural actions or errors by the operator are assumed in the design as occurrences of moderate frequency (ANSI Condition II). Some of the consequences which might result are listed in Section 15.2. Therefore, the limiting power shapes which result from such Condition II events are those power shapes which deviate from the normal operating condition at the recommended axial offset band, e.g. due to lack of proper action by the operator during a xenon transient following a change in power level brought about by control rod motion. Power shapes which fall in this category are used for determination of the reactor protection system setpoints so as to maintain margin to overpower or DNB limits.
| |
| Reference [37] describes the methods for determining the limiting shape that can be created in Watts Bar's reactor core for the allowable I operating space.
| |
| The means for maintaining power distributions within the required hot channel factor limits are described in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications. A complete discussion of power distribution control in Westinghouse PWRs is given in Reference [6].
| |
| Detailed information on the design constraints on local power density in a Westinghouse PWR, on the defined operating procedures and on the measures taken to preclude exceeding design limits is presented in the Westinghouse topical reports on peaking factors References [8], [58],
| |
| and [59] and power distribution control and load following procedures References [7], [58], and
| |
| [59]. The following paragraphs summarize these reports and describe the calculations used to establish the upper bound on peaking factors.
| |
| 4.3-13
| |
| | |
| WBN The calculations used to establish the upper bound on peaking factors, FQ and FNH , include all the nuclear effects which influence the radial and/or axial power distributions throughout core life for various modes of operation including load follow, reduced power operation, and axial xenon transients.
| |
| Radial power distributions are calculated for the full power condition, and fuel and moderator temperature feedback effects are included for the average enthalpy plane of the reactor. The steady state nuclear design calculations are done for normal flow with the same mass flow in each channel and flow redistribution effects neglected. The effect of flow redistribution is calculated explicitly where it is important in the DNB analysis of accidents. The effect of xenon on radial power distribution is small (compare Figures 4.3-6 and 4.3-7), but is included as part of the normal design process.
| |
| The core average axial profile, however, can experience significant changes which can occur rapidly as a result of rod motion and load changes and more slowly due to xenon redistribution.
| |
| Several thousand cases are examined to determine the points of closest approach to axial power distribution limits. Since the properties of the nuclear design dictate what axial shapes can occur, boundaries on the limits of interest can be set in terms of the parameters which are readily observed in the plant. Specifically, the nuclear design parameters which are significant to the axial power distribution analysis are:
| |
| : 1. Core power level
| |
| : 2. Core height
| |
| : 3. Coolant temperature and flow
| |
| : 4. Coolant temperature program as a function of reactor power
| |
| : 5. Fuel cycle lifetimes
| |
| : 6. Rod bank worths
| |
| : 7. Rod bank overlaps Normal operation of the plant assumes compliance with the following conditions:
| |
| : 1. Control rods in a single bank move together with no individual rod insertion differing by more than +12 steps (indicated) from the bank demand position;
| |
| : 2. Control banks are sequenced with overlapping banks;
| |
| : 3. The control bank insertion limits are not violated;
| |
| : 4. Axial power distribution procedures, which are given in terms of flux difference control and control bank position, are observed.
| |
| 4.3-14
| |
| | |
| WBN The axial power distribution procedures referred to above are part of the required operating procedures which are followed in normal operation. Limits placed on the axial flux difference are designed to assure that the heat flux hot channel factor, FQ, is maintained within acceptable limits. The constant axial offset control (CAOC) operating procedures described in Reference [7]
| |
| require control of the axial flux difference at all power levels within a permissible operating band about a target value corresponding to the equilibrium full power value. The relaxed axial offset control (RAOC) procedures described in Reference [37] were developed to provide wider control bandwidths and, consequently, more operating flexibility. These wider operating limits, particularly at lower power levels, can increase plant availability by allowing quicker plant startups and increased maneuvering flexibility without trip or reportable occurrences.
| |
| Further operating flexibility is achieved by combining RAOC operation with an FQ surveillance technical specification. Monitoring FQ(z) and increasing the measured value for expected plant maneuvers is a convenient way of assuring that the plant operates below the FQ(z) limit, while retaining the intent of using a measured parameter to verify technical specification compliance.
| |
| In the standard CAOC analysis described in Reference [7], the generation of the normal operation power distributions is constrained by the rod insertion limits (RIL) and the I band limits. The purpose of RAOC is to find the widest permissible I-Power operating space by analyzing a wide range of I. Therefore, the generation of normal operation power distributions is constrained only by RIL.
| |
| For a CAOC analysis, load follow simulations are performed covering the allowed CAOC operating space to generate a typical range of power distributions in both normal operation and Condition II accident conditions. For a RAOC analysis, however, a reconstruction model described in Reference [37] is used to create allowed axial xenon distributions covering the wider -I power operating space allowed with RAOC operation. The xenon distributions are then used to create axial power distributions in both normal and Condition II accident conditions.
| |
| Each resulting power shape is analyzed to determine if LOCA constraints are met or exceeded.
| |
| The total peaking factor, FQT , is determined using standard synthesis methods as described in Reference [7].
| |
| The calculated points are synthesized from axial calculations combined with radial factors appropriate for rodded and unrodded planes. In these calculations, the effects of xenon redistribution that occur following the withdrawal of a control bank (or banks) from a rodded region on the unrodded radial peak are obtained from two-dimensional X-Y calculations. A 1.03 factor, which is applied on the unrodded radial peak was obtained from calculations in which the xenon distribution was preconditioned by the presence of control rods and then allowed to redistribute for several hours. A detailed discussion of this effect may be found in Reference
| |
| [7]. The calculated values are increased by a factor of 1.05 for conservatism and a factor of 1.03 for the engineering factor FQE .
| |
| 4.3-15
| |
| | |
| WBN The envelope drawn over the normalized maximum (FQ(z) x Power) points in Figure 4.3-21 represents an upper bound envelope on local power density versus elevation in the core. It should be emphasized that this envelope is a conservative representation of the bounding values of local power density. Expected values are considerably smaller and, in fact, less conservative bounding values may be justified with additional analysis or surveillance requirements. For example, Figure 4.3-21 bounds both BOL and EOL conditions but without consideration of radial power distribution flattening with burnup, i.e., both BOL and EOL points presume the same radial peaking factor. Inclusion of the burnup flattening effect would reduce the local power densities corresponding to EOL conditions which may be limiting at the higher core elevations.
| |
| Finally, as previously discussed, this upper bound envelope is based on procedures of load follow which require operation within an allowed axial offset range. These procedures are detailed in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications and are followed by relying only upon excore surveillance supplemented by monthly incore power distribution measurements and by computer based alarms on deviation and time of deviation from the allowed flux difference band.
| |
| For Unit 1, allowing for fuel densification effects, the average linear power at 3459 MWt is 5.52 kW/ft. The conservative upper bound value of normalized local power density, including uncertainty allowances, is FQ(Z), where K(Z) = 1, corresponding to a peak linear power at 100.6% power.
| |
| For Unit 2, allowing for fuel densification effects, the average linear power at 3411 MWt is 5.45 kW/ft. The conservative upper bound value of normalized local power density, including uncertainty allowances, is FQ(Z), where K(Z) = 1, corresponding to a peak linear power at 102%
| |
| power.
| |
| To determine reactor protection system setpoints, with respect to power distributions, three categories of events are considered, namely rod control equipment malfunctions, operator errors of commission and operator errors of omission. In evaluating these three categories of events, the core is assumed to be operating within the four constraints described above.
| |
| The first category comprises uncontrolled rod withdrawal (with rods moving in the normal bank sequence) for full-length banks. Also included are motions of the full-length banks below their insertion limits, which could be caused, for example, by uncontrolled dilution or primary coolant cooldown. Power distributions were calculated throughout these occurrences, assuming short term corrective action. That is, no transient xenon effects were considered to result from the malfunction. The event was assumed to occur from typical normal operating situations which include normal xenon transients. It was further assumed in determining the power distributions that total core power level would be limited to below 121% by reactor trip. Results for a typical core are given in Figure 4.3-22 in units of kW/ft. The peak power density which can occur in such events, assuming reactor trip at or below 121%, is less than that required for center-line melt, including uncertainties.
| |
| The second category, also appearing in Figure 4.3-22, assumes that the operator mispositions the rod bank in violation of the insertion limits and creates short term conditions not included in normal operating conditions.
| |
| 4.3-16
| |
| | |
| WBN The third category assumes that the operator fails to take action to correct a flux difference violation. The results shown on Figure 4.3-23 are FQ multiplied by 102% power including an allowance for calorimetric error. The peak linear power does not exceed 22.4 kW/ft including the above factors.
| |
| Since the peak kW/ft is below the above limit, no flux difference penalties are required for overpower protection. It should be noted that a reactor overpower accident is not assumed to occur coincident with an independent operator error. Additional detailed discussion of these analyses is presented in Reference [7].
| |
| The appropriate hot channel factors, FQ and FNH, for peak local power density and for DNB analysis at full power are based on analyses of possible operating power shapes addressed in the Technical Specifications.
| |
| The maximum allowable FQ can be increased with decreasing power as shown in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications. Increasing FNH with decreasing power is permitted by the DNB protection setpoints and allows radial power shape changes with rod insertion to the insertion limits, as described in Section 4.4.3.2. The allowance for increased FNH as a function of power is given in the Technical Specifications. This becomes a design basis criterion which is used for establishing acceptable control rod patterns and control bank sequencing. Likewise, fuel loading patterns for each cycle are selected with consideration of this design criterion. The worst values of FNH for possible rod configurations occurring in normal operation are used in verifying that this criterion is met. Typical radial factors and radial power distributions are shown in Figures 4.3-6 through 4.3-11. The worst values generally occur when the rods are assumed to be at their insertion limits. Maintenance of axial offset control establishes rod positions which are above the allowed rod insertion limits, thus assuring margin to the FH criterion. Section 3.2 of Reference [8] discusses the determination of FH. These limits are taken as input to the thermal hydraulic design basis, as described in Section 4.4.3.2.1.
| |
| When a situation is possible in normal operation which could result in local power densities in excess of those assumed as the precondition for a subsequent hypothetical accident, but which would not itself cause fuel failure, administrative controls and alarms are provided for returning the core to a safe condition. These alarms are described in detail in Chapter 7.
| |
| 4.3.2.2.6 Experimental Verification of Power Distribution Analysis This subject is discussed in WCAP-7308-L-P-A (Reference 2) and WCAP-12472-P-A (Reference 11). A summary of these reports and the extension to include the fixed incore instrumentation system is given below. Power distribution related measurements are incorporated into the evaluation of calculated power distribution information using the incore instrumentation processing algorithms contained within the online monitoring system. The processing algorithms contained within the online monitoring system are functionally identical to those historically used for the evaluation of power distribution measurements in Westinghouse PWRs. Advances in technology allow a complete functional integration of reaction rate measurement algorithms and the expected reaction rate predictive capability within the same software package. The predictive software integrated within the online monitoring system supplies accurate, detailed information of current reactor conditions. The historical algorithms are described in detail in WCAP- 12472-P-A (Reference 11).
| |
| The measured versus calculational comparison is performed continuously by the online monitoring system throughout the core life. The online monitoring system operability 4.3-17
| |
| | |
| WBN requirements are specified in the Technical Specifications.
| |
| In a measurement of the reactor power distribution and the associated thermal margin limiting parameters, with the incore instrumentation system described in Sections 7.7.1 and 4.4.5 the following uncertainties have to be considered:
| |
| : 1. Reproducibility of the measured signal.
| |
| : 2. Errors in the calculated relationship between detector current and local flux.
| |
| : 3. Errors in the calculated relationship between detector flux and peak rod power some distance from the measurement thimble.
| |
| : 4. Errors in the detector current associated with the depletion of the emitter material, manufacturing tolerances and measured detector depletion For WBN Unit 1, the appropriate allowance for Category I above has been quantified by repetitive measurements made with several intercalibrated detectors by using the common thimble features of the incore detector system. This system allows more than one detector to access any thimble. Errors in category 2 above are quantified to the extent possible, by using the fluxes measured at one thimble location to predict fluxes at another location which is also measured. Local power distribution predictions are verified in critical experiments on arrays of rods with simulated guide thimbles, control rods, burnable absorbers, etc. These critical experiments provide quantification of errors of categories 2 and 3 above.
| |
| For WBN Unit 2, the appropriate allowance for category (1) has been accounted for through the imposition of strict manufacturing tolerances for the individual detectors. This approach is accepted industry practice and has been used in PWRs with fixed incore instrumentation worldwide. Errors in category (2) above are quantified by calculation and evaluation of critical experiment data on arrays of rods with simulated guide thimbles, control rods, burnable absorbers, etc. These critical experiments provide the quantification of errors of categories (1) and (3) above. Errors in category (4) have been quantified through direct experimental measurement of the depletion characteristics of the detectors being used including the precision of the incore instrumentation systems measurement of the current detector depletion. The description of the experimental measurement of detector depletion can be found in EPRI-NP-3814 (Reference [11A]).
| |
| WCAP-7308-L-P-A (Reference [2]) describes critical experiments performed at the Westinghouse Reactor Evaluation Center and measurements taken on two Westinghouse plants with moveable fission chamber incore instrumentation systems. The measurement aspects of the movable fission chamber share the previous uncertainty categories less category (4) which is independent of the other sources of uncertainty. WCAP-7308-L-P-A (Reference [2])
| |
| concludes that the uncertainty associated with peak linear heat rate (FQ*P) is less than five percent at the 95 percent confidence level with only five percent of the measurements greater than the inferred value.
| |
| In comparing measured power distributions (or detector currents) with the calculations for the same condition, it is not possible to isolate the detector reproducibility. Thus a comparison between measured and predicted power distributions has to include some measurement error.
| |
| Such a comparison is given in Figure 4.3-24 for one of the maps used in Reference [2]. Since 4.3-18
| |
| | |
| WBN the first publication of the report, hundreds of maps have been taken on these and other reactors. The results confirm the adequacy of the 5% uncertainty allowance on FQ.
| |
| For WBN Unit 1, a similar analysis for the uncertainty in FNH (rod integral power) measurements results in an allowance of 3.65% at the equivalent of a 1.645 confidence level.
| |
| For historical reasons an 8% uncertainty factor is allowed in the nuclear design basis; that is the predicted rod integrals at full power must not exceed the design FNH less 8%.
| |
| For WBN Unit 2 a similar analysis for the uncertainty in hot rod integrated power FH*P measurements results in an allowance of four percent at the equivalent of a 95 percent confidence level.
| |
| A measurement in the second cycle of a 121 assembly, 12 foot core is compared with a simplified one dimensional core average axial calculation in Figure 4.3-25. A measurement in the fourth cycle of a 157-assembly, 12-foot core is compared with a simplified one-dimensional core average axial calculation in Figure 4.3-25a. This calculation does not give explicit representation to the fuel grids.
| |
| The accumulated data on power distributions in actual operation is basically of three types:
| |
| : 1. Much of the data is obtained in steady state operation at constant power in the normal operating configuration;
| |
| : 2. Data with unusual values of axial offset are obtained as part of the excore detector calibration exercise, which is performed monthly;
| |
| : 3. Special tests have been performed in load follow and other transient xenon conditions, which have yielded useful information on power distributions.
| |
| These data are presented in detail in Reference [8]. Figure 4.3-26 contains a summary of measured values of FQ as a function of axial offset for five plants from that report.
| |
| 4.3.2.2.6.2 Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) Uncertainty Analysis The PDMS installed at WBN Unit 1 is an advanced core monitoring system that utilizes existing plant instrumentation data and an on-line 3 dimensional (3D) neutronics code to provide essentially continuous surveillance of core thermal limits. The software support package that drives the PDMS is the Westinghouse Best Estimate Analyzer for Core Operations - Nuclear (BEACONTM) 1. The BEACON software support package is also used to process incore flux maps and perform various core analyses including load following simulations. All process input signals to the BEACON PDMS are derived from the plant Integrated Computer System. The BEACON PDMS is described in more detail in Section 7.7.1.9.4.
| |
| The BEACON PDMS complements the MID system whenever reactor power is greater than or equal to 25-percent rated thermal power (RTP). Below 25-percent RTP or whenever the BEACON PDMS is inoperable, the MID system is used to perform periodic core power distribution measurements and surveillances. The MID system is also used to calibrate the BEACON PDMS initially at the beginning of each fuel cycle and either 31 effective full power 1
| |
| BEACON is a trademark of Westinghouse Electric Company LLC in the United States and may be registered in other countries throughout the world. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
| |
| 4.3-19
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 days (EFPD) or 180 EFPD thereafter, depending upon core exit thermocouple (CET) coverage.
| |
| The BEACON PDMS is described in the Westinghouse topical report WCAP-12472-P, "BEACON: Core Monitoring and Operations Support System," which was approved as WCAP-12472-P-A by NRC in Reference [58]. NRC-approved changes to the neutronics methodology used to calculate the 3D core power distribution are described in Addendum 1-A to WCAP-12472-P-A, Reference [59]. NRC approved changes to the plant and cycle-specific thermocouple uncertainty analysis and updates to Westinghouse design model methodologies are described in Addendum 4-A to WCAP-12472-P-A, Reference [61].
| |
| BEACON PDMS calibrations based on full core flux maps ensure that the reference power distributions reflect the actual power distribution at the condition of the flux map. The reference power distribution is updated at least every 15 minutes by following the core operating history.
| |
| During this 15 minute interval, the radial and axial power distributions are automatically adjusted approximately every minute using incore-calibrated CET and excore detector measurements, respectively.
| |
| The power peaking factors are calculated from the updated power distribution with accuracies that meet the acceptance criteria of 95% probability at the 95% confidence level. Detailed discussion of the BEACON uncertainty analysis is provided in References [58] and [61].
| |
| Fuel is presently of Westinghouse manufacture and includes tritium producing burnable absorber rods (TPBARs). TPBARs behave similarly to standard burnable poisons. However, prior to Unit 1 Cycle 15, to model the isotopic chains for tritium, WBN Unit 1 used the PHOENIX-L /ANC-L codes, which are WBN Unit 1 specific updates to the standard PHOENIX /ANC codes that are specifically approved for use at WBN Unit 1. Starting in Unit 1 Cycle 15, the standard PARAGON lattice code is used in place of PHOENIX-L.
| |
| Previous operating cycle data is examined to establish reference uncertainties. This examination accounts for potential loading of fuel supplied by different vendors by comparing the BEACON model to actual operating data over the previous cycle. At the beginning of cycle, thermocouple data is captured and evaluated to determine a cycle-specific thermocouple uncertainty that is a function of thermocouple assembly power. In addition, the initial calibration to the flux map measurements at the start of the cycle ensures that the model calibration factors reflect the actual fuel in the reactor before the BEACON system is declared operable.
| |
| The BEACON PDMS application at WBN Unit 1 is designated BEACON-TSM (Tech Spec Monitor). The BEACON-TSM monitors current Tech Spec thermal limits and does not alter the limits specified in the Core Operating Limits Report. Therefore, additional conditions specified for use of BEACON-DMM (Direct Margin Monitor) in Reference [58] do not apply. NRC review of the WBN Unit 1 application of BEACON and adherence to the applicable conditions for use of BEACON are documented in Reference [60].
| |
| 4.3.2.2.7 Testing A series of physics tests is performed on the first core. These tests and the criteria for satisfactory results are described in detail in Chapter 14 (historical information). Since not all limiting situations can be created at beginning-of-life, the main purpose of the tests is to provide a check on the calculational methods used in the predictions for the conditions of the test. Tests performed at the beginning of each reload cycle are limited to verification of selected safety related parameters of the reload design.
| |
| 4.3-20
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2.2.8 Monitoring Instrumentation The adequacy of instrument numbers, spatial deployment, required correlations between readings and peaking factors, calibration and errors are described in References [2], [6], and
| |
| [8]. The relevant conclusions are summarized here in Sections 4.3.2.2.6 and 4.4.5.
| |
| Provided the limitations given in Section 4.3.2.2.5 on rod insertion and axial flux difference are observed, the excore detector system provides adequate on line monitoring of power distributions. Further details of specific limits on the observed rod positions and flux difference are given in the Technical Specifications together with a discussion of their bases.
| |
| Limits for alarms, reactor trip, etc. are given in the Technical Specifications. Descriptions of the systems provided are given in Section 7.7.
| |
| 4.3.2.3 Reactivity Coefficients The kinetic characteristics of the reactor core determine the response of the core to changing plant conditions or to operator adjustments made during normal operation, as well as the core response during abnormal or accidental transients. These kinetic characteristics are quantified in reactivity coefficients. The reactivity coefficients reflect the changes in the neutron multiplication due to varying plant conditions such as power, moderator or fuel temperatures, or less significantly due to a change in pressure or void conditions. Since reactivity coefficients change during the life of the core, ranges of coefficients are employed in transient analysis to determine the response of the plant throughout life. The results of such simulations and the reactivity coefficients used are presented in Chapter 15. The reactivity coefficients are calculated on a core-wise basis by diffusion theory methods and with nodal analysis methods.
| |
| The effect of radial and axial power distribution on core average reactivity coefficients is implicit in those calculations and is not significant under normal operating conditions. For example, a skewed xenon distribution which results in changing axial offset by 5%, changes the moderator and Doppler temperature coefficients by less than 0.01 pcm/°F and 0.03 pcm/°F, respectively.
| |
| An artificially skewed xenon distribution which results in changing the radial FNH by 3%,
| |
| changes the moderator and Doppler temperature coefficients by less than 0.03 pcm/°F and 0.001 pcm/°F, respectively. The spatial effects are accentuated in some transient conditions, for example, in postulated rupture of the main steam line and rupture of the RCCA mechanism housing as described in Chapter 15.
| |
| The analytical methods and calculational models used in calculating the reactivity coefficients are given in Section 4.3.3. These models have been confirmed through extensive testing of more than thirty cores similar to Watts Bar; results of these tests are discussed in Section 4.3.3.
| |
| Quantitative information for calculated reactivity coefficients, including fuel-Doppler coefficient, moderator coefficients (density, temperature, pressure, void) and power coefficient is given in the following sections.
| |
| 4.3-21
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2.3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Coefficient The fuel temperature (Doppler) coefficient is defined as the change in reactivity per degree change in effective fuel temperature and is primarily a measure of the Doppler broadening of U-238 and Pu-240 resonance absorption peaks. Doppler broadening of other isotopes such as U-236, Np-237, etc, are also considered but their contributions to the Doppler effect is small.
| |
| An increase in fuel temperature increases the effective resonance absorption cross sections of the fuel and produces a corresponding reduction in reactivity.
| |
| The fuel temperature coefficient is calculated by performing two group X-Y calculations using an updated version of the TURTLE code,[9] the PALADON code,[27] or the ANC code.[38] The moderator temperature is held constant and the power level is varied. Spatial variation of fuel temperature is taken into account by calculating the effective fuel temperature as a function of power density as discussed in Section 4.3.3.1.
| |
| A typical Doppler temperature coefficient is shown in Figure 4.3-27 as a function of the effective fuel temperature (at beginning-of--life and end-of-life conditions). The effective fuel temperature is lower than the volume averaged fuel temperature since the neutron flux distribution is non-uniform through the pellet and gives preferential weight to the surface temperature. The Doppler-only contribution to the power coefficient, defined later, is shown in Figure 4.3-28 as a function of relative core power. The integral of the differential curve on Figure 4.3-28 is the Doppler contribution to the power defect and is shown in Figure 4.3-29 as a function of power level. The Doppler coefficient becomes more negative as a function of life as the Pu-240 content (i.e., resonance absorption) increases. However, the overall Doppler coefficient becomes less negative as the fuel temperature changes with burnup as described in Section 4.3.3.1. The upper and lower limits of Doppler coefficient used in accident analyses are given in Chapter 15.
| |
| 4.3.2.3.2 Moderator Coefficients The moderator coefficient is a measure of the change in reactivity due to a change in specific coolant parameters such as density, temperature, pressure or void. The coefficients so obtained are moderator density, temperature, pressure and void coefficients.
| |
| Moderator Density and Temperature Coefficients The moderator temperature (density) coefficient is defined as the change in reactivity per degree change in the moderator temperature. Generally, the effect of the changes in moderator density as well as the temperature are considered together. A decrease in moderator density means less moderation which results in a negative moderator coefficient. An increase in coolant temperature, keeping the density constant, leads to a hardened neutron spectrum and results in an increase in resonance absorption in U-238, Pu-240 and other isotopes. The hardened spectrum also causes a decrease in the fission to capture ratio in U-235 and Pu-239. Both of these effects make the moderator coefficient more negative. Since water density changes more rapidly with temperature as temperature increases, the moderator temperature (density) coefficient become more negative with increasing temperature.
| |
| 4.3-22
| |
| | |
| WBN The soluble boron used in the reactor as a means of reactivity control also has an effect on moderator density coefficient since the soluble boron density, as well as the water density, are decreased when the coolant temperature rises. An increase in the soluble boron concentration introduces a positive component in the moderator coefficient. If the concentration of soluble boron is large enough, the net value of the coefficient may be positive. With the burnable absorber rods present, however, the initial hot boron concentration is sufficiently low that the moderator temperature coefficient is negative at operating temperatures. The effect of control rods is to make the moderator coefficient more negative by reducing the required soluble boron concentration and by increasing the 'leakage' of the core.
| |
| With burnup, the moderator coefficient becomes more negative primarily as a result of boric acid dilution but also to a significant extent from the effects of the buildup of plutonium and fission products.
| |
| The moderator coefficient is calculated for the various plant conditions discussed above by performing two-group two or three dimensional calculations, varying the moderator temperature by +5°F about each of the mean temperatures, and the density changes consistent with the temperature. The moderator coefficient is shown as a function of core temperature and boron concentration for a typical unrodded and rodded core in Figures 4.3-30 through 4.3-32. The temperature range covered is from cold (~68°F) to about 600°F. The contribution due to Doppler coefficient (because of change in moderator temperature) has been subtracted from these results. Figure 4.3-33 shows the hot, full-power moderator temperature coefficient plotted as a function of first cycle lifetime for the just critical boron concentration condition based on the design boron letdown condition.
| |
| The moderator coefficients presented here are calculated on a core wise basis, since they are used to describe the core behavior in normal and accident situations when the moderator temperature changes can be considered to affect the whole core.
| |
| Moderator Pressure Coefficient The moderator pressure coefficient relates the change in moderator density, resulting from a reactor coolant pressure change, to the corresponding effect on neutron production. This coefficient is of much less significance in comparison with the moderator temperature coefficient. A change of 50 psi in pressure has approximately the same effect (in magnitude but opposite in sign) on reactivity as a half degree change in moderator temperature. This coefficient can be determined from the moderator temperature coefficient by relating change in pressure to the corresponding change in density. The moderator pressure coefficient is negative over a portion of the moderator temperature range at beginning-of-life (-0.004 pcm/psi, BOL) but is always positive at operating conditions and becomes more positive during life (+0.3 pcm/psi, EOL).
| |
| 4.3-23
| |
| | |
| WBN Moderator Void Coefficient The moderator void coefficient relates the change in neutron multiplication to the presence of voids in the moderator. In a PWR, this coefficient is not very significant because of the low void content in the coolant. The core void content is < 1/2% and is due to local or statistical boiling.
| |
| The void coefficient varies from +50 pcm/percent void at BOL and at low temperatures to -250 pcm/percent void at EOL and at operating temperatures. The negative void coefficient at operating temperature becomes more negative with fuel burnup.
| |
| 4.3.2.3.3 Power Coefficient The combined effect of moderator temperature and fuel temperature change as the core power level changes is called the total power coefficient and is expressed in terms of reactivity change per percent power change. The power coefficient at BOL and EOL conditions is given in Figure 4.3-34.
| |
| It becomes more negative with burnup reflecting the combined effect of moderator and fuel temperature coefficients with burnup. The power defect (integral reactivity effect) at BOL and EOL is given in Figure 4.3-35.
| |
| 4.3.2.3.4 Comparison of Calculated and Experimental Reactivity Coefficients Section 4.3.3 describes the comparison of calculated and experimental reactivity coefficients in detail. Based on the data presented there, the accuracy of the current analytical model is:
| |
| +0.2 percent for Doppler and power defect
| |
| + 2 pcm/°F for the moderator coefficient Experimental evaluation of the calculated coefficients is done during the physics startup tests described in Chapter 14 (historical information).
| |
| 4.3.2.3.5 Reactivity Coefficients Used in Transient Analysis Table 4.3-2 gives the representative ranges of the reactivity coefficients. The limiting values are used as design limits in the transient analysis. The exact values of the coefficient used in the analysis depend on whether the transient of interest is examined at BOL or EOL, whether the most negative or the most positive (least negative) coefficients are appropriate, and whether spatial nonuniformity must be considered in the analysis. Conservative values of coefficients, considering various aspects of analysis, are used in the transient analysis. This is described in Chapter 15.
| |
| 4.3-24
| |
| | |
| WBN The reactivity coefficients shown in Figures 4.3-27 through 4.3-35 are values calculated for a typical cycle. The limiting values shown in Table 4.3-2 are chosen to encompass the best estimate reactivity coefficients, including the uncertainties given in Section 4.3.3.3, over appropriate operating conditions. The coefficients appropriate for use in subsequent cycles depend on the cores operating history, the number and enrichment of fresh fuel assemblies, the loading pattern of burned and fresh fuel, and number and location of burnable absorbers. The need for a reevaluation of any accident in a subsequent cycle is contingent upon whether or not the coefficients for that cycle fall within the identified range used in the analysis presented in Chapter 15 with due allowance for the calculational uncertainties given in Section 4.3.3.3.
| |
| Control rod requirements are given in Table 4.3-3 for the core described and for a hypothetical equilibrium cycle since these are markedly different. These latter numbers are provided for information only and their validity in a particular cycle would be an unexpected coincidence.
| |
| 4.3.2.4 Control Requirements To ensure the shutdown margin requirements stated in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications under conditions where a cooldown to ambient temperature is required, concentrated soluble boron is added to the coolant. Boron concentrations for several core conditions are listed in Table 4.3-2. For all core conditions, including refueling, the boron concentration is well below the solubility limit. The rod cluster control assemblies are employed to bring the reactor to the hot shutdown condition. The minimum required shutdown margin is given in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications.
| |
| The ability to accomplish the shutdown for hot conditions is demonstrated in Table 4.3-3 which compares the difference between the Rod Cluster Control Assembly (RCCA) reactivity available, with an allowance for the worst stuck rod, with that required for control and protection purposes. The shutdown margin includes an allowance of 10% on the total calculated rod worth minus the most reactive stuck rod for analytic uncertainties.[36] The largest reactivity control requirement appears at the end-of-life when the moderator temperature coefficient reaches its peak negative value as reflected in the larger power defect.
| |
| The control rods are required to provide sufficient reactivity to account for the power defect from full power to zero power and to provide the required shutdown margin. The reactivity addition resulting from power reduction consists of contributions from Doppler, variable average moderator temperature, flux redistribution, and reduction in void content, as discussed below.
| |
| The shutdown margin calculation considers the reactivity addition from these individual components as the power defect from the current power level to the hot zero power condition.
| |
| 4.3.2.4.1 Doppler The Doppler effect arises from the broadening of U-238 and Pu-240 resonance peaks with an increase in effective pellet temperature. This effect is most noticeable over the range of zero power to full power due to the large pellet temperature increase with power generation.
| |
| 4.3-25
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2.4.2 Variable Average Moderator Temperature When the core is shutdown to the hot zero power condition, the average moderator temperature changes from the equilibrium full load value determined by the steam generator and turbine characteristics (steam pressure, heat transfer, tube fouling, etc.) to the equilibrium no load value, which is based on the steam generator shell side design pressure. The design change in temperature is conservatively increased by a temperature uncertainty to account for the control dead band and measurement errors.
| |
| Since the moderator coefficient is negative, there is a reactivity addition with power reduction.
| |
| The moderator coefficient becomes more negative as the fuel depletes because the boron concentration is reduced. This effect is the major contributor to the increased requirement at end-of-life.
| |
| 4.3.2.4.3 Redistribution During full power operation, the coolant density decreases with core height, and this, together with partial insertion of control rods, results in less fuel depletion near the top of the core. Under steady state conditions, the relative power distribution will be slightly asymmetric towards the bottom of the core. On the other hand, at hot zero power conditions, the coolant density is uniform up the core, and there is no flattening due to Doppler. The result will be a flux distribution which at zero power can be skewed toward the top of the core. The reactivity insertion due to the skewed distribution is calculated with an allowance for the most adverse effects of xenon distribution.
| |
| 4.3.2.4.4 Void Content A small void content in the core is due to nucleate boiling at full power. The void collapse coincident with power reduction makes a small reactivity contribution.
| |
| 4.3.2.4.5 Rod Insertion Allowance At full power, the control bank is operated within a prescribed band of travel to compensate for small periodic changes in boron concentration, changes in temperature and very small changes in the xenon concentration not compensated for by a change in boron concentration. When the control bank reaches either limit of this band, a change in boron concentration is required to compensate for additional reactivity changes. Since the insertion limit is set by a rod travel limit, a conservatively high calculation of the inserted worth is made which exceeds the normally inserted reactivity.
| |
| 4.3-26
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2.4.6 Burnup Excess reactivity of approximately 10% (hot) is installed at the beginning of each cycle to provide sufficient reactivity to compensate for fuel depletion and fission product buildup throughout the cycle. This reactivity is controlled by the addition of soluble boron to the coolant and by burnable absorbers. The soluble boron concentration for several core configurations, the unit boron worth, and burnable absorber worth are given in Tables 4.3-1 and 4.3-2. Since the excess reactivity for burnup is controlled by soluble boron and/or burnable absorbers, it is not included in control rod requirements.
| |
| 4.3.2.4.7 Xenon and Samarium Concentrations Changes in xenon and samarium concentrations in the core occur at a sufficiently slow rate, even following rapid power level changes, that the resulting reactivity change is controlled by changing the soluble boron concentration.
| |
| 4.3.2.4.8 pH Effects Changes in reactivity due to a change in coolant pH, if any, are sufficiently small in magnitude and occur slowly enough to be controlled by the boron system. Further details are available in Reference [10].
| |
| 4.3.2.4.9 Experimental Confirmation Following a normal shutdown, the total core reactivity change during cooldown with a stuck rod has been measured on a 121 assembly, 10-foot high core and a 121 assembly, 12-foot high core. In each case, the core was allowed to cooldown until it reached criticality simulating the steam line break accident. For the ten foot core, the total reactivity change associated with the cooldown is over predicted by about 0.3% with respect to the measured result. This represents an error of about 5% in the total reactivity change and is about half the uncertainty allowance for this quantity. For the 12-foot core, the difference between the measured and predicted reactivity change was an even smaller 0.2% . These measurements and others demonstrate the ability of the methods described in Section 4.3.3 to accurately predict the total shutdown reactivity of the core.
| |
| 4.3.2.5 Control Core reactivity is controlled by means of a chemical shim dissolved in the coolant, Rod Cluster Control Assemblies, and burnable absorber rods as described below.
| |
| 4.3-27
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2.5.1 Chemical Shim Boron in solution as boric acid is used to control relatively slow reactivity changes associated with:
| |
| : 1. The moderator temperature defect in going from cold shutdown at ambient temperature to the hot operating temperature at zero power,
| |
| : 2. The transient xenon and samarium concentrations, such as that following power changes or changes in RCCA position,
| |
| : 3. The excess reactivity required to compensate for the effects of fissile inventory depletion and buildup of long-life fission products.
| |
| : 4. The burnable absorber depletion.
| |
| The boron concentrations for various core conditions are presented in Table 4.3-2.
| |
| 4.3.2.5.2 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies The numbers of Rod Cluster Control Assemblies shown in Table 4.3-1 are used for shutdown and control purposes to offset fast reactivity changes associated with:
| |
| : 1. The required shutdown margin in the hot zero power, stuck rod condition.
| |
| : 2. The reactivity compensation as a result of an increase in power above hot zero power (power defect including Doppler, and moderator reactivity changes).
| |
| : 3. Unprogrammed fluctuations in boron concentration, coolant temperature, or xenon concentration (with rods not exceeding the allowable rod insertion limits).
| |
| : 4. Reactivity ramp rates resulting from load changes.
| |
| The allowed control bank reactivity insertion is limited at full power to maintain shutdown capability. The insertion limit is determined using conservative xenon distributions and axial power shapes. As the power level is reduced, control rod reactivity requirements are also reduced and more rod insertion is allowed. The control bank position is monitored and the operator is notified by an alarm if the limit is approached. In addition, the Rod Cluster Control Assembly withdrawal pattern determined from these analyses is used in determining power distribution factors and in determining the maximum worth of an inserted Rod Cluster Control Assembly ejection accident. For further discussion, refer to the Technical Specifications on Rod Insertion Limits.
| |
| 4.3-28
| |
| | |
| WBN Power distribution, Rod Ejection and Rod Misalignment analyses are based on the arrangement of the shutdown and control groups of the Rod Cluster Control Assemblies shown in Figure 4.3-36. All shutdown rod cluster control assemblies are withdrawn before withdrawal of the control banks is initiated. In going from zero to 100% power, control banks B, C and D are withdrawn sequentially. The limits of rod positions and further discussion on the basis for rod insertion limits are provided in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications.
| |
| 4.3.2.5.3 Burnable Absorbers The burnable absorbers provide partial control of the excess reactivity available during the cycle. In doing so, burnable absorbers prevent the moderator temperature coefficient from being positive at normal operating conditions. They perform this function by reducing the requirement for soluble boron in the moderator. The burnable absorber rod pattern in the core together with the number of rods per assembly is shown in Figure 4.3-5, while the arrangements of burnable absorber rods within an assembly are displayed in Figures 4.3-4a and 4.3-4b. The reactivity worth of these rods for Cycle 1 is shown in Table 4.3-1. The boron in the rods is depleted with burnup but at a sufficiently slow rate so that the resulting critical concentration of soluble boron is such that the moderator temperature coefficient remains negative at all times for power operating conditions.
| |
| As an option, a special form of burnable absorber rod may be used, which utilizes lithium-6 [6Li]
| |
| as the burnable nuclide. These rods, known as TPBARs (tritium producing burnable absorber rods), occupy up to 24 control rod thimbles in the assembly in which they are installed, and remain in the assembly for one cycle of irradiation.
| |
| 4.3.2.5.4 Peak Xenon Startup Compensation for the peak xenon buildup is accomplished using the boron control system.
| |
| Startup from the peak xenon condition is accomplished with a combination of rod motion and boron dilution. The boron dilution may be made at any time, including during the shutdown period, provided the shutdown margin is maintained.
| |
| 4.3.2.5.5 Load Follow Control and Xenon Control During load follow maneuvers, power changes are accomplished using control rod motion and dilution or boration by the boron system as required. Control rod motion is limited by the control rod insertion limits as provided in the COLR and discussed in UFSAR Section 4.3.2.5.2.
| |
| Reactivity changes due to the changing xenon concentration can be controlled by rod motion and/or changes in the soluble boron concentration.
| |
| 4.3.2.5.6 Burnup Control of the excess reactivity for burnup is accomplished using soluble boron and/or burnable absorbers. The boron concentration must be limited during operating conditions to ensure the moderator temperature coefficient is negative. Sufficient burnable absorbers are installed at the beginning of a cycle to give the desired cycle lifetime without exceeding the boron concentration limit. The practical minimum boron concentration is 10 ppm.
| |
| 4.3-29
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.3.2.6 Control Rod Patterns and Reactivity Worth The Rod Cluster Control Assemblies are designated by function as the control groups and the shutdown groups. The terms 'group' and 'bank' are used synonymously throughout this report to describe a particular grouping of control assemblies. The rod cluster assembly pattern is displayed in Figure 4.3-36. The control banks are labeled A, B, C and D and the shutdown banks are labeled SA, SB, SC and SD. Each bank, although operated and controlled as a unit, is comprised of two subgroups. The axial position of the Rod Cluster Control Assemblies may be controlled manually or automatically. The Rod Cluster Control Assemblies are all dropped into the core following actuation of reactor trip signals.
| |
| Two criteria have been employed for selection of the control groups. First the total reactivity worth must be adequate to meet the requirements specified in Table 4.3-3. Second, in view of the fact that these rods may be partially inserted at power operation; the total power peaking factor should be low enough to ensure that the power capability requirements are met.
| |
| Analyses indicate that the first requirement can be met either by a single group or by two or more banks whose total worth equals at least the required amount. The axial power shape would be more peaked following movement of a single group of rods worth three to four percent delta-; therefore, four banks (described as A, B, C and D in Figure 4.3-36) have been selected.
| |
| The position of control banks for criticality under any reactor condition is determined by the concentration of boron in the coolant. On an approach to criticality, boron is adjusted to ensure that criticality will be achieved with control rods above the insertion limit set by shutdown margin and other considerations (See Watts Bar Technical Specifications). Early in the cycle there may also be a withdrawal limit at low power to maintain a negative moderator temperature coefficient. Usual practice is to adjust boron to ensure that the rod position lies within the maneuvering band.
| |
| Ejected rod worths are given in Table 15.4-12 for several different conditions.
| |
| Allowable deviations due to misaligned control rods are discussed in the Watts Bar Technical Specifications.
| |
| A representative calculation for two banks of control rods simultaneously withdrawn (Rod Withdrawal accident) is given in Figure 4.3-37.
| |
| Calculation of control rod reactivity worth versus time following reactor trip involves both control rod velocity and differential reactivity worth. Nuclear design provides reactivity worth versus rod position from a series of steady-state calculations at various control rod positions, assuming all rods out of the core as the initial position in order to minimize the initial reactivity insertion rate.
| |
| To be conservative, the rod of highest worth is assumed stuck out of the core and the flux distribution (and thus reactivity importance) is assumed to be skewed to the bottom of the core.
| |
| 4.3-30
| |
| | |
| WBN The shutdown groups provide additional negative reactivity to assure an adequate shutdown margin. Shutdown margin is defined as the amount of reactivity by which the core would be subcritical at hot shutdown if all rod cluster control assemblies are tripped, but assuming that the highest worth assembly remains fully withdrawn and no changes in xenon or boron take place. The loss of control rod worth due to the material irradiation is negligible since only bank D rods may be in the core under normal operating conditions (near full power).
| |
| The values given in Table 4.3-3 show that the available reactivity in withdrawn Rod Cluster Control Assemblies provides the design bases minimum shutdown margin allowing for the highest worth cluster to be at its fully withdrawn position. An allowance for uncertainty in the calculated worth of N-1 rods is made before determination of the shutdown margin.
| |
| 4.3.2.7 Criticality of Fuel Assemblies Criticality of fuel assemblies outside the reactor is precluded by adequate design of fuel transfer and fuel storage facilities and by administrative control procedures in accordance with 10 CFR 50.68(b). This section identifies those criteria important to criticality safety analyses.
| |
| New Fuel Storage New fuel is normally stored dry in the new fuel storage vault. The design basis for preventing criticality within the new fuel storage vault is that, including uncertainties, there is a 95%
| |
| probability at a 95% confidence level that the effective multiplication factor (keff) of the fuel assembly array will be less than 0.95 under full moderator density conditions and less than 0.98 under low water density (optimum moderation) conditions.
| |
| The new fuel rack criticality analysis demonstrated that this rack will meet the design basis limits for keff for storage of Westinghouse 17x17 STANDARD fuel assemblies with nominal enrichments up to 4.3 wt% U-235 utilizing all (130) available storage cell locations. The analysis also showed that nominal enrichments above 4.3 wt% and up to 5.0 wt% U-235 can be stored provided that only 120 specific cells of the 130 available locations are utilized. When fuel enrichment above 4.3 wt% are to be stored in the new fuel vault, ten physical restricting devices such as insert plates will be placed in the proper locations to provide additional assurance, over procedural controls, that the fuel will only be stored in the 120 analyzed positions. The insert plates may have a non-fuel bearing component stored in them such as thimble plugging assemblies, rod cluster control assemblies, burnable poison rod assemblies, or tritium producing burnable absorber rod assemblies which are described in Sections 4.2.3.2.1 and 4.2.4. The allowed location for the 120 usable cells is described in the new fuel storage rack criticality report.
| |
| 4.3-31
| |
| | |
| WBN The design method which ensures the criticality safety of fuel assemblies in the spent fuel storage rack uses the AMPX system of codes for cross-section generation and KENO IV for reactivity determination. The 227 energy group cross-section library that is the common starting point for all cross-sections used for the benchmarks and the storage rack analysis is generated from ENDF/B-V data. The NITAWL program includes, in this library, the self-shielded resonance cross-sections that are appropriate for each particular geometry. The Nordheim Integral Treatment is used. Energy and spatial weighting of cross-sections is performed by the XSDRNPM program which is a one-dimensional Sn transport theory code. These multigroup cross-section sets are then used as input to KENO IV which is a three dimensional Monte Carlo theory program designed for reactivity calculations.
| |
| Under normal conditions, the fresh fuel racks are maintained in a dry environment. The introduction of water into the fresh fuel rack area is the worst case accident scenario. The full density and low density optimum moderation cases are bounding accident situations which result in the most conservative fuel rack keff.
| |
| Other accidents can be postulated which would cause some reactivity increase (i. e., dropping a fuel assembly between the rack and wall or on top of the rack). For these other accident conditions, the double contingency principle of ANSI N16.1-1975 is applied. This states that one is not required to assume two unlikely, independent, concurrent events to ensure protection against a criticality accident. Thus, for these other accident conditions, the absence of a moderator in the fresh fuel storage racks can be assumed as a realistic initial condition since assuming its presence would be a second unlikely event.
| |
| The maximum reactivity increase for these kinds of postulated accidents is less than 10% delta-k/k, and since the normal, dry fresh fuel rack reactivity is less than 0.70, these postulated accidents will not result in a keff which is more limiting than the analyzed worst case accident scenarios of full density and optimum moderation water flooding. Thus, using the method described above, the maximum keff was determined to be less than 0.95, which meets the criteria stated in Section 4.3.1.6.
| |
| Spent Fuel Storage - Wet The high density spent fuel storage racks for WBN are designed to assure that the effective neutron multiplication factor (keff) is equal to or less than 0.95. Design calculations model the racks fully loaded with fuel of the highest anticipated reactivity, and with a margin for uncertainty in reactivity calculations including mechanical tolerances. Uncertainties are statistically combined, such that the final keff will be equal to or less than 0.95 with a 95% probability at a 95% confidence level.
| |
| The layout of storage cells in the WBN spent fuel pool is shown in Figure 9.1-15. The criticality analysis of the WBN spent fuel pool configuration assures that the maximum keff will be less than or equal to 0.95 with fuel up to 4.95 +/- .05 wt% U-235 enrichment.
| |
| 4.3-32
| |
| | |
| WBN Analysis of the WBN spent fuel rack configuration[41],[42] was performed using the SCALE[43],[44],[45] system of codes for cross section generation and reactivity calculations, and CASMO[46],[47],[48],[49] was used for depletion calculations. The design basis fuel is a 17x17 Westinghouse VANTAGE-5H[50] assembly containing a maximum initial enrichment of 4.95 +/- .05 wt% U-235. The calculations were performed with a moderator temperature of 4oC.
| |
| Margin for uncertainty in the reactivity calculations and manufacturing tolerances were included such that the final keff for allowed storage configurations will be less than or equal to 0.95 with a 95% probability at a 95% confidence level. In order to store fuel with U-235 enrichment as high as 4.95 +/- .05 wt%, administrative controls and burnup credit must be applied. Therefore, the analysis takes credit for the reactivity decrease due to burnup of the stored fuel and for administrative controls on fuel placement. Burnup in discharged fuel was treated using CASMO4, performing depletion calculations which explicitly describe the fission product nuclide concentration. This methodology incorporates approximately 40 of the most important fission products. The fission product nuclide concentrations obtained from the CASMO4 depletions were then modeled in three-dimensions using KENO5a.
| |
| The VANTAGE 5H fuel design[50] was modeled as the design basis fuel. The VANTAGE 5H design contains a smaller guide tube outer diameter and thus slightly increased neutron moderation compared with the Westinghouse Standard 17x17 fuel assembly. In addition, VANTAGE 5H fuel assemblies have zircaloy spacer grids as opposed to the more neutron-absorbing material Inconel found on the Standard 17x17 fuel assembly. As a result of these differences, VANTAGE 5H fuel has a higher reactivity for a given enrichment than Standard fuel. Therefore, analysis of VANTAGE 5H fuel also covers storage of Standard 17x17 fuel.
| |
| VANTAGE 5H fuel assembly data is provided in Table 4.3-12. The analysis model bounds the design basis fuel assembly using the data provided in Table 4.3-12 or a more conservative value depending on the specific calculation.
| |
| Starting in Cycle 2 with Reload 1, Watts Bar will use the Westinghouse fuel assembly designated a Vantage+/Performance+ (V+/P+). The V+/P+fuel design is less reactive than the VANTAGE 5H fuel design at the same enrichment. The ZIRLO material used in the midgrids, fuel cladding and guide tubes has a slight reactivity penalty relative to ZIRC-4.[56] Therefore, the analysis of Vantage 5H also covers and is bounding for the V+/P+ fuel design. In addition, the analysis evaluated the Robust Fuel Assembly (RFA) design and determined that the Vantage 5H design is bounding for the burnups of interest.
| |
| 4.3-33
| |
| | |
| WBN Analytical Technique and Results The criticality analysis for the WBN racks were performed primarily with KENO5a, a three-dimensional Monte Carlo computer code, using the 238-group SCALE cross-section library and the Nordheim integral treatment for resonance shielding effects found in NITAWL. Depletion analyses were performed using CASMO4, a two-dimensional transport theory code. The models included explicit descriptions of the fission product nuclide concentrations, incorporating approximately 40 of the most important fission products.
| |
| Analysis of the spent fuel racks confirmed the racks can safely and conservatively accommodate storage of fuel up to 5 wt% U-235 enrichment with the following storage conditions:
| |
| : 1. Fuel assemblies with 3.8 wt% or less U-235 enrichment may be stored without restrictions.
| |
| : 2. Fuel assemblies with initial enrichment greater than 3.8 wt% U-235 and less than a maximum of 5.0 wt% (4.95+/-0.05) may be stored in one of four arrangements with the limits specified below:
| |
| A. Fuel assemblies may be stored in the racks without further restrictions provided the burnup of each assembly is in the acceptable domain identified in Figure 4.3-46, depending on the specified initial enrichment.
| |
| B. New and spent fuel assemblies may be stored in a checkerboard arrangement of 2 new and 2 spent assemblies, provided the accumulated burnup of each spent assembly is in the acceptable domain identified in Figure 4.3-47, depending on the specified initial enrichment.
| |
| C. New fuel assemblies may be stored in 4-cell arrays with 1 of the 4 cells remaining empty of fuel (containing only water or water with up to 75% by volume of non-fuel bearing material).
| |
| D. New fuel assemblies with a minimum of 32 integral fuel burnable absorber (IFBA) rods may be stored in the racks without further restrictions provided the loading of ZrB2 in the coating of each IFBA rod is a minimum of 1.25x (1.9625 mg/in).
| |
| A water cell is less reactive than any cell containing fuel and therefore may be used at any location in the loading arrangements. A water cell is defined as a cell containing water or non-fissile material with no more than 75% of the water displaced.
| |
| 4.3-34
| |
| | |
| WBN The Technical Specifications include curves defining the limiting burnup for fuel of various initial enrichments for both unrestricted storage and checkerboard arrangements assuming the fresh fuel region is enriched to 4.95+/-0.05 wt% U-235. The calculated maximum reactivity is 0.948, which is within the regulatory limit of a keff of 0.95. This maximum reactivity includes calculational uncertainties and manufacturing tolerances (95% probability at the 95%
| |
| confidence level), an allowance for uncertainty in depletion calculations, and the evaluated effect of the axial distribution in burnup. Fresh fuel of less than 4.95% enrichment would result in lower reactivities.
| |
| Accounting for biases and uncertainties, the maximum keff values for the above spent fuel storage rack conditions are less than 0.95. The maximum keff was determined as follows:
| |
| keff = keff (KENO) + BIASES + UNCERTAINTIES Biases include the CASMO and KENO method biases and a bias for the extrapolation of enrichment from the critical benchmark comparisons. The uncertainties include the KENO statistical uncertainty, the KENO and CASMO method uncertainties, and the mechanical tolerance uncertainty.
| |
| The analyses conservatively do not take credit for presence of borated water, presence of discrete burnable absorbers, lower enrichment and higher burnup which would decrease reactivity.
| |
| Other conservative assumptions include:
| |
| * Ignoring radial neutron leakage from the spent fuel storage racks
| |
| * Ignoring the presence of control rods
| |
| * Ignoring the presence of spent burnable absorber assemblies in storage
| |
| * Ignoring the higher water temperature of the spent fuel pool
| |
| * Maximizing burnable poison history effects
| |
| * Maximizing water density history effects
| |
| * Minimizing the 10B content in the Boral A water gap between two rack modules with Boral panels on both sides of the water gap (i.e., a flux trap), precludes any adverse interaction between the two modules.
| |
| The effect of various parameters on reactivity was determined to ensure the conservatism of the analysis. This was accomplished by performing sensitivity sudies on these parameters with either CASMO. Parameters evaluated were axial burnup distribution, water temperature/density, assembly placement, mechanical tolerances, poison loading, pellet density, cell dimensions/bow, borated water activity worth, Boral width tolerance, cell lattice spacing tolerance, stainless steel thickness tolerance, and fuel enrichment and density tolerance.
| |
| 4.3-35
| |
| | |
| WBN Accident Analysis Although credit for soluble poison normally present in the spent fuel pool water is permitted under abnormal or accident conditions (double contingency principle), most abnormal or accident conditions will not result in exceeding the limiting reactivity (keff = 0.95) even in the absence of soluble poison. However, the inadvertent misplacement of a fresh fuel assembly in a location intended to be a water cell has the potential for exceeding the limiting reactivity and results in the worst-case accident scenario, should there be a concurrent loss of all soluble boron. Misplacement of a fuel assembly outside the periphery of a storage module, or a dropped assembly lying on top of the rack would have a smaller reactivity effect. Under this worst-case accident condition, calculations show that approximately 55 ppm of soluble boron would be sufficient to ensure that the limiting keff of 0.95 is not exceeded. Assuring the presence of soluble boron during fuel handing operations will preclude the possibility of the simultaneous occurrence of the two independent accident conditions. Administrative controls require that the spent fuel pool boron concentration be monitored (to ensure at least 2000 ppm) during operations requiring fuel moves in the pool until verification is made of assembly locations.
| |
| WBN conforms fully with the criteria of 10 CFR 50.68(b)(6). There are five radiation monitors located on elevation 757 of the Auxiliary Building near the new fuel vault and the spent fuel pool. Two of the monitors, 1-RE-90-1 and 2-RE-90-1, are area monitors that alert personnel near the fuel storage areas of excessive radiation for personnel protection and to initiate safety actions. These monitors also alarm in the main control room to alert the operators to initiate appropriate safety actions. There are two additional area radiation monitors, 0-RE-90-102 and 0-RE 103, that are located at the spent fuel pool to provide a more rapid response to a fuel handling accident, the presence of excessive radiation, or the presence of a fuel bundle with inadequate water shielding. These monitors alarm in the main control room and isolate the normal Auxiliary Building ventilation system to reduce the release of radioactivity offsite. These monitors will also isolate the containment ventilation system if the containment or annulus is open to the Auxiliary Building during refueling operations. The fifth radiation monitor in the spent and new fuel area is a particulate air monitor. This monitor alarms locally for protection of personnel near the monitor and serves to alert the plant staff of an excessive radiation condition that requires action.
| |
| 4.3.2.8 Stability 4.3.2.8.1 Introduction The stability of the PWR cores against xenon-induced spatial oscillations and the control of such transients are discussed extensively in References [6], [12], [13], and [14]. A summary of these reports is given in the following discussion and the design bases are given in Section 4.3.1.7.
| |
| 4.3-36
| |
| | |
| WBN In a large reactor core, xenon-induced oscillations can take place with no corresponding change in the total power of the core. The oscillation may be caused by a power shift in the core which occurs rapidly by comparison with the xenon-iodine time constants. Such a power shift occurs in the axial direction when a plant load change is made by control rod motion and results in a change in the moderator density and fuel temperature distributions. Such a power shift could occur in the diametral plane of the core as a result of abnormal control action.
| |
| Due to the negative power coefficient of reactivity, PWR cores are inherently stable to oscillations in total power. Protection against total power instabilities is provided by the Reactor Control System as described in Section 7.7. Hence, the discussion on the core stability is limited here to xenon-induced spatial oscillations.
| |
| 4.3.2.8.2 Stability Index Power distributions, either in the axial direction or in the X-Y plane, can undergo oscillations due to perturbations introduced in the equilibrium distributions without changing the total core power.
| |
| The overtones in the current PWRs, and the stability of the core against xenon-induced oscillations can be determined in terms of the eigen values of the first flux overtones. Writing, either in the axial direction or in the X-Y plane, the eigen value of the first flux harmonic as:
| |
| = b + ic, then b is defined as the stability index and T = 2/c as the oscillation period of the first harmonic. The time-dependence of the first harmonic f in the power distribution can be represented as:
| |
| (t) = A e t = aebt cos ct, where A and a are constants. The stability index can also be obtained approximately by:
| |
| 1 A b = ln n+l T An where An, An+1 are the successive peak amplitudes of the oscillation and T is the time period between the successive peaks.
| |
| 4.3.2.8.3 Prediction of the Core Stability The stability of the Watts Bar Nuclear Plant core (i.e., with 17 x 17 fuel assemblies) against xenon-induced spatial oscillations is expected to be equal to or better than that of earlier designs.
| |
| The prediction is based on a comparison of the parameters which are significant in determining the stability of the core against the xenon-induced oscillations, namely:
| |
| 4.3-37
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 1) the overall core size is unchanged and spatial power distributions will be similar,
| |
| : 2) the moderator temperature coefficient is expected to be similar to or slightly more negative, and
| |
| : 3) the Doppler coefficient of reactivity is expected to be equal to or slightly more negative at full power.
| |
| Analysis of both the axial and X-Y xenon transient tests, discussed in Section 4.3.2.8.5, shows that the calculation model is adequate for the prediction of core stability.
| |
| 4.3.2.8.4 Stability Measurements
| |
| : 1. Axial Measurements Two axial xenon transient tests conducted in a PWR with a core height of 12 feet and 121 fuel assemblies is reported in Reference [15], and will be briefly discussed here.
| |
| The tests were performed at approximately 10% and 50% of cycle life.
| |
| Both a free-running oscillation test and a controlled test were performed during the first test. The second test at mid-cycle consisted of a free-running oscillation test only. In each of the free-running oscillation tests, a perturbation was introduced to the equilibrium power distribution through an impulse motion of the control Bank D and the subsequent oscillation was monitored to measure the stability index and the oscillation period.
| |
| In the controlled test conducted early in the cycle, the part length rods were used to follow the oscillations to maintain an axial offset within the prescribed limits. The axial offset of power was obtained from the excore ion chamber readings (which had been calibrated against the incore flux maps) as a function of time for both free-running tests as shown in Figure 4.3-40.
| |
| The total core power was maintained constant during these spatial xenon tests, and the stability index and the oscillation period were obtained from a least-square fit of the axial offset data in the form of Equation (4.3-2). The axial offset of power is the quantity that properly represents the axial stability in the sense that it essentially eliminates any contribution from even order harmonics, including the fundamental mode. The conclusions of the tests are:
| |
| : a. The core was stable against induced axial xenon transients both at the core average burnups of 1550 MWD/MTU and 7700 MWD/MTU. The measured stability indices are -0.041 hr-1 for the first test (Curve 1 of Figure 4.3-40) and
| |
| -0.014 hr-1 for the second test (Curve 2 of Figure 4.3-40). The corresponding oscillation periods are 32.4 hrs. and 27.2 hrs., respectively.
| |
| 4.3-38
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : b. The reactor core becomes less stable as fuel burnup progresses and the axial stability index was essentially zero at 12,000 MWD/MTU.
| |
| : 2. Measurements in the X-Y Plane Two X-Y xenon oscillation tests were performed at a PWR plant with a core height of 12 feet and 157 fuel assemblies. The first test was conducted at a core average burnup of 1540 MWD/MTU and the second at a core average burnup of 12,900 MWD/MTU. Both of the X-Y xenon tests show that the core was stable in the X-Y plane at both burnups.
| |
| The second test shows that the core became more stable as the fuel burnup increased and all Westinghouse PWR's with 121 and 157 assemblies are expected to be stable throughout their burnup cycles. The results of these tests are applicable to the 193 assembly Watts Bar cores as discussed in Section 4.3.2.
| |
| In each of the two X-Y tests, a perturbation was introduced to the equilibrium power distribution through an impulse motion of one RCCA located along the diagonal axis.
| |
| Following the perturbation, the uncontrolled oscillation was monitored using the Power Distribution Monitoring System and thermocouple system and the excore power range detectors. The quadrant tilt difference (QTD) is the quantity that properly represents the diametral oscillation in the X-Y plane of the reactor core in that the differences of the quadrant average powers over two symmetrically opposite quadrants essentially eliminates the contribution to the oscillation from the azimuthal mode. The QTD data were fitted in the form of Equation (4.3-2) through a least-square method. A stability index of -0.076-1 hr with a period of 29.6 hours was obtained from the thermocouple data shown in Figure 4.3-41.
| |
| It was observed in the second X-Y xenon test that the PWR core with 157 fuel assemblies had become more stable due to an increased fuel depletion and the stability index was not determined.
| |
| 4.3.2.8.5 Comparison of Calculations with Measurements The analysis of the axial xenon transient tests was performed in an axial slab geometry using a flux synthesis technique. The direct simulation of the axial offset data was carried out using the PANDA Code.[16] The analysis of the X-Y xenon transient tests was performed in an X-Y geometry using a modified TURTLE [9] Code. Both the PANDA and TURTLE codes solve the two-group time-dependent neutron diffusion equation with time-dependent xenon and iodine concentrations. The fuel temperature and moderator density feed back is limited to a steady-state model. All the X-Y calculations were performed in an average enthalpy plane.
| |
| The basic nuclear cross-sections used in this study were generated from a unit cell depletion program which has evolved from the codes LEOPARD[17] and CINDER.[18] The detailed experimental data during the tests including the reactor power level, enthalpy rise and the impulse motion of the control rod assembly, as well as the plant follow burnup data were closely simulated in the study.
| |
| 4.3-39
| |
| | |
| WBN The results of the stability calculation for the axial tests are compared with the experimental data in Table 4.3-5. The calculations show conservative results for both of the axial tests with a margin of approximately -0.01 hr-1 in the stability index.
| |
| An analytical simulation of the first X-Y xenon oscillation test shows a calculated stability index of -0.081 hr-1 in good agreement with the measured value of -0.076 hr-1. As indicated earlier, the second X-Y xenon test showed that the core had become more stable compared to the first test and no evaluation of the stability index was attempted. This increase in the core stability in the X-Y plane due to increased fuel burnup is due mainly to the increased magnitude of the negative moderator temperature coefficient.
| |
| Previous studies of the physics of xenon oscillations, including three-dimensional analysis, are reported in the series of topical reports, References [12], [13], and [14]. A more detailed description of the experimental results and analysis of the axial and X-Y xenon transient tests is presented in Reference [15] and Section I of Reference [19].
| |
| 4.3.2.8.6 Stability Control and Protection The excore detector system is utilized to provide indications of xenon-induced spatial oscillations. The readings from the excore detectors are available to the operator and also form part of the protection system.
| |
| : 1. Axial Power Distribution For maintenance of proper axial power distributions, the operator maintains an axial offset within a prescribed operating band, based on the excore detector readings.
| |
| Should the axial offset be permitted to move far enough outside this band, the protection limit will be reached and the power will be automatically cutback.
| |
| As fuel burnup progresses, twelve foot PWR cores become less stable to axial xenon oscillations. However, free xenon oscillations are not allowed to occur, except for special tests. The control rod banks are sufficient to dampen and control any axial xenon oscillations present. Should the axial offset be inadvertently permitted to move far enough outside the allowed band due to an axial xenon oscillation, or for any other reason, the protection limit on axial offset will be reached and the power will be automatically cut back.
| |
| : 2. Radial Power Distribution The core described herein is calculated to be stable against X-Y xenon induced oscillations at all times in life.
| |
| 4.3-40
| |
| | |
| WBN The X-Y stability of large PWR's has been further verified as part of the startup physics test program for PWR cores with 193 fuel assemblies. The measured X-Y stability of the cores with 157 and 193 assemblies was in good agreement with the calculated stability, as discussed in Sections 4.3.2.8.4 and 4.3.2.8.5. In the unlikely event that X-Y oscillations occur, back-up actions are possible and would be implemented, if necessary, to increase the natural stability of the core. This is based on the fact that several actions could be taken to make the moderator temperature coefficient more negative, which will increase the stability of the core in the X-Y plane.
| |
| Provisions for the protection against non-symmetric perturbations in the X-Y power distribution that could result from equipment malfunctions are made in the protection system design. This includes control rod drop, rod misalignment and asymmetric loss of coolant flow.
| |
| A more detailed discussion of the power distribution control in PWR cores is presented in References [6] and [7].
| |
| 4.3.2.9 Vessel Irradiation A brief review of the methods and analyses used in the determination of neutron and gamma ray flux attenuation between the core and the pressure vessel is given below. A more complete discussion on the pressure vessel irradiation and surveillance program is given in Section 5.4.3.6.
| |
| The materials that serve to attenuate neutrons originating in the core and gamma rays from both the core and structural components consist primarily of the core baffle, core barrel, the neutron pads, and associated water annuli, all of which are within the region between the core and the pressure vessel.
| |
| In general, few group neutron diffusion theory codes are used to determine flux and fission power density distributions within the active core and the accuracy of these analyses is verified by in-core measurements on operating reactors. Region and rod-wise power sharing information from the core calculations is then used as source information in two-dimensional Sn transport calculations which compute the flux distribution throughout the reactor.
| |
| The neutron flux distribution and spectrum in the various structural components vary significantly from the core to the pressure vessel. Representative values of the neutron flux distribution and spectrum are presented in Table 4.3-6. The values listed are based on time-averaged equilibrium cycle reactor core parameters and power distributions, and thus, are suitable for long term fluence (nvt) projections and for correlation with radiation damage estimates.
| |
| As discussed in Section 5.4.3.6, the irradiation surveillance program utilizes actual test samples to verify the accuracy of the calculated fluxes at the vessel.
| |
| 4.3-41
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 4.3.3 Analytical Methods Calculations required in nuclear design consist of three distinct types, which are performed in sequence:
| |
| : 1. Determination of effective fuel temperatures
| |
| : 2. Generation of macroscopic few-group parameters
| |
| : 3. Space-dependent, few-group diffusion calculations These calculations are carried out by computer codes which can be executed individually.
| |
| However, at Westinghouse, most of the codes required have been linked to form an automated design sequence which minimizes design time, avoids errors in transcription of data, and standardizes the design methods.
| |
| 4.3.3.1 Fuel Temperature (Doppler) Calculations Temperatures vary radially within the fuel rod, depending on the heat generation rate in the pellet; the conductivity of the materials in the pellet, gap, and clad; and the temperature of the coolant.
| |
| The fuel temperatures for use in most nuclear design Doppler calculations are obtained from a simplified version of the Westinghouse fuel rod design model described in Section 4.2.1.3.1 which considers the effect of radial variation of pellet conductivity, expansion coefficient and heat generation rate, elastic deflection of the clad, and a gap conductance which depends on the initial fill gas, the hot open gap dimension, and the fraction of the pellet over which the gap is closed. The fraction of the gap assumed closed represents an empirical adjustment used to produce good agreement with observed reactivity data at beginning-of-life. Further gap closure occurs with burnup and contributes a positive component to the Doppler defect.
| |
| Radial power distributions in the pellet as a function of burnup are obtained from LASER[20]
| |
| calculations.
| |
| The effective U-238 temperature for resonance absorption is obtained from the radial temperature distribution by applying a radially dependent weighting function. The weighting function was determined from REPAD[21] Monte Carlo calculations of resonance escape probabilities in several steady state and transient temperature distributions. In each case, a flat pellet temperature was determined which produced the same resonance escape probability as the actual distribution. The weighting function was empirically determined from these results.
| |
| 4.3-42
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 The effective Pu-240 temperature for resonance absorption is determined by a convolution of the radial distribution of Pu-240 number densities from LASER burnup calculations and the radial weighting function. The resulting temperature is burnup dependent, but the difference between U-238 and Pu-240 temperatures, in terms of reactivity effects, is small.
| |
| The effective pellet temperature for pellet dimensional change is that value which produces the same outer pellet radius in a virgin pellet as that obtained from the temperature model. The effective clad temperature for dimensional change is its average value.
| |
| The temperature calculational model has been validated by plant Doppler defect data as shown in Table 4.3-7 and Doppler coefficient data as shown in Figure 4.3-42. Stability index measurements also provide a sensitive measure of the Doppler coefficient near full power (See Section 4.3.2.8). It can be seen that Doppler defect data is typically within 0.2% of prediction.
| |
| 4.3.3.2 Macroscopic Group Constants There are two lattice codes which have been used for the generation of macroscopic group constants needed in the spatial, few-group diffusion codes. One is PHOENIX-P which has historically been the sources of the macroscopic group constants. The other is PARAGON.
| |
| Following is a detailed description of each.
| |
| PHOENIX-P [39] has been approved by the NRC as a lattice code for the generation of macroscopic and microscopic few group cross sections for PWR analysis. PHOENIX-P is a two-dimensional, multi-group, transport-based lattice code capable of providing all necessary data for PWR analysis. Since it is a dimensional lattice code, PHOENIX-P does not rely on predetermined spatial/spectral interaction assumptions for the heterogeneous fuel lattice and can provide a more accurate multi-group flux solution.
| |
| The solution for the detailed spatial flux and energy distribution is divided into two major steps in PHOENIX-P [39]. First, a two-dimensional fine energy group nodal solution is obtained, coupling individual sub-cell regions (pellet, clad, and moderator) as well as surrounding pins, using a method based on Carlvik's collision probability approach and heterogeneous response fluxes which preserve the heterogeneity of the pin cells and their surroundings. The nodal solution provides an accurate and detailed local flux distribution, which is then used to homogenize the pin cells spatially to fewer groups. Then, a standard S4 discrete ordinates calculation solves for the angular distribution, based on the group-collapsed and homogenized cross-sections from the first step. These S4 fluxes normalize the detailed spatial and energy nodal fluxes, which are then used to compute reaction rates and power distributions and to deplete the fuel and burnable absorbers. A standard B1 calculation evaluates the fundamental mode critical spectrum, providing an improved fast diffusion coefficient for the core spatial codes.
| |
| PHOENIX-P employs a 70 energy group library derived from the ENDF/B-6 basic data [57]. This library was designed to capture the integral properties of the multi-group data properly during group collapse and to model important resonance parameters properly. It contains all neutronics data necessary for modeling fuel, fission products, cladding and structural materials, coolant, and control and burnable absorber materials present in PWRs. Group constants for burnable absorber cells, control rod cells, guide thimbles and instrumentation thimbles, or other nonfuel cells, can be obtained directly from PHOENIX-P without any adjustments such as those required in the cell or 1D lattice codes.
| |
| 4.3-43
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 PARAGON [62] has been approved by the NRC as the new generation of Westinghouse lattice code. PARAGON is a replacement for PHOENIX-P and its primary use will be to provide the same types of input data that PHOENIX-P generates for use in three dimensional core simulator codes. This includes macroscopic cross sections, microscopic cross sections for feedback adjustments to the macroscopic cross sections, pin factors for pin power reconstruction calculations, discontinuity factors for a nodal method solution, and other data needed for safety analysis or other downstream applications.
| |
| PARAGON is based on collision probability - interface current cell coupling methods.
| |
| PARAGON provides flexibility in modeling that was not available in PHOENIX-P including exact cell geometry representation instead of cylinderization, multiple rings and regions within the fuel pin and the moderator cell geometry, and variable cell pitch. The solution method permits flexibility in choosing the quality of the calculation through both increasing the number of regions modeled within the cell and the number of angular current directions tracked at the cell interfaces.
| |
| The calculation scheme in PARAGON is based on the conventional lattice modules: resonance calculation, flux solution, leakage correction and depletion. The detailed theory of these modules is described in reference [62]. The cross-section resonance calculation module is based on the space dependent Dancoff method [62]; it is a generalization of the PHOENIX-P methodology that permits to subdivide the fuel pin into many rings and therefore generates space dependent self-shielded isotopic cross-sections. The flux solution module uses the interface current collision probability method and permits a detailed representation of the fuel cells [62]. The other two modules (leakage and depletion) are similar to the ones used in PHOENIX-P.
| |
| The current PARAGON cross section library is a 70-group library, based on the ENDF/B basic nuclear data, with the same group structure as the library currently used with PHOENIX-P. The PARAGON qualification library has been improved through the addition of more explicit fission products and fission product chains [62]. PARAGON is however designed to employ any number of energy groups.
| |
| The new NEXUS [63] cross-section generation system uses PARAGON as the lattice code.
| |
| 4.3.3.3 Spatial Few-Group Diffusion Calculations Spatial few-group diffusion calculations are performed using 3D ANC [38], a two-group, two- and three-dimensional nodal code used for dimensional modeling of the core. The three-dimensional nature of this code provides both radial and axial power distributions. For some applications, the updated version of the PANDA [16] will continue to be used for axial calculations, and a two-dimensional collapse of 3D ANC that properly accounts for the three-dimensional features of the fuel will be used for X-Y calculations.
| |
| Nodal calculations (four radial meshes per assembly) are carried out to determine the critical boron concentrations and power distributions. The moderator coefficient is evaluated by varying the inlet temperature in the same kind of calculations as those used for power distribution and reactivity predictions.
| |
| Validation of the reactivity calculations is associated with the validation of the group constants 4.3-44
| |
| | |
| WBN themselves, as discussed in Section 4.3.3.2. Validation of the Doppler calculations is associated with the fuel temperature validation discussed in Section 4.3.3.1. Validation of the moderator coefficient calculations is obtained by comparison with plant measurements at hot zero power conditions as shown in Table 4.3-11.
| |
| Axial calculations are used to determine differential control rod worth curves (reactivity versus rod insertion) and axial power shapes during steady state and transient xenon conditions (flyspeck curve). Group constants are obtained from the three-dimensional nodal model by flux-volume weighting for each axial slice. Radial bucklings are determined by varying parameters in the buckling model while forcing the one dimensional model to reproduce the axial characteristics (axial offset, midplane power) of the three dimensional model.
| |
| Validation of the spatial codes for calculating power distributions involves the use of incore and excore detectors and is discussed in Section 4.3.2.2.6.
| |
| Based on comparison with measured data it is estimated that the accuracy of current analytical methods is:
| |
| + 0.2% for doppler defect
| |
| + 2 pcm/°F for moderator coefficient
| |
| + 50 ppm for critical boron concentration with depletion
| |
| + 3% for power distributions
| |
| + 0.2% for rod bank worth
| |
| + 4 pcm/step for differential rod worth
| |
| + 0.5 pcm/ppm for boron worth
| |
| + 0.1% for moderator defect REFERENCES
| |
| : 1. "Westinghouse Anticipated Transients Without Reactor Trip Analysis," WCAP-8330, August, 1974.
| |
| : 2. Spier, E. M., "Evaluation of Nuclear Hot Channel Factor Uncertainties," WCAP-7308-L-P-A, June 1988.
| |
| : 3. McFarlane, A. F., "Core Power Capability In Westinghouse PWRs," WCAP-7267-L (Proprietary), October 1969 and WCAP-7809 (Non-Proprietary), December 1971.
| |
| : 4. Hellman, J. M. (Ed), "Fuel Densification Experimental Results and Model for Reactor Application," WCAP-8218-P-A (Proprietary), March 1975 and WCAP-8219-A (Non-Proprietary), March 1975.
| |
| : 5. Hellman, J. M., Olson, C. A., and Yang, J. W., "Effects of Fuel Densification Power Spikes on Clad Thermal Transients," WCAP-8359, July 1974.
| |
| : 6. "Power Distribution Control of Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors," WCAP-7208 (Proprietary), September 1968 and WCAP-7811 (Non-Proprietary), December 1971.
| |
| : 7. Morita, T., et al., "Power Distribution Control and Load Following Procedures,"
| |
| 4.3-45
| |
| | |
| WBN WCAP-8385 (Proprietary), September 1974 and WCAP-8403 (Non-Proprietary),
| |
| September 1974.
| |
| : 8. McFarlane, A. F., "Power Peaking Factors," WCAP-7912-P-A (Proprietary), January 1975 and WCAP-7912-A (Non-Proprietary), January 1975.
| |
| : 9. Altomare, S. and Barry, R. F., "The TURTLE 24.0 Diffusion Depletion Code," WCAP-7213-P-A (Proprietary), February 1975 and WCAP-7758-A (Non-Proprietary), February 1975.
| |
| : 10. Cermak, J. O., et al, "Pressurized Water Reactor pH-Reactivity Effect Final Report,"
| |
| WCAP-3696-8 (EURAEC-2074), October 1968.
| |
| : 11. Beard, C. L. and Morita, T., BEACON: Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, WCAP-12472-P-A (Proprietary), August 1994; Addendum 1-A, January 2000; Addendum 2-A, April 2002; Addendum 4-A, September 2012, and WCAP-12473-A (Nonproprietary), August 1994.
| |
| : 12. Poncelet, C. G., and Christie, A. M., "Xenon-Induced Spatial Instabilities in Large PWRs," WCAP-3680-20 (EURAEC-1974), March 1968.
| |
| : 13. Skogen, F. B. and McFarlane, A. F., "Control Procedures for Xenon-Induced X-Y Instabilities in Large PWRs," WCAP-3680-21 (EURAEC-2111), February 1969.
| |
| : 14. Skogen, F. B. and McFarlane, A. F., "Xenon-Induced Spatial Instabilities In Three-Dimensions," WCAP-3680-22 (EURAEC-2116), September 1969.
| |
| : 15. Lee, J. C., "Axial Xenon Transient Tests at the Rochester Gas and Electric Reactor,"
| |
| WCAP-7964, June 1971.
| |
| : 16. Barry, R. F., and Minton, F., "The PANDA Code," WCAP-7048-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7757-A (Non-Proprietary), January 1975.
| |
| : 17. Barry, F. R., Leopard, A Spectrum Dependent Non-Spatial Depletion Code for the IBM-7094, WCAP-3269-26, September 1963.
| |
| : 18. England, T. R., "CINDER - A One-Point Depletion and Fission Product Program,"
| |
| WAPD-TM-334, August 1962.
| |
| : 19. Eggleston, F. T., "Safety Related Research and Development for Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors, Program Summaries," WCAP-8485, March 1975.
| |
| : 20. Poncelet, C. G., "LASER - A Depletion Program for Lattice Calculations Based on MUFT and THERMOS," WCAP-6073, April 1966.
| |
| : 21. Olhoeft, J. E., "The Doppler Effect for a Non-Uniform Temperature Distribution in Reactor Fuel Elements," WCAP-2048, July 1962.
| |
| 4.3-46
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 22. Nodvik, R. J., "Supplementary Report On Evaluation of Mass Spectrometric and Radiochemical Analyses of Yankee Core I Spent Fuel, Including Isotopes of elements Thorium Through Curium," WCAP-6086, August 1969.
| |
| : 23. Drake, M. K. (Ed), "Data Formats and Procedure for the ENDF/B Neutron Cross Section Library," BNL-50274, ENDF-102, Vol. I, 1970.
| |
| : 24. Suich, J. E., and Honeck, H. C., "The HAMMER System, Heterogeneous Analysis by Multigroup Methods of Exponentials and Reactors," DP-1064, January 1967.
| |
| : 25. Flatt, H. P., and Buller, D. C., "AIM-5, A Multigroup, One Dimensional Diffusion Equation Code," NAA-SR-4694, March 1960.
| |
| : 26. "Nuclear Design of Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors with Burnable Poison Rods," WCAP-7806 (Non-Proprietary), December 1971.
| |
| : 27. Camden, T. M., et al, "PALADON - Westinghouse Nodal Computer Code," WCAP-9485 (Non-proprietary) and WCAP-9486 (Proprietary), December 1978.
| |
| : 28. Nodvik, R. J., "Saxton Core II Fuel Performance Evaluation," WCAP-3385-56, Part II, "Evaluation of Mass Spectrometric and Radiochemical Analyses of Irradiated Saxton Plutonium Fuel," July 1970.
| |
| : 29. Leamer, R. D., et al, "PUO2 -UO2 Fueled Critical", WCAP-3726-1, July 1967.
| |
| : 30. Meyers, R. O., "The Analysis of Fuel Densification", Division of Systems Safety, USNRC, NUREG 0085, July 1976.
| |
| : 31. Not used.
| |
| : 32. Not used.
| |
| : 33. Deleted in initial UFSAR
| |
| : 34. Raymond, M., et al., "ARK(C) - A Spectrum-Dependent Neutron Flux, Reactivity and Fuel Depletion Program For PWR Lattice Cells," WCAP-9523, August 1979.
| |
| : 35. Beard, C. L., and Steitler, R. W., "THURTLE - Multidimensional Neutron Diffusion Theory Code," WCAP-8344, June 1974 (Westinghouse Proprietary).
| |
| : 36. Henderson, W. B., "Results of the Control Rod Worth Program," WCAP-9217, October 1977.
| |
| : 37. Miller, R. W., Pogorzelski, N. A., Vestovich, J. A., "Relaxation of Constant Axial Offset Control FQ Surveillance Technical Specification," WCAP-10216, August 1982.
| |
| 4.3-47
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 38. Liu, Y. S., et al., "ANC: A Westinghouse Advanced Nodal Code," WCAP-10965-P-A (Westinghouse Proprietary), December 1985.
| |
| : 39. Nguyen, T. Q., et al., "Qualification of the PHOENIX-P/ANC Nuclear Design System for Pressurized Water Reactor Cores," WCAP-11596, November 1987.
| |
| : 40. Not used.
| |
| : 41. Holtec International Report HI-961513, Revision 2, Evaluation Of The Spent Fuel Storage Racks For The Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, October 1996.
| |
| : 42. Holtec International Report HI-2012620, Revision 2, Evaluation of the Effect of the Use of Tritium Producing Burnable Absorber Rods (TPBARs) on Fuel Storage Requirement, July 2001.
| |
| : 43. NUREG/CR-0200, "SCALE: A Modular Code System for Performing Standardized Computer Analyses for Licensing Evaluation," (SCALE 3.1 version).
| |
| : 44. NUREG/CR-0200 (SCALE 4.3 Package), NITAWL-S: Scale System Module for Performing Resonance Shielding and Working Library Production, 1995.
| |
| : 45. NUREG/V-0200 (SCALE 4.3 Package), KENO 5a. An Improved Monte Carlo Criticality Program with Supergrouping, 1995.
| |
| : 46. CAM-009-UG, "CASMO-3: A Fuel Assembly Burnup Program - Users Manual," Revision 1, Malte Edenius, Ake Ahlin, Bengt H. Forssen, Studsvik/NFA-86/7.
| |
| : 47. AE-RF-76-4158, Studsvik Report, CASMO - A Fuel Assembly Burnup Program.
| |
| : 48. CASMO - A Fast Transport Theory Depletion Code for LWR Analysis, ANS Transactions, Vol. 26, p. 604, 1977.
| |
| : 49. CASMO-3 , A Fuel Assembly Burnup Program, Users Manual, Studsvik/NFA- 87/7, November 1986.
| |
| : 50. WCAP-10444-P-A, Addendum 2-A, "VANTAGE 5H Fuel Assembly," April, 1988
| |
| : 51. Deleted in UFSAR Amendment 4.
| |
| : 52. BAW-1484-7, M. N. Baldwin, G. S. Hoovler, R. L. Eng, F. G. Welfare, "Critical Experiments Supporting Close Proximity Water Storage of Power Reactor Fuel," July 1979.
| |
| : 53. PNL-2438, S. R. Bierman, B. M. Durst, E. D. Clayton, "Critical Separation Between Subcritical Clusters of 2.35 wt% U-235 Enriched UO2 Rods in Water With Fixed Neutron Poisons," October 1977.
| |
| 4.3-48
| |
| | |
| WBN-1
| |
| : 54. PNL-2615, S. R. Bierman, B. M. Durst, E. D. Clayton, "Critical Separation Between Subcritical Clusters of 4.29 wt% U-235 Enriched UO2 Rods in Water With Fixed Neutron Poisons," NUREG/CR-0073, May 1978.
| |
| : 55. Holtec International Report HI-91670, Spent Fuel Pool Modification For Increased Storage Capacity, January 1993.
| |
| : 56. VANTAGE+Fuel Assembly Reference Core Report, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, WCAP-12610-P-A, April 1995.
| |
| : 57. Rose, P. F., ENDF-201 ENDF/B-VI Summary Documentation, BNL-NC8-17541 [ENDF-201] 4th Edition [ENDF-B-VI], October 1999 and Supplements.
| |
| : 58. WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994 (NRC approved version with Safety Evaluation Report).
| |
| : 59. WCAP-12472-P-A Addendum 1-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, January 2000 (NRC approved version with Safety Evaluation Report).
| |
| : 60. Watts Bar Nuclear Plant, Unit 1 - Issuance of Amendment Regarding the Application to Implement Beacon Core Power Distribution and Monitoring System, Amendment 82, dated October 2009.
| |
| : 61. WCAP-12472-P-A Addendum 4-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, September, 2012 (NRC approved version with Safety Evaluation Report.)
| |
| : 62. Ouisloumen, M. et al., Qualification of the Two-Dimensional Transport Code PARAGON, WCAP-16045-P-A, August 2004.
| |
| : 63. Zhang, B. et al., Qualification of the NEXUS Nuclear Data Methodology, WCAP-16045-P-A, Addendum 1, November 2005.
| |
| 4.3-49
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
| |
| REACTOR CORE DESCRIPTION (First Cycle)
| |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 Active Core Equivalent Diameter, in 132.7 132.7 Active Fuel Height, in 143.7 143.7 Height-to-Diameter Ratio 1.09 1.09 2
| |
| Total Cross-Section Area, ft 96.06 96.06 H2O/U Molecular Ratio, lattice (Cold) 2.41 2.41 Reflector Thickness and Composition Top - Water plus Steel, in ~10 ~10 Bottom - Water plus Steel, in ~10 ~10 Side - Water plus Steel, in ~15 ~10 Fuel Assemblies Number 193 193 Rod Array 17 x 17 17 x 17 Rods per assembly 264 264 Rod Pitch, in 0.496 0.496 Overall Transverse Dimensions, in 8.426 x 8.426 8.426 x 8.426 Fuel Weight (as UO2), lb 222,645 222,645 Zircaloy Weight, lb 53,000 53,000 Number of Grids per Assembly 8 8 Composition of Grids Inconel-718, ZIRLO Inconel-718, ZIRLO Weight of Grids, lb 3100 3100 Number of Guide Thimbles per Assembly 24 24 Composition of Guide Thimbles ZIRLO ZIRLO Diameter of Guide Thimbles (upper part), in 0.442 I.D. x 0.474 O.D. 0.442 I.D. x 0.482 O.D.
| |
| Diameter of Guide Thimbles (lower part), in 0.397 I.D. x 0.430 O.D. 0.397 I.D. x 0.439 O.D.
| |
| Diameter of Instrument Guide Thimbles, in 0.440 I.D. x 0.476 O.D. 0.482 I.D. x 0.422 O.D.
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
| |
| REACTOR CORE DESCRIPTION (First Cycle)
| |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 Fuel Rods Number 50,952 50,952 Outside Diameter, in 0.374 0.374 Diameter Gap, in 0.0065 0.0065 Clad Thickness 0.0225 0.0225 Clad Material ZIRLO ZIRLO Fuel Pellets Material UO2 Sintered UO2 Sintered Density (percent of Theoretical) 94.5 95 Fuel Enrichments, wt. %
| |
| Region 1 2.10 2.10 Region 2 2.60 2.60 Region 3 3.10 3.10 Diameter, in 0.3225 0.3225 Length, in 0.530 0.530 Mass of UO2 per Foot of Fuel Rod, lb/ft 0.364 0.364 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies Neutron Absorber Ag-In-Cd B4C Ag-In-Cd Composition 80%, 15%, 5% 100% 80%, 15%, 5%
| |
| Diameter, in 0.301 0.294 0.301 3
| |
| Density, lb/in 0.367 0.0637 0.367 0.0637 Cladding Material Type 304, Cold Worked Type 304, Cold Worked Stainless Steel 0.0385 Clad Thickness, in 0.0385 0.0385 Number of Clusters 57 Full Length 57 24 Number of Absorber Rods per Cluster 24 Full Length Assembly Weight 93 (dry) nominal, lb 93
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
| |
| REACTOR CORE DESCRIPTION (First Cycle)
| |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 Burnable Poison Rods (First Core)
| |
| Number 1708 --
| |
| Material Borosilicate Glass AI2O3 - B4C Outside Diameter, in 0.381 0.381 Inner Tube, O.D., in 0.181 0.267 Clad Material Stainless Steel Zircaloy Inner Tube Material Stainless Steel Zircaloy Boron Loading (wt. % B2O3 in glass rod) 12.5 6.03 Weight of Boron-10 per foot of rod, lb/ft 0.000419 Initial Reactivity Worth, % ~8.59 (hot),
| |
| ~6.19 (cold)
| |
| Excess Reactivity Maximum Fuel Assembly k (Cold, Clean, Unborated Water) 1.40 1.39 Maximum Core Reactivity (Cold, Zero Power, Beginning of Cycle, Zero Soluble Boron) 1.213 1.186
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
| |
| NUCLEAR DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 1 (First Cycle)
| |
| Core Average Linear Power, kW/ft, including densification effects 5.45 Total Heat Flux Hot Channel Factor, FQ 2.40 Nuclear Enthalpy Rise Hot Channel Factor, FNH 1.55 Reactivity Coefficients+ Design Limits Best Estimates Doppler-only Power, Lower Curve -19.4 to -12.6 -16.5 to -9.3 Coefficients, pcm/% power++
| |
| (See Figure 15.1-5), Upper Curve -10.2 to -6.7 -15.3 to -8.4 Doppler Temperature coefficient - 2.9 to -1.0 -2.1 to -1.4 pcm/°F++
| |
| Moderator Temperature Coefficient 0 to -40 0.0 to -33.6 pcm/°F++
| |
| Boron Coefficient, pcm/ppm++ -16.0 to -6.0 -12.2 to -8.5 Rodded Moderator Density Coefficient, < 0.43 x 105 < 0.34 x 105 pcm/gm/cc++
| |
| +Note: Uncertainties are given in Section 4.3.3.3
| |
| ++Note: 1 pcm = (percent mille) 10-5 , where is calculated from two state point values of keff by 1n(K2/K1).
| |
| Delayed Neutron Fraction Beff BOL, (EOL) 0.007039, (0.005056)
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
| |
| NUCLEAR DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 1 (Cont'd)
| |
| (First Cycle)
| |
| Control Rod Worths Rod Requirements See Table 4.3-3 Maximum Bank Worth, pcm < 2000 Maximum Ejected Rod Worth See Chapter 15 Bank Worth, pcm++ HZP, BOL, Xe free HZP, EOL Eq, Xe Bank D 1417 1404 Bank C 1187 1204 Bank B 1573 1314 Bank A 1156 1128 Radial Factor (BOL to EOL)
| |
| Unrodded 1.38 to 1.23 D bank 1.55 to 1.36 Boron Concentrations (Beginning of Cycle)
| |
| Zero ower, keff = 0.99, Cold, Rod Cluster 1407 Control Assemblies Out Zero Power, keff = 0.99, Hot, Rod Cluster 1416 Control Assemblies Out Design Basis Refueling Boron Concentration 2000 Zero Power, keff < 0.95, Cold, Rod Cluster 1136 Control Assemblies In Zero Power, keff = 1.00, Hot, Rod Cluster 1314 Control Assemblies Out Full Power, No xenon, keff = 1.0, Hot, Rod 1186 Cluster Control Assemblies Out Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon, keff = 1.0, Hot 869 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies Out Reduction with Fuel Burnup See Figure 4.3-3 First Cycle, ppm/GWD/MTU**
| |
| ** Gigawatt Day (GWD) = 1000 Megawatt Day (1000 MWD).
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
| |
| NUCLEAR DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 2 (First Cycle)
| |
| Core Average Linear Power, kW/ft, including densification effects 5.45 Total Heat Flux Hot Channel Factor, FQ 2.50 Nuclear Enthalpy Rise Hot Channel Factor, FNH 1.65 Reactivity Coefficients+/- Design Limits Best Estimates Doppler-only Power, Lower Curve -19.4 to -12.6 -12.2 to -8.1 Coefficients, pcm/% power++
| |
| (See Figure 15.1-5), Upper Curve -9.55 to -6.05 -10.3 to -7.5 Doppler Temperature coefficient - 2.9 to -1.0 -2.2 to -1.5 pcm/°F++
| |
| Moderator Temperature Coefficient 0 to -40 0.0 to -32.6 pcm/°F++
| |
| Boron Coefficient, pcm/ppm++ -16.0 to -6.0 -7.9 to -8.8 Rodded Moderator Density Coefficient, < 0.43 x 105 < 0.34 x 105 pcm/gm/cc++
| |
| +Note: Uncertainties are given in Section 4.3.3.3
| |
| ++Note: 1 pcm = (percent mille) 10-5 , where is calculated from two state point values of keff by 1n(K2/K1).
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
| |
| NUCLEAR DESIGN PARAMETERS UNIT 2 (Cont'd)
| |
| (First Cycle)
| |
| Control Rod Worths Rod Requirements See Table 4.3-3 Maximum Bank Worth, pcm < 2000 Maximum Ejected Rod Worth See Chapter 15 Bank Worth, pcm++ HZP, BOL, Xe free HZP, EOL Eq, Xe Bank D 1339 1267 Bank C 1201 1110 Bank B 1362 1213 Bank A 1130 1042 Radial Factor (BOL to EOL)
| |
| Unrodded 1.37 to 1.20 D bank 1.37 to 1.21 Boron Concentrations (Beginning of Cycle)
| |
| Zero Power, keff = 0.99, Cold, Rod Cluster 1213 Control Assemblies Out Zero Power, keff = 0.99, Hot, Rod Cluster 1130 Control Assemblies Out Design Basis Refueling Boron Concentration 2000 Zero Power, keff < 0.95, Cold, Rod Cluster 972 Control Assemblies In Zero Power, keff = 1.00, Hot, Rod Cluster 1033 Control Assemblies Out Full Power, No xenon, keff = 1.0, Hot, Rod 875 Cluster Control Assemblies Out Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon, keff = 1.0, Hot 559 Rod Cluster Control Assemblies Out Reduction with Fuel Burnup See Figure 4.3-3 First Cycle, ppm/GWD/MTU**
| |
| ** Gigawatt Day (GWD) = 1000 Megawatt Day (1000 MWD).
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-3 REACTIVITY REQUIREMENTS FOR ROD CLUSTER CONTROL ASSEMBLIES - UNIT 1 Beginning of Reactivity Effects, Life End of Life percent (first Cycle) (first Cycle)
| |
| : 1. Control requirements Fuel temperature (Doppler), % 1.23 1.13 Moderator temperature*, % 0.44 1.05 Redistribution, % 0.50 0.95 Rod Insertion Allowance, % 1.40 0.60 Cooldown to 537°F 0.54 0.54
| |
| : 2. Total Control, % 4.11 4.27
| |
| : 3. Estimated Rod Cluster Control Assembly Worth (57 Rods)
| |
| : a. All full length assemblies inserted, % 9.97 9.31
| |
| : b. All but one (highest worth) assembly inserted, % 8.36 8.05
| |
| : 4. Estimated Rod Cluster Control Assembly credit with 10 percent adjustment to accommodate uncertainties (3b - 10 percent), % 7.52 7.24
| |
| : 5. Shutdown margin available (4-2), % 3.41 2.98
| |
| * Includes void effects
| |
| ** The design basis minimum shutdown is 1.6%
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-3 REACTIVITY REQUIREMENTS FOR ROD CLUSTER CONTROL ASSEMBLIES - UNIT 2 Reactivity Effects, Beginning of Life End of Life End of Life percent (First Cycle) (First Cycle) (Equilibrium Cycle)
| |
| : 1. Control requirements Total Power Defect, % 0.98 2.74 3.42 Cooldown to 547°F 0.21 0.28 0.54 Void, % 0.05 0.05 0.05
| |
| : 2. Total Control, % 1.24 3.07 4.01
| |
| : 3. Estimated Rod Cluster Control Assembly Worth (57 Rods)
| |
| : a. All full length assemblies inserted (including RIA),
| |
| % 6.64 7.94 7.80
| |
| : b. All but one (highest worth) assembly inserted, % 5.14 6.68 6.60
| |
| : 4. Estimated Rod Cluster Control Assembly credit with 10 percent adjustment to accommodate uncertainties (3b -
| |
| 10 percent), % 4.62 6.01 5.94
| |
| : 5. Shutdown margin available (4-2), % 3.38 2.94 1.93**
| |
| ** The design basis minimum shutdown is 1.6%
| |
| | |
| TABLE 4.3-4 DELETED
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-5 AXIAL STABILITY INDEX FOR A PRESSURIZED WATER REACTOR CORE WITH A 12 FOOT ACTIVE CORE HEIGHT Burnup CB Stability Index (hr-1)
| |
| (MWD/T) FZ (ppm) Exp Calc 1550 1.34 1065 -0.041 -0.032 7700 1.27 700 -0.014 -0.006 Difference: +0.027 +0.026
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-6 TYPICAL NEUTRON FLUX LEVELS (n/cm2-sec) AT FULL POWER 0.111 MeV < E 0.3 eV < E E > 1.0 MeV < 1.0 MeV < 0.111 MeV E < 0.3 eV Core Center 9.98 x 1013 1.11 x 1014 2.17 x 1014 5.36 x 1013 Core Outer Radius at Mid-Height 4.24 x 1013 4.85 x 1013 9.52 x 1013 2.21 x 1013 13 Core Top, on Axis 2.62 x 10 2.13 x 1013 1.31 x 1014 4.35 x 1013 Core Bottom, on Axis 2.70 x 1013 2.25 x 1013 1.33 x 1014 4.74 x 1013 Pressure Vessel Inner Diameter Azimuthal Peak, Core Mid-Height 2.08 x 1010 2.83 x 1010 6.18 x 1010 1.20 x 1011
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-7 COMPARISON OF MEASURED AND CALCULATED DOPPLER DEFECTS Plant Fuel Type Core Burnup Measured (pcm) Calculated (MWD/MTU) (pcm) 1 Air-filled 1800 1700 1710 2 Air-filled 7700 1300 1440 3 Air and 8460 1200 1210 helium-filled 5
| |
| *pcm = 10 x 1n (k2/k1)
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-8 SAXTON CORE II ISOTOPICS ROD MY, AXIAL ZONE 6 LEOPARD Atom Ratio Measured* 2F Precision (%) Calculation
| |
| -5 U-234/U 4.65 x 10 +29 4.60 x 10-5 U-235/U 5.74 x 10-3 +0.9 5.73 x 10-3
| |
| -4 -4 U-236/U 3.55 x 10 +5.6 3.74 x 10 U-238/U 0.99386 +0.01 0.99385
| |
| -3 Pu-238/Pu 1.32 x 10 +2.3 1.222 x 10-3 Pu-239/Pu 0.73971 +0.03 0.74497 Pu-240/Pu 0.19302 + 0.2 0.19102
| |
| -2 Pu-241/Pu 6.014 x 10 + 0.3 5.74 x 10-2
| |
| -3 -3 Pu-242/Pu 5.81 x 10 + 0.9 5.38 x 10
| |
| -2 -2 Pu/U** 5.938 x 10 +0.7 5.970 x 10
| |
| -4 -2 Np-237/U-238 1.14 x 10 +15 0.86 x 10
| |
| -2 -2 Am-241/Pu-239 1.23 x 10 +15 1.08 x 10
| |
| -4 -4 Cm-242/Pu-239 1.05 x 10 +10 1.11 x 10
| |
| -4 -4 Cm-244/Pu-239 1.09 x 10 +20 0.98 x 10
| |
| * Reported in Reference [28]
| |
| **Weight Ratio
| |
| | |
| WBN Table 4.3-9 CRITICAL BORON CONCENTRATIONS, HZP, BOL Plant Type Measured (ppm) Calculated (ppm) 2-Loop, 121 Assemblies 1583 1589 10 foot core 2-Loop, 121 Assemblies 1625 1624 12 foot core 2-Loop, 121 Assemblies 1517 1517 12 foot core 3-Loop, 157 Assemblies 1169 1161 12 foot core 3-Loop, 157 Assemblies 1344 1319 12 foot core 4-Loop, 193 Assemblies 1370 1355 12 foot core 4-Loop, 193 Assemblies 1321 1306 12 foot core
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-10 COMPARISON OF MEASURED AND CALCULATED ROD WORTH 2-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies, 10 foot core Measured (pcm) Calculated (pcm)
| |
| Group B 1885 1893 Group A 1530 1649 Shutdown Group 3050 2917 ESADA Critical*, 0.69" Pitch, 240 2 wt.% PuO2, 8% Pu ,
| |
| 9 Control Rods 6.21" rod separation 2250 2250 2.07" rod separation 4220 4160 1.38" rod separation 4100 4019
| |
| * Reported in Reference [26].
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-11 COMPARISON OF MEASURED AND CALCULATED MODERATOR COEFFICIENTS AT HZP, BOL Plant Type/ Measured "iso* Calculated "iso*
| |
| Control Bank Configuration (pcm/°F) (pcm/°F) 3-Loop, 157 Assemblies 12 foot core D at 160 steps -0.50 -0.05 D in, C at 190 steps -3.01 -2.75 D in, C at 28 steps -7.67 -7.02 B, C, and D in -5.16 -4.45 2-Loop, 121 Assemblies, 12 foot core D at 180 steps +0.85 +1.02 D in, C at 180 steps -2.40 -1.90 C and D in, B at 165 steps -4.40 -5.58 B, C, and D in, A at 174 steps -8.70 -8.12 4-Loop, 193 Assemblies 12 foot core ARO -0.52 -1.2 D in -4.35 -5.7 D and C in -8.59 -10.0 D, C and B in -10.14 -10.55 D, C, B and A in -14.63 -14.45
| |
| * Isothermal coefficients, which include the Doppler effect in the fuel; k2 iso = 105 ln / T° F k1
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.3-12 WATTS BAR SPENT FUEL STORAGE RACK DESIGN BASIS FUEL ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS Fuel Rod Data Outside diameter, in. 0.374 Cladding thickness, in. 0.0225 Cladding inside diameter, in. 0.329 Cladding material Zr-4 Pellet density, %T. D. 97.0 Stack density, g UO2 /cc 10.631 Pellet diameter, in. 0.3225 Maximum enrichment, wt% U-235 4.95 +/- 0.05 Fuel Assembly Data Fuel rod array 17 x 17 Number of fuel rods 264 Fuel rod pitch, in. 0.496 Number of control rod guide and instrument thimbles 25 Thimble O.D., in. (nominal) 0.474 Thimble I.D., in. (nominal) 0.442
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Fuel Loading Arrangement, Cycle 1 - Unit 1 FIGURE 4.3-1
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Typical Production and Consumption of Higher Isotopes FIGURE 4.3-2
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Typical Boron Concentration Versus First Cycle Burnup With and Without Burnable Absorber Rods FIGURE 4.3-3
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Power Density Distribution at Beginning of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Unit 2 Power, No Xenon for Cycle 1 FIGURE 4.3-6
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Power Density Distribution at Beginning of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon Unit 2 for Cycle 1 FIGURE 4.3-7
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Power Density Distribution at Beginning of Life, Bank D 17% Inserted, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon Unit 2 for Cycle 1 FIGURE 4.3-8
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Power Density Distribution at Middle of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon Unit 2 for Cycle 1 FIGURE 4.3-9
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Power Density Distribution at End of Life, Unrodded Core, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon Unit 2 for Cycle 1 FIGURE 4.3-10
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Power Density Distribution at End of Life, Bank D 17%, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon Unit 2 for Cycle 1 FIGURE 4.3-11
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Rodwise Power Distribution in a Typical Assembly Near Beginning of Life, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon, Unit 2 Unrodded Core FIGURE 4.3-12
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Rodwise Power Distribution in a Typical Assembly Near End of Life, Hot Full Power, Equilibrium Xenon, Unit 2 Unrodded Core FIGURE 4.3-13
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Typical Axial Power Shapes Occurring at Beginning of Life FIGURE 4.3-14
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Typical Axial Power Shapes Occurring at Middle of Life FIGURE 4.3-15
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Typical Axial Power Shapes Occurring at End of Life FIGURE 4.3-16
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison of Assembly Axial Power distribution With Core Average Axial Distribution, Bank D Slightly inserted, Typical FIGURE 4.3-17
| |
| | |
| Figure 4.3-18 Through 4.3-20 Deleted
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 1.2 1.1 1
| |
| 0.9 0.8 Normalized FQ X Power Normalized FQ X Power 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 Core Core Height Height K(Z)K(Z) Core Height K(Z) 0.000 0.000 1.000 1.000 0.3 0.000 1.000 6.000 6.000 1.000 1.000 6.000 1.000 12.000 12.000 0.925 0.925 12.000 1.000 0.2 0.1 0
| |
| 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Core Height (Feet) Core Height (Feet)
| |
| Note: K(Z) = FQ X Power Note: K(Z) = FQ X Power WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Normalized Maximum FQ X Power Versus Axial Height During Normal Operation FIGURE 4.3-21
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Peak Linear Power During Control Rod Malfunction Overpower Transients FIGURE 4.3-22
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Peak Linear Power During Boration/Dilution Overpower Transients (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-23
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison Between Calculated and Measured Relative Fuel Assembly Power Distribution (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-24
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 Relative Power P(z) Prediction 1.4 Measurement 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY 0.2 ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison Between 0 Calculated and Measured 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 Relative Fuel Assembly Power Bottom Relative Core Height Top Distribution (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-25
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Measured Values of FQ For Full Power Rod Configurations (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-26
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Doppler Temperature Coefficient at BOL and EOL Cycle 1 (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-27
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Doppler - Only Power Coefficient - BOL and EOL Cycle 1 (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-28
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Doppler - Only Power Defect -
| |
| BOL, EOL, Cycle 1 (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-29
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Moderator Temperature Coefficient, BOL, Cycle 1 No Rods (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-30
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Moderator Temperature Coefficient, EOL, Cycle 1 (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-31
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Moderator Temperature Coefficient as a Function of Boron Concentration - BOL Cycle 1, No Rods (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-32
| |
| | |
| Unit 1 Unit 2 MTC (PCM/°F) MTC (PCM/°F)
| |
| Cycle Burnup (GWD/MTU) Cycle Burnup (GWD/MTU)
| |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Moderator Temperature Coefficient During Cycle 1 at HFP, ARO Equilibrium Xenon, Critical Boron Condition, Typical FIGURE 4.3-33
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Total Power Coefficient - BOL, EOL, Cycle 1 (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-34
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Total Power Defect - BOL, EOL, Cycle 1 (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-35
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Rod Cluster Control Assembly Pattern FIGURE 4.3-36
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Accidental Simultaneous Withdrawal of Two Control Banks EOL, HZP, Banks D and B Moving in the Same Plane (Typical)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-37
| |
| | |
| FIGURE 4.3-38 DELETED
| |
| | |
| FIGURE 4.3-39 DELETED
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Axial Offset Versus Time PWR Core With a 12-Ft Height and 121 Assemblies FIGURE 4.3-40
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT XY Xenon Test Thermocouple Response Quadrant Tilt Difference Versus Time FIGURE 4.3-41
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Calculated and Measured Doppler Defect and Coefficients at BOL, Two-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies, 12-Foot Core FIGURE 4.3-42
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison of Calculated and Measured Boron Concentration for 2-Loop Plant, 121 Assemblies, 12-Foot Core FIGURE 4.3-43
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison of Calculated and Measured CB 2-Loop With 121 Assemblies, 12-Foot Core FIGURE 4.3-44
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison of Calculated and Measured CB in 3-Loop Plant, 157 Assemblies, 12-Foot Core FIGURE 4.3-45
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Minimum Required Burnup for Unrestricted Storage of Spent Fuel of Various Initial Enrichments FIGURE 4.3-46
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Minimum Required Burnup for 2 x 2 Checkerboard Arrangement of 2 Spent Fuel Assemblies with 2 New fuel Assemblies of 5% Enrichment (Maximum)
| |
| FIGURE 4.3-47
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4 THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC DESIGN 4.4.1 Design Bases The overall objective of the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor core is to provide adequate heat transfer which is compatible with the heat generation distribution in the core such that heat removal by the Reactor Coolant System or the Emergency Core Cooling System (when applicable) assures that the following performance and safety criteria requirements are met:
| |
| : 1. Fuel damage (defined as penetration of the fission product barrier, i.e., the fuel rod clad) is not expected during normal operation and operational transients (Condition I) or any transient conditions arising from faults of moderate frequency (Condition II). It is not possible however, to preclude a very small number of rod failures. These will be within the capability of the plant cleanup system and are consistent with the plant design bases.
| |
| : 2. The reactor can be brought to a safe state following a Condition III event with only a small fraction of fuel rods damaged (see above definition) although sufficient fuel damage might occur to preclude resumption of operation without considerable outage time.
| |
| : 3. The reactor can be brought to a safe state and the core can be kept subcritical with acceptable heat transfer geometry following transients arising from Condition IV events.
| |
| In order to satisfy the above criteria, the following design bases have been established for the thermal and hydraulic design of the reactor core.
| |
| 4.4.1.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Design Basis Basis There will be at least a 95% probability that departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) will not occur on the limiting fuel rods during normal operation and operational transients and any transient conditions arising from faults of moderate frequency (Condition I and II events) at a 95%
| |
| confidence level.
| |
| 4.4-1
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 Discussion The design method employed to meet the DNB design basis is the revised thermal design procedure (RTDP), Reference [98]. With RTDP methodology, uncertainties in plant operating parameters nuclear thermal parameters, fuel fabrication parameter, computer codes, and DNB correlation predictions are considered statistically to obtain DNB uncertainty factors. Based on the DNB uncertainty factors, RTDP design limit DNBR values are determined such that there is at least a 95% probability at a 95% confidence level that DNB will not occur on the most limiting fuel rod during normal operation and operational transients and during transient conditions arising from faults of moderate frequency (Condition I and II events as defined in ANSI N18.2).
| |
| Since the parameter uncertainties are considered in determining the RTDP design limit DNBR values, the plant safety analyses are performed using input parameters at their nominal values.
| |
| The RTDP design limit DNBR values are 1.25/1.24 (typical cell/thimble cell) with WRB-1 correlation for V+/P+ or V5H and 1.23 for both typical and thimble cells with WRB-2M correlation for RFA-2.
| |
| The RTDP design limit DNBR value for the ABB-NV correlation is 1.18 for both typical and thimble cells below the mixing vane region of the RFA-2 fuel. ABB-V is used in Watts Bar Unit 1.
| |
| The design limit DNBR values are used as a basis for the Technical Specifications and for consideration of the applicability as defined in 10 CFR 50.59.
| |
| To maintain DNBR margin to offset DNB penalties such as those due to fuel rod bow (paragraph 4.4.2.3.5), the safety analyses were performed to DNBR limits higher than the design limit DNBR values. The difference between the design limit DNBRs and the safety analysis limit DNBRs results in available DNBR margin. The net DNBR margin, after consideration of all penalties, is available for operating and design flexibility. The DNBR limits are listed in Table 4.4-1.
| |
| The standard thermal design procedure (STDP) is used for those analyses where RTDP is not applicable. In the STDP method, the parameters used in analysis are treated in a conservative way from a DNBR standpoint. The parameter uncertainties are applied directly to the plant safety analyses input values to give the lowest minimum DNBR. The DNBR limit for STDP is the appropriate DNB correlation limit increased by sufficient margin to offset the applicable DNBR penalties.
| |
| By preventing DNB, adequate heat transfer is assured between the fuel clad and the reactor coolant, thereby preventing clad damage as a result of inadequate cooling. Maximum fuel rod surface temperature is not a design basis as it will be within a few degrees of coolant temperature during operation in the nucleate boiling region. Limits provided by the nuclear control and protection systems are such that this design basis will be met for transients associated with Condition II events, including overpower transients. There is an additional large DNBR margin at rated power operation and during normal operating transients.
| |
| 4.4-2
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.1.2 Fuel Temperature Design Basis Basis During modes of operation associated with Condition I and Condition II events, the maximum fuel temperature shall be less than the melting temperature of UO2. The UO2 melting temperature for at least 95% of the peak kW/ft fuel rods will not be exceeded at the 95%
| |
| confidence level. The melting temperature of UO2 is taken as 5080°F[1] unirradiated and decreasing 58°F per 10,000 MWD/MTU. By precluding UO2 melting, the fuel geometry is preserved and possible adverse effects of molten UO2 on the cladding are eliminated. To preclude center melting and as a basis for overpower protection system setpoints, a calculated centerline fuel temperature of 4700°F has been selected as the overpower limit. This provides sufficient margin for uncertainties in the thermal evaluations as described in Section 4.4.2.10.1.
| |
| Discussion Fuel rod thermal evaluations are performed at rated power, maximum overpower and during transients at various burnups. These analyses assure that these design bases as well as the fuel integrity design bases given in Section 4.2 are met. They also provide input for the evaluation of Condition III and IV faults given in Chapter 15.
| |
| 4.4.1.3 Core Flow Design Basis Basis A minimum of 90.4% of the thermal flow rate will pass through the fuel rod region of the core and be effective for fuel rod cooling. Coolant flow through the thimble tubes as well as the leakage from the core barrel-baffle region into the core is not considered effective for heat removal.
| |
| Discussion Core cooling evaluations are based on the thermal flow rate (minimum flow) entering the reactor vessel. A maximum of 9.6% of this value is allotted as bypass flow. This includes guide thimble cooling flow, head cooling flow, baffle leakage, and leakage to the vessel outlet nozzle.
| |
| 4.4.1.4 Hydrodynamic Stability Design Bases Basis Modes of operation associated with Condition I and II events shall not lead to hydrodynamic instability as defined in Section 4.4.3.5.
| |
| 4.4-3
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.1.5 Other Considerations The above design bases together with the fuel clad and fuel assembly design bases given in Section 4.2.1.1 are sufficiently comprehensive so additional limits are not required.
| |
| Fuel rod diametral gap characteristics, moderator-coolant flow velocity and distribution, and moderator void are not inherently limiting. Each of these parameters is incorporated into the thermal and hydraulic models used to ensure the above mentioned design criteria are met. For instance, the fuel rod diametral gap characteristics change with time (see Section 4.2.1.3.1) and the fuel rod integrity is evaluated on that basis. The effect of the moderator flow velocity and distribution (see Section 4.4.2.3) and moderator void distribution (see Section 4.4.2.5) are included in the core thermal evaluation and thus affect the design bases.
| |
| Meeting the fuel clad integrity criteria covers possible effects of clad temperature limitations. As noted in Section 4.2.1.3.1, the fuel rod conditions change with time. A single clad temperature limit for Condition 1 or Condition II events is not appropriate since of necessity it would be overly conservative. A clad temperature limit is applied to the loss of coolant accident (Section 15.4.1), control rod ejection accident[2] and locked rotor accident.[3]
| |
| 4.4.2 Description 4.4.2.1 Summary Comparison The thermal hydraulic design parameters are presented in Table 4.4-1 for all coolant loops in service. The reactor is designed to meet the DNB design basis as well as no fuel centerline melting during normal operation, operational transients and faults of moderate frequency.
| |
| 4.4.2.2 Fuel and Cladding Temperatures Consistent with the thermal-hydraulic design bases described in Section 4.4.1, the following discussion pertains mainly to fuel pellet temperature evaluation. A discussion of fuel clad integrity is presented in Section 4.2.1.3.1.
| |
| The thermal-hydraulic design assures that the maximum fuel temperature is below the melting point of UO2 (melting point of 5080°F [1] unirradiated and decreasing by 58° F per 10,000 MWD
| |
| /MTU). To preclude center melting and as a basis for overpower protection system setpoints, a calculated centerline fuel temperature of 4700°F has been selected as the overpower limit.
| |
| 4.4-4
| |
| | |
| WBN This provides sufficient margin for uncertainties in the thermal evaluations as described in Section 4.4.2.10.1. The temperature distribution within the fuel pellet is predominantly a function of the local power density and the UO2 thermal conductivity. However, the computation of radial fuel temperature distributions combine crud, oxide, clad gap and pellet conductances.
| |
| The factors which influence these conductances, such as gap size (or contact pressure),
| |
| internal gas pressure, gas composition, pellet density, and radial power distribution within the pellet, etc., have been combined into a semiempirical thermal model (see Section 4.2.1.3.1) which includes the model modifications for time-dependent fuel densification given in Reference
| |
| [93]. This thermal model enables the determination of these factors and their net effects on temperature profiles. The temperature predictions have been compared to in-pile fuel temperature measurements[7 - 13] and [93] and melt radius data[14,15] with good results.
| |
| Fuel rod thermal evaluations (fuel centerline, average and surface temperatures) are performed at several times during the fuel rod lifetime (with consideration of time dependent densification) to determine the maximum fuel temperatures.
| |
| The maximum pellet temperatures at the hot spot during full power steady state and at the peak linear power for determination of protection setpoints are shown in Table 4.4-1. The principal factors which are employed in the determination of the fuel temperature are discussed below.
| |
| 4.4.2.2.1 UO2 Thermal Conductivity The thermal conductivity of uranium dioxide was evaluated from data reported in References
| |
| [16] through [28].
| |
| At the higher temperatures, thermal conductivity is best obtained by utilizing the integral conductivity to melt, which can be determined with more certainty.
| |
| From an examination of the data it has been concluded that the best estimate for the value of t 2800 C t 0 C Kdt is 93 watts/cm. This conclusion is based on the integral values reported by Gyllander,[28] Lyons, et al.,[29] Coplin, et al.,[30] Duncan,[14] Bain,[31] and Stora.[32]
| |
| The design curve for the thermal conductivity is shown in Figure 4.4-1. The section of the curve at temperatures between O°C and 1300°C is in excellent agreement with the recommendation of the IAEA panel.[33] The section of the curve above 1300°C is derived for an integral value of 93 watts/cm.[14,28,32]
| |
| 4.4-5
| |
| | |
| WBN Thermal conductivity for UO2 at 95% theoretical density can be represented best by the following equation:
| |
| 1 k 8.775x10 13 T 3 (4.4-1) 11.8 0.0238T where:
| |
| K = watts/cm-°C T = °C 4.4.2.2.2 Radial Power Distribution in UO2 Fuel Rods An accurate description of the radial power distribution as a function of burnup is needed for determining the power level for incipient fuel melting and other important performance parameters such as pellet thermal expansion, fuel swelling and fission gas release rates.
| |
| This information on radial power distributions in UO2 fuel rods is determined with the neutron transport theory code, LASER. The LASER Code has been validated by comparing the code predictions on radial burnup and isotopic distributions with measured radial microdrill data.[34,35] A
| |
| 'radial power depression factor', f, is determined using radial power distributions predicted by LASER. The factor, f, enters into the determination of the pellet center line temperature, Tc, relative to the pellet surface temperature, Ts, through the expression:
| |
| Tc q f k(T) dT =
| |
| 4 (4.4-2)
| |
| Ts where:
| |
| K(T) = the thermal conductivity for UO2 with a uniform density distribution q' = the linear power generation rate.
| |
| 4.4.2.2.3 Gap Conductance The temperature drop across the pellet-clad gap is a function of the gap size and the thermal conductivity of the gas in the gap. The gap conductance model is selected such that when combined with the UO2 thermal conductivity model, the calculated fuel centerline temperatures reflect the in-pile temperature measurements. A discussion of the gap conductance model is presented in References [93] and [107].
| |
| 4.4-6
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.2.2.4 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients The fuel rod surface heat transfer coefficients during subcooled forced convection and nucleate boiling are presented in Section 4.4.2.8.1.
| |
| 4.4.2.2.5 Fuel Clad Temperatures The outer surface of the fuel rod at the hot spot operates at a temperature of approximately 660°F for steady state operation at rated power throughout core life due to the onset of nucleate boiling. Initially (beginning-of-life), this temperature is that of the clad metal outer surface.
| |
| During operation over the life of the core, the buildup of oxides and crud on the fuel rod surface causes the clad surface temperature to increase. Allowance is made in the fuel center melt evaluation for this temperature rise. Since the thermal-hydraulic design basis limits DNB, adequate-heat transfer is provided between the fuel clad and the reactor coolant so that the core thermal output is not limited by considerations of clad temperature.
| |
| 4.4.2.2.6 Treatment of Peaking Factors The total heat flux hot channel factor, FQ, is defined by the ratio of the maximum to core average heat flux and is presented in Table 4.3-2 and discussed in Section 4.3.2.2.5.
| |
| This results in a peak local power of 5.52 kW/ft x FQ (Unit 1) and 5.45 kW/ft X FQ (Unit 2) at full-power conditions. As described in Section 4.3.2.2.5, the peak linear power for determination of protection setpoints is 22.4 kW/ft. The center line temperature at this kW/ft must be below the UO2 melt temperature over the lifetime of the rod, including allowances for uncertainties.
| |
| The fuel temperature design basis is discussed in Subsection 4.4.1.2 and results in a maximum allowable calculated centerline temperature of 4700 °F. The peak linear power for prevention of centerline melt is > 22.4 kW/ft. The centerline temperature at the peak linear power resulting from overpower transients/overpower errors (assuming a maximum overpower of 121%) is below that required to produce melting. Fuel centerline temperature at rated (100%) power and at the peak linear power for the determination of protection setpoints are presented in Table 4.4-1.
| |
| 4.4.2.3 Critical Heat Flux Ratio or Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio and Mixing Technology The minimum DNBRs for the rated power, design overpower and anticipated transient conditions are given in Table 4.4-1. The minimum DNBR in the limiting flow channel will be downstream of the peak heat flux location (hot spot) due to the increased down stream enthalpy rise.
| |
| DNBRs are calculated by using the correlation and definitions described in the following Sections 4.4.2.3.1 and 4.4.2.3.2. The VIPRE-01 computer code (discussed in Section 4.4.3.4.1) is used to determine the flow distribution in the core and the local conditions in the hot channel for use in the DNB correlation. The use of hot channel factors is discussed in Section 4.4.3.2.1 (nuclear hot channel factors) and in Section 4.4.2.3.4 (engineering hot channel factors).
| |
| 4.4-7
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.2.3.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Technology Early experimental studies of DNB were conducted with fluid flowing inside single heated tubes or channels and with single annulus configurations with one or both walls heated. The results of the experiments were analyzed using many different physical models for describing the DNB phenomenon, but all resultant correlations are highly empirical in nature. The evolution of these correlations is given by Tong[38,39] including the W-3 correlation which is in wide use in the PWR industry.
| |
| As testing methods progressed to the use of rod bundles, instead of single channels, it became apparent that the bundle average flow conditions cannot be used in DNB correlations. As outlined by Tong[40] test results showed that correlations based on average conditions were not accurate predictors of DNB heat flux. This indicated that a knowledge of the local subchannel conditions within the bundle is necessary.
| |
| In order to determine the local subchannel conditions, the THINC[41] and VIPRE-01[99] computer codes were developed. In the THINC or VIPRE-01 code, a rod bundle is considered to be an array of subchannels each of which includes the flow area formed by four adjacent rods. The subchannels are also divided into axial steps such that each may be treated as a control volume. By solving simultaneously the mass, energy, and momentum equations, the local fluid conditions in each control volume are calculated. The W-3 correlation, developed from single channel data, can be applied to rod bundles by using the subchannel local fluid conditions calculated by the THINC or VIPRE-01 code.
| |
| It was shown by Tong[40] that the above approach yielded conservative predictions particularly in rod bundles with mixing vane grid spacers.
| |
| The WRB-1 correlation [91] was developed based exclusively on the large bank of mixing vane grid rod bundle CHF data (over 1100 points) that Westinghouse has collected. The WRB-1 correlation, based on local fluid conditions, represents the rod bundle data with better accuracy over a wide range of variables than the previous correlation used in design. This correlation accounts directly for both typical and thimble cold wall cell effects, uniform and nonuniform heat flux profiles, and variations in rod heated length and in grid spacing.
| |
| The applicable range of parameters for the WRB-1 correlation is:
| |
| Pressure 1440< P < 2490 psia Local Mass Velocity : 0.9 x 106 < Gloc < 3.7 x 106 lb/ft2-hr Local Quality : -0.2 < loc < 0.3 Heated Length, Inlet to : Lh < 14 feet CHF Location Grid Spacing : 13 < gsp < 32 inches Equivalent Hydraulic Diameter : 0.37 < De < 0.60 inches Equivalent Heated Hydraulic Diameter : 0.46 < Dh < 0.59 inches 4.4-8
| |
| | |
| WBN Figure 4.4-2 shows measured critical heat flux plotted against predicted critical heat flux using the WRB-1 correlation.
| |
| The WRB-1 correlation is the primary DNB correlation for the safety analysis of the VANTAGE 5H and the V+/P+ fuel in the Watts Bar Unit. A correlation limit DNBR of 1.17 for the WRB-1 correlation has been approved by the NRC for VANTAGE 5H fuel.[92] The WRB-1 limit of 1.17 remains applicable to the V+/P+ fuel.
| |
| DNB test results showed that the WRB-1 correlation underpredicted thermal performance of the Modified VANTAGE 5H (MV5H) low pressure drop (LPD) grids and the MV5H intermediate flow mixer (IFM) grids. Data from the typical and thimble test sections, with and without the IFM grids, were used to develop the new correlation designated WRB-2M. It uses the same nonuniform F-factor as the WRB-1 correlation.
| |
| The WRB-2M correlation [101] was developed exclusively for the 17 x 17 RFA-2 fuel design. It is based on Westinghouse rod bundle critical heat flux test data for 17 x 17 fuel with 0.374 inch outside diameter fuel rods and Modified Low Pressure Drop (MLPD) structural mixing vane grids, with or without Modified Intermediate Flow Mixer (MIFM) grids. This correlation accounts directly for both typical cell and thimble cold wall cells effects, non-uniform heat flux profiles, and variations in grid spacing. The WRB-2M correlation, based on local fluid conditions, accurately predicts the thermal performance of this fuel design over a wide range of parameters.
| |
| The application range of parameters for the WRB-2M correlation is Pressure 1495< P < 2425 psia Local Mass Velocity : 0.97 x 106 < Gloc < 3.1 x 106 lb/ft2-hr Local Quality : -0.1 < loc < 0.29 Heated Length, Inlet to : Lh < 14 feet CHF Location Grid Spacing : 10 < gsp < 20.6 inches Equivalent Hydraulic Diameter : 0.37 < De < 0.46 inches Equivalent Heated Hydraulic : 0.46 < Dh < 0.54 inches Diameter Figure 4.4-2a shows measured critical heat flux plotted against predicted critical heat flux using the WRB-2M correlation.
| |
| A correlation limit of 1.14 for the WRB-2M correlation has been approved by the NRC for VANTAGE 5H fuel[101] and is applicable for RFA-2 fuel.[102]
| |
| 4.4-9
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 The W-3 DNB correlation[39], [40] or W-3 Alternative correlations[112] (ABB-NV and WLOP for Unit
| |
| : 1) are used where the primary DNB correlations are not applicable. The WRB-1 correlation and WRB-2M correlation were developed based on mixing vane data and, therefore, are only applicable in the heated rod spans above the first mixing vane grid. The W-3 and ABB-NV correlations, which do not take credit for mixing vane grids, are used to calculate DNBR values in the heated region below the first mixing vane grid. In addition, the W-3 and WLOP correlations are applied in the analysis of accident conditions where the system pressure is below the range of the primary correlation. For system pressures in the range of 500 to 1000 psia, the W-3 correlation limit is 1.45.[94] For system pressures greater than 1000 psia, the W-3 correlation limit is 1.30. A cold wall factor [43] is applied to the W-3 DNB correlation to account for the presence of the unheated thimble surfaces. A correlation limit of 1.13 for the ABB-NV correlation has been approved by the NRC, and a correlation limit of 1.18 for the WLOP correlation has been approved by the NRC.
| |
| The W-3 Alternative correlations, consisting of ABB-NV and WLOP, are based exclusively on DNB data from rod bundle tests, have a wider applicable range, and are more accurate than the W-3 correlation for prediction of margin to DNB. The two correlations are used for DNBR calculations as an alternative to the W-3 correlation, in supplement to the primary DNB correlation, WRB-2M.
| |
| The ABB-NV correlation was originally developed for fuel designs in Combustion Engineering designed Pressurized Water Reactors (PWR) based on a linear relationship between CHF and local quality. The correlation includes the following parameters: pressure, local mass velocity, local equilibrium quality, distance from grid to CHF location, heated length from inlet to CHF location, and heated hydraulic diameter of the subchannel. Supplemental rod bundle data evaluation confirms that ABB-NV with the 95/95 correlation limit of 1.13 is applicable to the fuel region below the first mixing vanegrid of the fuel designs for Westinghouse designed PWRs[112] . Figure 4.4-2b shows measured critical heat flux plotted against predicted heat flux using the ABB-NV correlation.
| |
| The applicable range of the ABB-NV correlation is:
| |
| Pressure (psia) : 1750 to 2415 Local Mass Velocity (106lbm/hr-ft2) : 0.8 to 3.16 Local Quality (fraction) : < 0.22 Heated Length, inlet to CHF location (in.) : 48 (minimum) to 150 Heated Hydraulic Diameter Ratio : 0.679 to 1.08 Grid Distance (in.) : 7.3 to 24 The WLOP correlation is a modified ABB-NV correlation specifically developed for low pressure conditions and extended flow range to cover low pressure/low flow conditions.
| |
| Modifications to ABB-NV were made based on test data from rod bundles containing nonmixing vane grids. The WLOP correlation with a 95/95 DNBR limit of 1.18 has also been validated with test data from rod bundles containing mixing vane grids [112]. Figure 4.4-2c shows measured critical heat flux plotted against predicted heat flux using the WLOP correlation.
| |
| 4.4-10
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 The applicable range of the WLOP correlation is:
| |
| Pressure (psia) : 185 to 1800 Local Mass Velocity (106 lbm/hr-ft2) : 0.23 to 3.07 Local Quality (fraction) : < 0.75 Heated Length, inlet to CHF location (in.) : 48 (minimum) to 168 Heated Hydraulic Diameter Ratio : 0.679 to 1.00 Grid Spacing Term (Joffre et al 2008) : 27 to 115 4.4.2.3.2 Definition of Departure from Nucleate Boiling Ratio The DNB heat flux ratio (DNBR) as applied to typical cells (flow cells with all walls heated) and thimble cells (flow cells with heated and unheated walls) is defined as:
| |
| q"DNB, N DNBR (4.4 9) qloc where:
| |
| q"DNB,EU q"DNB,N = (4.4-10)
| |
| F and q"DNB,EU is the uniform DNB heat flux as predicted by the WRB-1 correlation, the WRB-2M correlation, or the W-3 DNB correlation (typical cell only).
| |
| F is the flux shape factor to account for nonuniform axial heat flux distributions[44] with the "C" term modified as in Reference [39]. For the WRB-2M correlation, the flux shape factor is adjusted as described in Reference [111].
| |
| q"loc is the actual local heat flux.
| |
| The DNB heat flux ratio as applied to the W-3 DNB correlation when an unheated wall is present is:
| |
| q " DNB , N , CW DNBR = (4.4-11) q loc where:
| |
| q " DNB , EU , Dh xCWF q " DNB , N , CW = (4.4-12)
| |
| F 4.4-11
| |
| | |
| WBN where:
| |
| q"DNB,EU,Dh is the uniform DNB heat flux as predicted by the W-3 cold wall DNB correlation[39]
| |
| when not all flow cell walls are heated (thimble cell).
| |
| - 0.0535 G
| |
| CWF = 1.0 - R u [13.76 - 1.372 e 1.78 x
| |
| - 4.732 6 10 0.14 (P)
| |
| - 0.0619 - 8.509 D0.107 ]
| |
| 1000 h
| |
| (4.4-13) and Ru = 1 - De/Dh 4.4.2.3.3 Mixing Technology The rate of heat exchange by mixing between flow channels is proportional to the difference in the local mean fluid enthalpy of the respective channels, the local fluid density and flow velocity.
| |
| The proportionality is expressed by the dimensionless thermal diffusion coefficient (TDC) which is defined as:
| |
| W TDC = (4.4-14)
| |
| VA where:
| |
| W' = flow exchange rate per unit length, lbm/ft-sec
| |
| = fluid density, lbm/ft3 V = fluid velocity, ft/sec A = lateral flow area between channels per unit length ft2/ft The application of the TDC in the THINC analysis for determining the overall mixing effect or heat exchange rate is presented in Reference [41]. The application of the TDC in the VIPRE-01 analysis is presented in Reference [100].
| |
| Westinghouse has sponsored and directed mixing tests at Columbia University.[46] These series of tests, using the "R" mixing vane grid design on 13, 26 and 32 inch grid spacing, were conducted in pressurized water loops at Reynolds numbers similar to that of a PWR core under the following single and two phase (subcooled boiling) flow conditions:
| |
| Pressure 1500 to 2400 psia Inlet enthalpy 303 to 638 Btu/lbm Mass velocity 0.954 to 3.8 x 106 lbm/hr-ft2 Reynolds number 1.34 to 7.45 x 105 Bulk outlet quality -52.1 to -13.5%
| |
| 4.4-12
| |
| | |
| WBN TDC is determined by comparing the THINC Code predictions with the measured subchannel exit temperatures. Data for 26 inch axial grid spacing are presented in Figure 4.4-3 where the thermal diffusion coefficient is plotted versus the Reynolds number. TDC is found to be independent of Reynolds number, mass velocity, pressure and quality over the ranges tested.
| |
| The two phase data (local, subcooled boiling) fell within the scatter of the single phase data.
| |
| The effect of two-phase flow on the value of TDC has been demonstrated by Cadek,[46] Rowe and Angle,[47,48] and Gonzalez - Santalo and Griffith.[49] In the subcooled boiling region the values of TDC were indistinguishable from the single phase values. In the quality region, Rowe and Angle show that in the case with rod spacing similar to that in PWR reactor core geometry, the value of TDC increased with quality to a point and then decreased, but never below the single phase value. Gonzalez - Santalo and Griffith showed that the mixing coefficient increased as the void fraction increased.
| |
| The data from these tests on the "R" grid showed that a design TDC value of 0.038 (for 26 inch grid spacing) can be used in determining the effect of coolant mixing in the THINC or VIPRE-01 analysis.
| |
| A mixing test program similar to the one described above was conducted at Columbia University for the 17 x 17 geometry and mixing vane grids on 26 inch spacing.[50] The mean value of TDC obtained from these tests was 0.059, and all data was well above the current design value of 0.038.
| |
| Since the actual reactor grid spacing is approximately 20 inches, additional margin is available for this design, as the value of TDC increases as grid spacing decreases.[46]
| |
| ZIRLO mixing vane grids are employed in the VANTAGE 5H fuel assembly, the V+/P+ fuel assembly, and the RFA-2 fuel assembly. The VANTAGE 5H, the V+/P+, and the RFA-2 grid designs are virtually identical to the 17x17 Inconel R-grid design in that the rod size, rod pitch, heated length and grid spacing are unchanged. Due to the change in grid material from Inconel to ZIRLO, the grid height and strap thickness have increased. However, the VANTAGE 5H ZIRLO grid, the V+/P+ ZIRLO grid, and the RFA-2 ZIRLO grid are designed to preserve the important characteristics of the existing 17x17 type "R" mixing vane grid. Thus, the current conservative design value of TDC is applicable to the VANTAGE 5H, V+/P+, and RFA-2 fuel assembly designs.
| |
| The inclusion of three IFM grids in the upper spans of the RFA-2 fuel assembly results in a grid spacing of approximately 10 inches. Per Reference [97], a design TDC value of 0.038 was chosen as a conservatively low value for use with IFM grids to determine the effect of coolant mixing in the core thermal performance analysis.
| |
| 4.4-13
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.2.3.4 Hot Channel Factors The total hot channel factors for heat flux and enthalpy rise are defined as the maximum-to-core average ratios of these quantities. The heat flux hot channel factor considers the local maximum linear heat generation rate at a point (the hot spot), and the enthalpy rise hot channel factor involves the maximum integrated value along a channel (the hot channel).
| |
| Each of the total hot channel factors considers a nuclear hot channel factor (see Section 4.4.3.2) describing the neutron power distribution and an engineering hot channel factor, which allows for variations in flow conditions and fabrication tolerances. The engineering hot channel factors are made up of subfactors which account for the influence of the variations of fuel pellet diameter, density, enrichment and eccentricity, inlet flow distribution, flow redistribution, and flow mixing.
| |
| Heat Flux Engineering Hot Channel Factor, FEQ The heat flux engineering hot channel factor is used to evaluate the maximum linear heat generation rate in the core. This subfactor is determined by statistically combining the fabrication variations for fuel pellet density, enrichment, and burnable absorber, and has a value of 1.03 at the 95% probability level with 95% confidence. As shown in Reference [87], no DNB penalty needs to be taken for the short, relatively low-intensity heat flux spikes caused by variations in the above parameters, as well as fuel pellet eccentricity and fuel rod diameter variation.
| |
| Enthalpy Rise Engineering Hot Channel Factor, FEH The effect of variations in flow conditions and fabrication tolerances on the hot channel enthalpy rise is directly considered in the VIPRE-01 core thermal subchannel analysis (see Section 4.4.3.4.1) under any reactor operating condition. The items considered contributing to the enthalpy rise engineering hot channel factor are discussed below:
| |
| : 1. Pellet density, enrichment, and burnable absorber:
| |
| Design values employed in the VIPRE-01 analysis related to the above fabrication variations are based on applicable limiting tolerances such that these design values are met for 95% of the limiting channels at a 95% confidence level. Measured manufacturing data on Westinghouse 17 x 17 fuel show the tolerances used in this evaluation are conservative. In addition, each fuel assembly is checked to assure the channel spacing design criteria are met. The effect of these variations is employed in the VIPRE-01 analysis as a direct multiplier on the channel enthalpy rise as input to the calculation of the RTDP DNBR design limits.
| |
| : 2. Inlet Flow Maldistribution:
| |
| The consideration of inlet flow maldistribution in core thermal performances is discussed in Section 4.4.3.1.2. A design basis of 5% reduction in coolant flow to the hot assembly is used in the VIPRE-01 analysis.
| |
| 4.4-14
| |
| | |
| WBN-1
| |
| : 3. Flow Redistribution:
| |
| The flow redistribution accounts for the reduction in flow in the hot channel resulting from the high flow resistance in the channel due to the local or bulk boiling. The effect of the non-uniform power distribution is inherently considered in the VIPRE-01 analysis for every operating condition which is evaluated.
| |
| : 4. Flow Mixing:
| |
| The subchannel mixing model incorporated in the VIPRE-01 code and used in reactor design is based on experimental data[51] discussed in Section 4.4.3.4.1. The mixing vanes incorporated in the spacer grid design induce additional flow mixing between the various flow channels in a fuel assembly as well as between adjacent assemblies. This mixing reduces the enthalpy rise in the hot channel resulting from local power peaking or unfavorable mechanical tolerances.
| |
| 4.4.2.3.5 Effects of Rod Bow on DNBR The phenomenon of fuel rod bowing, as described in Reference [88], must be accounted for in the DNBR safety analysis of Condition I and Condition II events. Applicable credits for margin resulting from retained conservatism in the evaluation of the DNBR, are used to offset the effect of rod bow.
| |
| For the safety analysis of the Watts Bar Units, sufficient DNBR margin was maintained (see Section 4.4.1.1) to accommodate the full and low flow rod bow DNBR penalties identified in Reference [89].
| |
| However, for the upper assembly spans of the RFA-2, where additional restraint is provided with the IFM grids, the grid to grid spacing in DNB limiting space is approximately 10 inches compared to the 20 inches in the V+/P+ fuel assemblies. Using the rod bow topical method[88]
| |
| and scaling with the NRC approved factor, results in predicted channel closure in the 10-inch spans of less than 50% closure. Therefore, no rod bow DNBR penalty is required in the 10-inch spans in the RFA-2 safety analysis.
| |
| The maximum rod bow penalties (< 2.3% (Unit 1) or <2.5% (Unit 2)) accounted for in the design safety analysis are based on an assembly average burnup of 24,000 MWD/MTU. At burnups greater than 24,000 MWD/MTU, credit is taken for the effect of FNH burndown, due to the decrease in fissionable isotopes and the buildup of fission product inventory, and no additional rod bow penalty is required.[95]
| |
| 4.4.2.3.6 Transition Core The original Westinghouse transition core DNB methodology is given in References [103] and
| |
| [104] and was approved by the NRC in Reference [105]. An extension of this methodology was approved in Reference [106]. Using this methodology, transition cores are analyzed as if they were full cores of one assembly type (full V+/P+ or full RFA-2), applying the applicable transition core penalties. The penalties are included in the safety analysis limit DNBRs such that sufficient margin over the design limit DNBRs exist to accommodate the transition core penalty and other applicable penalties.
| |
| 4.4-15
| |
| | |
| WBN The RFA-2 fuel assembly has IFM grids located in spans between mixing vane grids, where no grid exists in the V+/P+ fuel assembly. The additional grids introduce localized flow redistribution from the RFA-2 fuel assembly into the V+/P+ fuel assembly at the axial zones near the mixing vane grid and the IFM grid position in a transition core. Between the grids, the tendency for velocity equalization in parallel open channels causes flow to return to the RFA-2 fuel assembly. The localized flow redistribution described above actually benefits the V+/P+
| |
| fuel assembly. This benefit is more than enough to offset the slight mass flow bias due to velocity equalization at non-gridded locations. Thus, the analysis for a full core of V+/P+ is appropriate for that fuel type in a transition core. There is no transition core DNBR penalty for the V+/P+ fuel.
| |
| The transition core penalty is a function of the number of RFA-2 fuel assemblies in the core based on the methodology of Reference [106]. Sufficient DBNR margin is maintained in the RFA-2 safety analysis to completely offset this transition core penalty.
| |
| 4.4.2.4 Flux Tilt Considerations Significant quadrant power tilts are not anticipated during normal operation since this phenomenon is caused by some perturbation. For example, a dropped or misaligned RCCA could cause changes in the hot channel factors; however, these events are analyzed separately in Chapter 15. Other possible causes for quadrant power tilts include X-Y xenon transients, inlet temperature mismatches, enrichment variations within tolerances and so forth.
| |
| In addition to unanticipated quadrant power tilts as described above, other readily explainable asymmetries may be observed during calibration of the excore detector quadrant power tilt alarm. During operation, incore power distribution measurements are performed at least once per month and, periodically, additional measurements are obtained for calibration purposes.
| |
| Each of these measurements are reviewed for deviations from the expected power distributions.
| |
| Asymmetry in the core, from quadrant to quadrant, is frequently a consequence of the design when assembly and/or component shuffling and rotation requirements do not allow exact symmetry preservation. In each case, the acceptability of an observed asymmetry, planned or otherwise, depends solely on meeting the required accident analyses assumptions.
| |
| In practice, once acceptability has been established by review of the measurements, the quadrant power tilt alarms and related instrumentation are adjusted to indicate zero Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio as the final step in the calibration process. This action ensures that the instrumentation is correctly calibrated to alarm in the event an unexplained or unanticipated change occurs in the quadrant to quadrant relationships between calibration intervals. Proper functioning of the quadrant power tilt alarm is significant because no allowances are made in the design for increased hot channel factors due to unexpected developing flux tilts since all likely causes are prevented by design or procedures or specifically analyzed. Finally, in the event that unexplained flux tilts do occur, the Technical Specifications provide appropriate corrective actions to ensure continued safe operation of the reactor.
| |
| 4.4-16
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.2.5 Void Fraction Distribution The calculated core average and the hot subchannel maximum and average void fractions are presented in Table 4.4-2 for operation at full power with design hot channel factors. The void fraction distribution in the core at various radial and axial locations is presented in Reference
| |
| [52], based on THINC-IV predictions. The void models used in the VIPRE-01 computer code are described in Section 4.4.2.8.3.
| |
| Since void formation due to subcooled boiling is an important promoter of interassembly flow redistribution, a sensitivity study was performed with THINC-IV using the void model referenced above.
| |
| The results of this study showed that because of the realistic cross flow model used in THINC-IV, the minimum DNBR in the hot channel is relatively insensitive to variations in this model. The range of variations considered in this sensitivity study covered the maximum uncertainty range of the data used to develop each part of the void fraction correlation. The conclusion of the sensitivity study remains applicable to the VIPRE-01 code.
| |
| 4.4.2.6 DELETED This section deleted in the initial issue of the Updated FSAR.
| |
| 4.4.2.7 Core Pressure Drops and Hydraulic Loads 4.4.2.7.1 Core Pressure Drops The analytical model and experimental data used to calculate the pressure drops shown in Table 4.4-1 are described in Section 4.4.2.8. The core pressure drop includes the fuel assembly, lower core plate, and upper core plate pressure drops. The full power operation pressure drop values shown in Table 4.4-1 are the unrecoverable pressure drops across the vessel, including the inlet and outlet nozzles, and across the core. These pressure drops are based on the best estimate flow for actual plant operating conditions as described in Section 5.1. Section 5.1 also defines and describes the thermal design flow (minimum flow) which is the basis for reactor core thermal performance and the mechanical design flow (maximum flow) which is used in the mechanical design of the reactor vessel internals and fuel assemblies.
| |
| Since the best estimate flow is that flow which is most likely to exist in an operating plant, the calculated core pressure drops in Table 4.4-1 are based on this best estimate flow rather than the thermal design flow.
| |
| Uncertainties associated with the core pressure drop values are discussed in Section 4.4.2.10.2.
| |
| 4.4.2.7.2 Hydraulic Loads The fuel assembly hold down springs, as shown in Figure 4.2-2, are designed to keep the fuel assemblies in contact with the lower core plate under all Condition I and II events with the exception of the turbine overspeed transient associated with a loss of external load. The hold down springs are designed to tolerate the possibility of an over deflection associated with fuel assembly lift off for this case and provide contact between the fuel assembly and the lower core plate following this transient. More adverse flow conditions can occur during a LOCA. These conditions are presented in Section 15.4.1.
| |
| 4.4-17
| |
| | |
| WBN Hydraulic loads at normal operations conditions are calculated considering the best estimate flow and best estimate core bypass flow based on manufacturing tolerances. Core hydraulic loads at cold plant startup conditions are adjusted to account for the coolant density difference.
| |
| Conservative core hydraulic loads for a pump overspeed transient are based on a flow rate of 18% greater than the best estimate flow. Full scale hydraulic test results for Vantage 5H fuel are presented in Reference [97]. Full scale hydraulic test results for RFA-2 fuel are presented in Reference [102].
| |
| 4.4.2.8 Correlation and Physical Data 4.4.2.8.1 Surface Heat Transfer Coefficients Forced convection heat transfer coefficients are obtained from the Dittus-Boelter correlation[53],
| |
| with the properties evaluated at bulk fluid conditions:
| |
| 0.8 0.4 hDe = 0.023 De G Cp K K (4.4-15) where:
| |
| h = heat transfer coefficient, BTU/hr-ft2-°F De = equivalent diameter, ft K = thermal conductivity, BTU/hr-ft-°F G = mass velocity, lbm/hr-ft2
| |
| = dynamic viscosity, lbm/ft-hr Cp = heat capacity, BTU/lbm-°F This correlation has been shown to be conservative[54] for rod bundle geometries with pitch to diameter ratios in the range used by PWRs.
| |
| The onset of nucleate boiling occurs when the clad wall temperature reaches the amount of superheat predicted by Thom's[55] correlation. After this occurrence the outer clad wall temperature is determined by:
| |
| 0.5 Tsat = [0.072 exp (- P/ 1260)] (q ) (4.4-16) where:
| |
| Tsat = wall superheat, TW - Tsat°F q" = wall heat flux, BTU/hr-ft2 P = pressure, psia TW = outer clad wall temperature, °F Tsat = saturation temperature of coolant at P, °F 4.4-18
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.2.8.2 Total Core and Vessel Pressure Drop Unrecoverable pressure losses occur as a result of viscous drag (friction) and/or geometry changes (form) in the fluid flow path. The flow field is assumed to be incompressible, turbulent, single-phase water. These assumptions apply to the core and vessel pressure drop calculations for the purpose of establishing the primary loop flow rate. Two-phase considerations are neglected in the vessel pressure drop evaluation because the core average void is negligible (see Section 4.4.2.5 and Table 4.4-2). Two-phase flow considerations in the core thermal subchannel analyses are considered and the models are discussed in Section 4.4.3.1.3. Core and vessel pressure losses are calculated by equations of the form:
| |
| L V2 PL = K+ F De 2 gc (144) (4.4-17) where:
| |
| PL = unrecoverable pressure drop, lbf/in2
| |
| = fluid density, lbm/ft3 L = length, ft De = equivalent diameter, ft V = fluid velocity, ft/sec lbm ft gc 32.174 lbf sec 2 K = form loss coefficient, dimensionless F = friction loss coefficient, dimensionless Fluid density is assumed to be constant at the appropriate value for each component in the core and vessel. Because of the complex core and vessel flow geometry, precise analytical values for the form and friction lost coefficients are not available. Therefore, experimental values for these coefficients are obtained from geometrically similar models.
| |
| Values are quoted in Table 4.4-1 for unrecoverable pressure loss across the reactor vessel, including the inlet and outlet nozzles, and across the core. The results of full scale tests of core components and fuel assemblies were utilized in developing the core pressure loss characteristic. The pressure drop for the vessel was obtained by combining the core loss with correlation of 1/7th scale model hydraulic test data on a number of vessels[56,57] and form loss relationships.[58] Moody[59] curves were used to obtain the single phase friction factors.
| |
| Tests of the primary coolant loop flow rates are made (see Section 4.4.4.1 and Table 14.2-2, (historical information) prior to initial criticality to verify that the flow rates used in the design, which were determined in part from the pressure losses calculated by the method described here, are conservative.
| |
| 4.4-19
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.2.8.3 Void Fraction Correlation VIPRE-01 considers two-phase flow in two steps. First, a quality model is used to compute the flowing vapor mass fraction (true quality) including the effects of subcooled boiling. Then, given the true quality, a bulk void model is applied to compute the vapor volume fraction (void fraction). VIPRE-01 uses a profile fit model[100] for determining subcooled quality. It calculates the local vapor volumetric fraction in forced convection boiling by: 1) predicting the point of bubble departure from the heated surface, and 2) postulating a relationship between the true local vapor fraction and the corresponding thermal equilibrium value.
| |
| The void fraction in the bulk boiling region is predicted by using homogeneous flow theory and assuming no slip. The void fraction in this region is therefore a function only of the thermodynamic quality.
| |
| 4.4.2.9 Thermal Effects of Operational Transients DNB core safety limits are generated as a function of coolant temperature, pressure, core power and axial power imbalance. Steady-state operation within these safety limits insures that the DNB design basis is met. Figure 15.1-1 shows the DNBR limit lines and the resulting overtemperature T trip lines (which become part of the technical specifications), plotted as T versus Tavg for various pressures. This system provides adequate protection against anticipated operational transients that are slow with respect to fluid transport delays in the primary system.
| |
| In addition, for fast transient, e.g., uncontrolled rod bank withdrawal at power incident (Section 15.2.2), specific protection functions are provided as described in Section 7.2 and the use of these protection functions are described in Chapter 15. (See Table 15.1-3). The thermal response of the fuel rod is discussed in Section 4.4.3.7.
| |
| 4.4.2.10 Uncertainties in Estimates 4.4.2.10.1 Uncertainties in Fuel and Clad Temperatures As discussed in Section 4.4.2.2, the fuel temperature is a function of crud, oxide, clad, gap, and pellet conductances. Uncertainties in the fuel temperature calculation are essentially of two types: fabrication uncertainties such as variations in the pellet and clad dimensions and the pellet density; and model uncertainties such as variations in the pellet conductivity and the gap conductance. These uncertainties have been quantified by comparison of the thermal model to the in-pile thermocouple measurements[7-13] by out-of-pile measurements of the fuel and clad properties[16 - 27] and by measurements of the fuel and clad dimensions during fabrication. The resulting uncertainties are then used in all evaluations involving the fuel temperature. The effect of densification on fuel temperature uncertainties is also included in the calculation of the total uncertainty.
| |
| 4.4-20
| |
| | |
| WBN In addition to the temperature uncertainty described above, the measurement uncertainty in determining the local power and the effect of density and enrichment variations on the local power are considered in establishing the heat flux hot channel factor. These uncertainties are described in Section 4.3.2.2.1.
| |
| Reactor trip setpoints, as specified in the Technical Specifications, include allowance for instrument and measurement uncertainties, such as calorimetric error, instrument drift and channel reproducibility, temperature measurement uncertainties, noise, and heat capacity variations.
| |
| Uncertainty in determining the cladding temperature results from uncertainties in the crud and oxide thicknesses. Because of the excellent heat transfer between the surface of the rod and the coolant, the film temperature drop does not appreciably contribute to the uncertainty.
| |
| 4.4.2.10.2 Uncertainties in Pressure Drops Core and vessel pressure drops based on the best estimate flow, as described in Section 5.1, are quoted in Table 4.4-1. The uncertainties quoted are based on the uncertainties in both the test results and the analytical extension of these values to the reactor application.
| |
| A major use of the core and vessel pressure drops is to determine the primary system coolant flow rates as discussed in Section 5.1. In addition, as discussed in Section 4.4.4.1 and Table 14.2-2 (historical information), tests on the primary system prior to initial criticality are made to verify that a conservative primary system coolant flow rate has been used in the design and analyses of the Watts Bar Units 1 and 2.
| |
| 4.4.2.10.3 Uncertainties Due to Inlet Flow Maldistribution The effects of uncertainties in the inlet flow maldistribution criteria used in the core thermal analyses are discussed in Section 4.4.3.1.2.
| |
| 4.4.2.10.4 Uncertainties in DNB Correlation The uncertainty in the DNB correlation (Section 4.4.2.3) can be written as a statement on the probability of not being in DNB based on the statistics of the DNB data. This is discussed in Section 4.4.1.1.
| |
| 4.4.2.10.5 Uncertainties in DNBR Calculations The uncertainties in the DNBR's calculated by VIPRE-01 analysis (see Section 4.4.3.4.1) due to uncertainties in the nuclear peaking factors are accounted for by applying conservatively high values of the nuclear peaking factors and including measurement error allowances. In addition, conservative values for the engineering hot channel factors are used as discussed in Section 4.4.2.3.4. The results of a sensitivity study[52] with THINC-IV, a VIPRE-01 equivalent code, show that the minimum DNBR in the hot channel is relatively insensitive to variations in the core-wide radial power distribution (for the same value of FNH).
| |
| 4.4-21
| |
| | |
| WBN The ability of the VIPRE-01 computer code to accurately predict flow and enthalpy distributions in rod bundles is discussed in Section 4.4.3.4.1 and in Reference [100]. Studies[99] have been performed to determine the sensitivity of the minimum DNBR in the hot channel to the void fraction correlation (see also Section 4.4.2.8.3) and the inlet flow distributions. The results of these studies show that the minimum DNBR is relatively insensitive to variation in these parameters. Furthermore, the VIPRE flow field model for predicting conditions in the hot channels is consistent with that used in the derivation of the DNB correlation limits, including void/quality modeling, turbulent mixing and crossflow, and two-phase friction.[100]
| |
| 4.4.2.10.6 Uncertainties in Flow Rates The uncertainties associated with loop flow rates are discussed in Section 5.1. For core thermal performance evaluations, a thermal design loop flow is used which is less than the best estimate loop flow. In addition, another 9.6% of the thermal design flow is assumed to be ineffective for core heat removal capability because it bypasses the core through the various available vessel flow paths described in Section 4.4.3.1.1.
| |
| 4.4.2.10.7 Uncertainties in Hydraulic Loads As discussed in Section 4.4.2.7.2, hydraulic loads on the fuel assembly are evaluated for a pump overspeed transient which creates flow rates 18% to 20% greater than the mechanical design flow. The best estimate flow rate value is used with a 15% uncertainty applied to the V+/P+ lift forces and 10% uncertainty applied to the RFA-2 lift forces..
| |
| 4.4.2.10.8 Uncertainties in Mixing Coefficient The value of the mixing coefficient, TDC, used in VIPRE-01 analyses for this application is 0.038. The results of the mixing tests done on 17 x 17 geometry, as discussed in Section 4.4.2.3.3, had a mean value of TDC of 0.059 and standard deviation of = 0.007. Hence, the current design value of TDC is almost 3 standard deviations below the mean for 26 inch grid spacing.
| |
| 4.4.2.11 Plant Configuration Data Plant configuration data for the thermal hydraulic and fluid systems external to the core are provided in the appropriate Chapters 5, 6, and 9. Implementation of the emergency core cooling system (ECCS) is discussed in Chapter 15. Some specific areas of interest are the following:
| |
| : 1. Total coolant flow rates for the reactor coolant system (RCS) and each loop are provided in Table 5.1-1. Flow rates employed in the evaluation of the core are presented in Section 4.4.
| |
| : 2. Total RCS volume including pressurizer and surge line, RCS liquid volume including pressurizer water at steady state power conditions are given in Table 5.1-1.
| |
| 4.4-22
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 3. The flow path length through each volume may be calculated from physical data provided in the above referenced tables.
| |
| : 4. The height of fluid in each component of the RCS may be determined from the physical data presented in Section 5.5. The components of the RCS are water filled during power operation with the pressurizer being approximately 60% water filled.
| |
| : 5. Components of the ECCS are to be located so as to meet the criteria for net positive suction head described in Section 6.3.
| |
| : 6. Line lengths and sizes for the safety injection system are determined so as to guarantee a total system resistance which will provide, as a minimum, the fluid delivery rates assumed in the safety analyses described in Chapter 15.
| |
| : 7. The minimum flow areas for components of the RCS are presented in Section 5.5, component and subsystem design.
| |
| : 8. The steady state pressure drops and temperature distributions through the RCS are presented in Table 5.1-1.
| |
| 4.4.3 Evaluation 4.4.3.1 Core Hydraulics 4.4.3.1.1 Flow Paths Considered in Core Pressure Drop and Thermal Design The following flow paths or core bypass flow are considered:
| |
| : 1. Flow through the spray nozzles into the upper head for head cooling purposes.
| |
| : 2. Flow entering into the RCC guide thimbles to cool the control rods.
| |
| : 3. Leakage flow from the vessel inlet nozzle directly to the vessel outlet nozzle through the gap between the vessel and the barrel.
| |
| : 4. Flow introduced between the baffle and the barrel for the purpose of cooling these components, and which is not considered available for core cooling.
| |
| : 5. Flow in the gaps between the fuel assemblies on the core periphery and the adjacent baffle wall.
| |
| 4.4-23
| |
| | |
| WBN The above contributions are evaluated to confirm that the design value of the core bypass flow is met. The design value of core bypass flow for the Watts Bar Unit 1 and Unit 2 is equal to 9.6% of the total vessel flow. Of the total allowance, 7.6% is associated with the internals (items 1, 3, 4, and 5 above) and 2.0% for the core. Calculations have been performed using drawing tolerances on a worst case basis and accounting for uncertainties in pressure losses.
| |
| Based on these calculations, the core bypass flow for the Watts Bar Unit 1 and Unit 2 is < 9.6%.
| |
| This design bypass value is also used in the evaluation of the core pressure drops quoted in Table 4.4-1, and the determination of reactor flow rates in Section 5.1.
| |
| Flow model test results for the flow path through the reactor are discussed in Section 4.4.2.8.2.
| |
| 4.4.3.1.2 Inlet Flow Distributions Data has been considered from several 1/7 scale hydraulic reactor model tests[56,57,64] in arriving at the core inlet flow maldistribution criteria to be used in the VIPRE-01 analyses (see Section 4.4.3.4.1). THINC I analyses made, using this data, have indicated that a conservative design basis is to consider 5% reduction in the flow to the hot assembly.[65] The same design basis of 5% reduction to the hot assembly inlet is used in VIPRE-01 analyses.
| |
| The experimental error estimated in the inlet velocity distribution has been considered as outlined in Reference [52] where the sensitivity of changes in inlet velocity distributions to hot channel thermal performance is shown to be small. Studies[52] made with a sub-channel code show that it is adequate to use the 5% reduction in inlet flow to the hot assembly for a loop out of service based on the experimental data in References [56] and [57].
| |
| The effect of the total flow rate on the inlet velocity distribution was studied in the experiments of Reference [56]. As was expected, on the basis of the theoretical analysis, no significant variation could be found in inlet velocity distribution with reduced flow rate.
| |
| 4.4.3.1.3 Empirical Friction Factor Correlations Empirical friction factor correlations are used in the VIPRE-01 computer code (described in Section 4.4.3.4.1).
| |
| The friction factor in the axial direction, parallel to the fuel rod axis, is evaluated using a correlation for the smooth tube.[100] The effect of two-phase flow on the friction loss is expressed in terms of the single-phase friction pressure drop and a two-phase friction multiplier.
| |
| The multiplier is calculated directly using the homogeneous equilibrium flow model.
| |
| 4.4-24
| |
| | |
| WBN The flow in the lateral directions, normal to the fuel rod axis, views the reactor core as a large tube bank. Thus, the lateral friction factor proposed by Idel'chik[58] is applicable. This correlation is of the form:
| |
| FL = A Re-0.2 L (4.4-18) where:
| |
| A is a function of the rod pitch and diameter as given in Reference [58].
| |
| ReL is the lateral Reynolds number based on the rod diameter.
| |
| Extensive comparisons of VIPRE-01 predictions using these correlations to THINC-IV predictions are given in Reference [100], and verify the applicability of these correlations in PWR design.
| |
| 4.4.3.2 Influence of Power Distribution The core power distribution, which is largely established at beginning-of-life by fuel enrichment, loading pattern, and core power level, is also a function of variables such as control rod worth and position, and fuel depletion throughout lifetime. Radial power distributions in various planes of the core are often illustrated for general interest, however, the core radial enthalpy rise distribution as determined by the integral of power up each channel is of greater importance for DNB analyses. These radial power distributions, characterized by FNH (defined in Section 4.3.2.2.1) as well as axial heat flux profiles are discussed in the following two sections.
| |
| 4.4.3.2.1 Nuclear Enthalpy Rise Hot Channel Factor, FNH Given the local power density q' (kW/ft) at a point x, y, z in a core with N fuel rods and height H, H
| |
| Max q (xo , yo , z) dz hot rod power o FNH = = H average rod power 1 q (x, y, z) dz N allrods o (4.4-19) 4.4-25
| |
| | |
| WBN The way in which FNH is used in the DNB calculation is important. The location of minimum DNBR depends on the axial profile and the value of DNBR depends on the enthalpy rise to that point. Basically, the maximum value of the rod integral is used to identify the most likely rod for minimum DNBR. An axial power profile is obtained which, when normalized to the design value of FNH, recreates the axial heat flux along the limiting rod. The surrounding rods are assumed to have the same axial profile with rod average powers which are typical distributions found in hot assemblies. In this manner worst case axial profiles can be combined with worst case radial distributions for reference DNB calculations.
| |
| It should be noted again that FNH is an integral and is used as such in DNB calculations. Local heat fluxes are obtained by using hot channel and adjacent channel explicit power shapes which take into account variations in horizontal power shapes throughout the core. The design radical power distribution discussed in Reference [52] is used in the VIPRE-01 model.
| |
| For operation at a fraction, P, of full power, the design FNH used is given by:
| |
| FNH FRTP H [1 PFH (1 P )] (4.4-20) where:
| |
| FRTP H is the limit at the rated thermal power (RTP) specified in the COLR.
| |
| PFH is the power fraction multiplier for the FNH limit specified in the COLR.
| |
| P is Thermal Power / P The permitted relaxation FNH is included in the DNB protection setpoints and allows radial power shape changes with rod insertion to the insertion limits,[68] thus allowing greater flexibility in the nuclear design.
| |
| 4.4.3.2.2 Axial Heat Flux Distributions As discussed in Section 4.3.2.2. the axial heat flux distribution can vary as a result of rod motion, power change, or due to spatial xenon transients which may occur in the axial direction.
| |
| Consequently, it is necessary to measure the axial power imbalance by means of the excore nuclear detectors (as discussed in Section 4.3.2.2.6) and protect the core from excessive axial power imbalance. The Reactor Trip System provides automatic reduction of the trip setpoint in the overtemperature T channels on excessive axial power imbalance; that is, when an extremely large axial offset corresponds to an axial shape which could lead to a DNBR which is less than that calculated for the reference DNBR design axial shape.
| |
| The reference DNB design axial shape used in establishing over temperature T protection setpoints is a chopped cosine shape with a peak average value of 1.55.
| |
| 4.4-26
| |
| | |
| WBN The course of those accidents in which DNB is a concern is analyzed in Chapter 15 assuming that the protection setpoints have been set on the basis of the reference shape. In many cases, the axial power distribution in the hot channel changes throughout the course of the accident due to rod motion, coolant temperature, and power level changes.
| |
| The initial conditions for the accidents for which DNB protection is required are assumed to be those permissible within the specified axial offset control limits described in Section 4.3.2.2. In the case of the loss-of-flow accident, the hot channel heat flux profile is very similar to the power density profile in normal operation preceding the accident. It is therefore possible to illustrate the calculated minimum DNBR for conditions representative of the loss-of-flow accident as a function of the flux difference initially in the core. A typical plot of this type is provided in Figure 4.4-5. The power shapes are evaluated with the design full-power radial peaking factor (FNH).
| |
| The radial contribution to the hot rod power shape is conservative both for the initial condition and for the condition at the time of minimum DNBR during the loss of flow transient. Also shown is the minimum DNBR calculated for the design power shape for non-overpower/overtemperature DNB events. It can be seen that this design shape results in calculated DNBR that bounds all the normal operation shapes.
| |
| 4.4.3.3 Core Thermal Response A general summary of the steady-state, thermal-hydraulic design parameters, including thermal output, flow rates, etc., is provided in Table 4.4-1 for all loops in operation.
| |
| As stated in Section 4.4.1, the design bases of the application are to prevent DNB and to prevent fuel melting for Condition I and II events. The protective systems described in Chapter 7 are designed to meet these bases. The response of the core to Condition II transients is given in Chapter 15.
| |
| 4.4.3.4 Analytical Techniques 4.4.3.4.1 Core Analysis The objective of reactor core thermal design is to determine the maximum heat removal capability in all flow sub-channels and to show that the core safety limits, as presented in the technical specifications, are not exceeded while compounding engineering and nuclear effects.
| |
| The thermal design takes into account local variations in dimensions, power generation, flow redistribution, and mixing. VIPRE-01 (VIPRE) is a three-dimensional sub-channel code that has been developed to account for hydraulic and nuclear effects on the enthalpy rise in the core and hot channels.[99] VIPRE modeling of a PWR core is based on one-pass modeling approach.[100]
| |
| In the one-pass modeling, hot channels and their adjacent channels are modeled in detail, while the rest of the core is modeled simultaneously on a relatively coarse mesh. The behavior of the hot assembly is determined by superimposing the power distribution upon inlet flow distribution while allowing for flow mixing and flow distribution between flow channels. Local variations in fuel rod power, fuel rod and pellet fabrication, and turbulent mixing are also considered in determining conditions in the hot channels. Conservation equations of mass, axial and lateral momentum, and energy are solved for the fluid enthalpy, axial flow rate, lateral flow and pressure drop.
| |
| 4.4-27
| |
| | |
| WBN Steady State Analysis The VIPRE core model as approved by the NRC, Reference [100], is used with the applicable DNB correlations to determine DNBR distributions along the hot channels of the reactor core under all expected operating conditions. The VIPRE code is described in detail in Reference
| |
| [99], including discussions on code validation with experimental data. The VIPRE modeling method is described in Reference [100], including empirical models and correlations used. The effect of crud on the flow and enthalpy distribution in the core is not directly accounted for in the VIPRE evaluations. However, conservative treatment by the VIPRE modeling method has been demonstrated to bound this effect in DNBR calculations.[100]
| |
| Estimates of uncertainties are discussed in Section 4.4.2.10.
| |
| Experimental Verification Extensive additional experimental verification of VIPRE is presented in Reference [99].
| |
| The VIPRE analysis is based on a knowledge and understanding of the heat transfer and hydrodynamic behavior of the coolant flow and the mechanical characteristics of the fuel elements. The use of the VIPRE analysis provides a realistic evaluation of the core performance and is used in the thermal hydraulic analyses as described above.
| |
| Transient Analysis VIPRE is capable of transient DNB analysis. The conservation equations in the VIPRE code contain the necessary accumulation terms for transient calculations. The input description can include one or more of the following time dependent arrays:
| |
| : 1. Inlet flow variation,
| |
| : 2. Core heat flux variation,
| |
| : 3. Core pressure variation,
| |
| : 4. Inlet temperature or enthalpy variation.
| |
| 4.4-28
| |
| | |
| WBN At the beginning of the transient, the calculation procedure is carried out as in the steady state analysis. The time is incremented by an amount determined either by the user or by the time step control options in the code itself. At each new time step the calculations are carried out with the addition of the accumulation terms which are evaluated using the information from the previous time step. This procedure is continued until a preset maximum time is reached.
| |
| At time intervals selected by the user, a complete description of the coolant parameter distributions as well as DNBR is printed out. In this manner the variation of any parameter with time can be readily determined.
| |
| The methods for evaluating fuel rod thermal response are described in Section 15.1.9.
| |
| 4.4.3.4.2 Fuel Temperatures As discussed in Section 4.4.2.2, the fuel rod behavior is evaluated utilizing a semi-empirical thermal model which considers, in addition to the thermal aspects, such items as clad creep, fuel swelling, fission gas release, release of absorbed gases, cladding corrosion and elastic deflection, and helium solubility.
| |
| A detailed description of the thermal model can be found in Reference [93].
| |
| 4.4.3.4.3 Hydrodynamic Instability The analytical methods used to assess hydraulic instability are discussed in Section 4.4.3.5.
| |
| 4.4.3.5 Hydrodynamic and Flow Power Coupled Instability Boiling flows may be susceptible to thermohydrodynamic instabilities.[73] These instabilities are undesirable in reactors since they may cause a change in thermohydraulic conditions that may lead to a reduction in the DNB heat flux relative to that observed during a steady flow condition or to undesired forced vibrations of core components. Therefore, a thermohydraulic design was developed which states that modes of operation under Condition I and II events shall not lead to thermohydrodynamic instabilities.
| |
| Two specific types of flow instabilities are considered for Westinghouse PWR operation. These are the Ledinegg or flow excursion type of static instability and the density wave type of dynamic instability.
| |
| 4.4-29
| |
| | |
| WBN A Ledinegg instability involves a sudden change in flow rate from one steady state to another.
| |
| This instability occurs[73] when the slope of the reactor coolant system pressure drop-flow rate P
| |
| curve becomes algebraically smaller than the loop supply (pump head) pressure G internal P
| |
| P P drop-flow rate curve . The criterion for stability is thus > . The G external G internal G external P
| |
| Westinghouse pump head curve has a negative slope external 0 whereas the reactor G
| |
| P coolant system pressure drop-flow curve has a positive slope int ernal 0 over the Condition G
| |
| I and Condition II operational ranges. Thus, the Ledinegg instability will not occur.
| |
| The mechanism of density wave oscillations in a heated channel has been described by Lahey and Moody.[74] Briefly, an inlet flow fluctuation produces an enthalpy perturbation. This perturbs the length and the pressure drop of the single phase region and causes quality or void perturbations in the two-phase regions which travel up the channel with the flow. The quality and length perturbations in the two-phase region create two-phase pressure drop perturbations.
| |
| However, since the total pressure drop across the core is maintained by the characteristics of the fluid system external to the core, then the two-phase pressure drop perturbation feeds back to the single phase region. These resulting perturbations can be either attenuated or self-sustained.
| |
| A simple method has been developed by Ishii[75] for parallel closed channel systems to evaluate whether a given condition is stable with respect to the density wave type of dynamic instability.
| |
| This method had been used to assess the stability of typical Westinghouse reactor designs[76,77,78] under Condition I and II operation. The results indicate that a large margin to density wave instability exists, e.g., increases on the order of 150% of rated reactor power would be required for the predicted inception of this type of instability.
| |
| The application of the method of Ishii[75] to Westinghouse reactor designs is conservative due to the parallel open channel feature of Westinghouse PWR cores. For such cores, there is little resistance to lateral flow leaving the flow channels of high power density. There is also energy transfer from channels of high power density to lower power density channels. This coupling with cooler channels has led to the opinion that an open channel configuration is more stable than the above closed channel analysis under the same boundary conditions. Flow stability tests[79] have been conducted where the closed channel systems were shown to be less stable than when the same channels were cross connected at several locations. The cross connections were such that the resistance to channel to channel cross flow and enthalpy perturbations would be greater than that which would exist in a PWR core which has a relatively low resistance to cross flow.
| |
| 4.4-30
| |
| | |
| WBN Flow instabilities which have been observed have occurred almost exclusively in closed channel systems operating at low pressures relative to the Westinghouse PWR operating pressures.
| |
| Kao, Morgan, and Parker[80] analyzed parallel closed channel stability experiments simulating a reactor core flow. These experiments were conducted at pressures up to 2200 psia. The results showed that for flow and power levels typical of power reactor conditions, no flow oscillations could be induced above 1200 psia.
| |
| Additional evidence that flow instabilities do not adversely affect thermal margin is provided by the data from the rod bundle DNB tests. Many Westinghouse rod bundles have been tested over wide ranges of operating conditions with no evidence of premature DNB or of inconsistent data which might be indicative of flow instabilities in the rod bundle.
| |
| In summary, it is concluded that thermohydrodynamic instabilities will not occur under Condition I and II modes of operation for Westinghouse PWR reactor designs. A large power margin exists to predicted inception of such instabilities. Analysis has been performed which shows that minor plant to plant differences in Westinghouse reactor designs such as fuel assembly arrays, core power to flow ratios, fuel assembly length, etc. will not result in gross deterioration of the above power margins.
| |
| 4.4.3.6 Temperature Transient Effects Analysis Waterlogging damage of a fuel rod could occur as a consequence of a power increase on a rod after water has entered the fuel rod through a clad defect. Water entry will continue until the fuel rod internal pressure is equal to the reactor coolant pressure. A subsequent power increase raises the temperature and, hence, could raise the pressure of the water contained within the fuel rod. The increase in hydrostatic pressure within the fuel rod then drives a portion of the water from the fuel rod through the water entry defect. Clad distortion and/or rupture can occur if the fuel rod internal pressure increase is excessive due to insufficient venting of water to the reactor coolant. This occurs when there is both a rapid increase in the temperature of the water within the fuel rod and a small defect. Zircaloy clad fuel rods which have failed due to waterlogging[81,82] indicate that very rapid power transients are required for fuel failure. Normal operational transients are limited to about 40 cal/gm-min. (peak rod) while the Spert tests[81]
| |
| indicate that 120 to 150 cal/gm is required to rupture the clad even with very short transients (5.5 msec. period). Release of the internal fuel rod pressure is expected to have a minimal effect on the Reactor Coolant System[81] and is not expected to result in failure of additional fuel rods.[82] Ejection of fuel pellet fragments into the coolant stream is not expected.[81,82] A clad breech due to waterlogging is thus expected to be similar to any fuel rod failure mechanism which exposes fuel pellets to the reactor coolant stream. Waterlogging has not been identified as the mechanism for clad distortion or perforation of any Westinghouse Zircaloy-4 fuel rods.
| |
| 4.4-31
| |
| | |
| WBN High fuel rod internal gas pressure could cause clad failure. One of the fuel rod design bases (Section 4.2.1.1.1) is that the fuel rod internal gas pressure is limited to a value below that which could cause (1) the diametral gap to increase due to outward cladding creep during steady-state operation, and (2) extensive DNB propagation to occur. During operational transients, fuel rod clad rupture due to high internal gas pressure is precluded by meeting the above design basis.
| |
| 4.4.3.7 Potentially Damaging Temperature Effects During Transients The fuel rod experiences many operational transients (intentional maneuvers) during its residence in the core. A number of thermal effects must be considered when analyzing the fuel rod performance.
| |
| The clad can be in contact with the fuel pellet at some time in the fuel lifetime. Clad-pellet interaction occurs if the fuel pellet temperature is increased after the clad is in contact with the pellet. Clad-pellet interaction is discussed in Section 4.2.1.3.1.
| |
| The potential effects of operation with waterlogged fuel are discussed in Section 4.4.3.6 which concluded that waterlogging is not a concern during operational transients.
| |
| Clad flattening, as noted in Section 4.2.1.3.1, has been observed in some operating power reactors. Thermal expansion (axial) of the fuel rod stack against a flattened section of clad could cause failure of the clad. This is no longer a concern because clad flattening is precluded during the fuel residence in the core (see Section 4.2.1.3.1).
| |
| There can be a differential thermal expansion between the fuel rods and the guide thimbles during a transient. Excessive bowing of the fuel rods could occur if the grid assemblies did not allow axial movement of the fuel rods relative to the grids. Thermal expansion of the fuel rods is considered in the grid design so that axial loads imposed on the fuel rods during a thermal transient will not result in excessively bowed fuel rods (see Section 4.2.1.2.2).
| |
| 4.4.3.8 Energy Release During Fuel Element Burnout As discussed in Section 4.4.2.3, the core is protected from going through DNB over the full range of possible operating conditions. In the extremely unlikely event that DNB should occur, the clad temperature will rise due to the steam blanketing at the rod surface and the consequent degradation in heat transfer. During this time there is a potential for chemical reaction between the cladding and the coolant. However, because of the relatively good film boiling heat transfer following DNB, the energy release resulting from this reaction is insignificant compared to the power produced by the fuel.
| |
| 4.4-32
| |
| | |
| WBN DNB With Physical Burnout - Westinghouse[72] has conducted DNB tests in a 25 rod bundle where physical burnout occurred with one rod. After this occurrence, the 25 rod test section was used for several days to obtain more DNB data from the other rods in the bundle. The burnout and deformation of the rod did not affect the performance of neighboring rods in the test section during the burnout or the validity of the subsequent DNB data points as predicted by the W-3 correlation. No occurrences of flow instability or other abnormal operation were observed.
| |
| DNB With Return to Nucleate Boiling - Additional DNB tests have been conducted by Westinghouse[83] in 19 and 21 rod bundles. In these tests, DNB without physical burnout was experienced more than once on single rods in the bundles for short periods of time. Each time, a reduction in power of approximately 10% was sufficient to reestablish nucleate boiling on the surface of the rod. During these and subsequent tests, no adverse effects were observed on this rod or any other rod in the bundle as a consequence of operating in DNB.
| |
| 4.4.3.9 Deleted 4.4.3.10 Fuel Rod Behavior-Effects from Coolant Flow Blockage Coolant flow blockages can occur within the coolant channels of a fuel assembly or external to the reactor core. The effects of fuel assembly blockage within the assembly on fuel rod be-havior is more pronounced than external blockages of the same magnitude. In both cases the flow blockages cause local reductions in coolant flow. The amount of local flow reduction, where it occurs in the reactor, and how far along the flow stream the reduction persists are considerations which will influence the fuel rod behavior. The effects of coolant flow blockages in terms of maintaining rated core performance are determined both by analytical and experimental methods. The experimental data are usually used to augment analytical tools such as computer programs similar to the THINC-IV or VIPRE-01 program. Based on the DNB correlation (Section 4.4.2.3), the predicted DNBR is dependent upon the local values of quality and mass velocity.
| |
| The VIPRE-01 code is capable of predicting the effects of local flow blockages on DNBR within the fuel assembly on a sub-channel basis, regardless of where the flow blockage occurs. In Reference [99], it is shown that for a fuel assembly similar to the Westinghouse design, VIPRE-01 accurately predicts the flow distribution within the fuel assembly when the inlet nozzle is completely blocked. Full recovery of the flow was found to occur about 30 inches downstream of the blockage. With the reference reactor operating at the nominal full power conditions specified in Table 4.4-1, the effects of an increase in enthalpy and decrease in mass velocity in the lower portion of the fuel assembly would not result in the reactor violating the DNB design basis.
| |
| 4.4-33
| |
| | |
| WBN From a review of the open literature it is concluded that flow blockage in 'open lattice cores' similar to the Westinghouse cores cause flow perturbations which are local to the blockage. For instance, A. Oktaubo,[84] et al., show that the mean bundle velocity is approached asymptotically about 4 inches downstream from a flow blockage in a single flow cell. Similar results were also found for 2 and 3 cells completely blocked. P. Basmer,[85] et al., tested an open lattice fuel assembly in which 41% of the subchannels were completely blocked in the center of the test bundle between spacer grids. Their results show the stagnant zone behind the flow blockage essentially disappears after 1.65 L/De or about 5 inches for their test bundle. They also found that leakage flow through the blockage tended to shorten the stagnant zone or, in essence, the complete recovery length. Thus, local flow blockages within a fuel assembly have little effect on subchannel enthalpy rise. The reduction in local mass velocity is then the main parameter which affects the DNBR. If the Watts Bar Units 1 and 2 were operating at full power and nominal steady state conditions as specified in Table 4.4-1, a large reduction in local mass velocity would be required to reduce the DNBR to the safety analysis DNBR limit. In reality a local flow blockage is expected to promote turbulence and thus would not adversely affect DNBR at all.[87]
| |
| Coolant flow blockages induce local crossflows as well as promote turbulence. Fuel rod behavior is changed under the influence of a sufficiently high crossflow component. Fuel rod vibration could occur, caused by this crossflow component, through vortex shedding or turbulent mechanisms. If the crossflow velocity exceeds the limit established for fluid elastic stability, large amplitude whirling results. The limits for a controlled vibration mechanism are established from studies of vortex shedding and turbulent pressure fluctuations. The crossflow velocity required to exceed fluid elastic stability limits is dependent on the axial location of the blockage and the characterization of the crossflow (jet flow or not). These limits are greater than those for vibratory fuel rod wear. Crossflow velocity above the established limits can lead to mechanical wear of the fuel rods at the grid support locations. Fuel rod wear due to flow induced vibration is considered in the fuel rod fretting evaluation (Section 4.2).
| |
| 4.4.4 Testing and Verification 4.4.4.1 Tests Prior to Initial Criticality A reactor coolant flow test, as noted in Table 14.2-2 (historical information), is performed following fuel loading but prior to initial criticality. Reactor coolant loop elbow tap differential pressures are measured with all four reactor coolant pumps in operation with reactor temperatures and pressure at normal operating conditions. This data is used to calculate the coolant flow rates. This test verifies, within the accuracy of elbow tap measurements, that proper coolant flow rates have been used in the core thermal and hydraulic analysis.
| |
| For WBN Unit 2, a reactor coolant flow test, as noted in Table 14.2-2, is performed following fuel loading but prior to initial criticality, and will use precision flow calorimetric method for the early fuel cycles, to collect calorimetric data.
| |
| 4.4-34
| |
| | |
| WBN 4.4.4.2 Initial Power and Plant Operation Core power distribution measurements are made during the ascent to power. These tests are used to ensure that conservative peaking factors are used in the core thermal and hydraulic analysis.
| |
| Additional demonstration of the overall conservatism of the THINC analysis was obtained by comparing THINC predictions to incore thermocouple measurements. These measurements were performed on the Zion reactor.[86] No further in-reactor testing is planned. VIPRE-01 has been confirmed to be as conservative as the THINC code in Reference [100].
| |
| 4.4.4.3 Component and Fuel Inspections Inspections performed on the manufactured fuel are delineated in Section 4.2.1.4. Fabrication measurements critical to thermal and hydraulic analysis are obtained to verify that the engineering hot channel factors employed in the design analyses (Section 4.4.2.3.4) are met.
| |
| 4.4.5 Instrumentation Application 4.4.5.1 Incore Instrumentation Instrumentation is located in the core to obtain radial, axial, and azimuthal core characteristics for all core quadrants by correlating movable neutron detector information with fixed thermocouple information, or using fixed incore neutron detector information.
| |
| The incore instrumentation system is comprised of thermocouples, positioned to measure fuel assembly coolant outlet temperatures at preselected positions, and fission chamber detectors or fixed incore detectors positioned in instrument thimbles which run the length of selected fuel assemblies to measure the neutron flux distribution. The fixed incore detectors provide a continuous capability to generate a core power distribution using the Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS). Figure 4.4-4 (Unit 1) and Figure 4.4-6 (Unit 2) shows the number and location of instrumented assemblies in the core.
| |
| For WBN Unit 1 the core-exit thermocouples provide a backup to the flux monitoring instrumentation for monitoring power distribution. The routine, systematic collection of thermocouple readings by the operator provides a data base. From this data base, abnormally high or abnormally low readings, quadrant temperature tilts, or systematic departures from a prior reference map can be deduced.
| |
| For WBN Unit 1 the movable incore neutron detector system would be used for more detailed mapping if the thermocouple system were to indicate an abnormality. These two complementary systems are more useful when taken together than either system alone would be.
| |
| 4.4-35
| |
| | |
| WBN For WBN Unit 2 the thermocouples located within the Incore Instrumentation Thimble Assemblies provide core exit temperatures to be used by operators for monitoring during postulated accidents. The thermocouples are located at the top of the IITA which is positioned just below the bottom of the fuel assembly top nozzle.
| |
| In addition to these two complementary instrumentation systems, the Power Distribution Monitoring System (PDMS) can be used to obtain detailed incore power distribution measurements. The PDMS receives on-line values for power range neutron flux, reactor power, RCS cold leg temperatures, control bank positions, and core exit thermocouple temperatures coupled with a three-dimensional analytical model to yield a continuously measured three-dimensional power distribution. The movable or fixed incore detectors are used to calibrate the PDMS. The incore instrumentation system is described in more detail in Section 7.7.1.9.
| |
| The incore instrumentation is provided to obtain data from which fission power density distribution in the core, coolant enthalpy distribution in the core, and fuel burnup distribution may be determined.
| |
| 4.4.5.2 Overtemperature and Overpower T Instrumentation The overtemperature T trip protects the core against low DNBR. The overpower T trip protects against excessive power (fuel rod rating protection).
| |
| As discussed in Section 7.2.1.1.2, factors included in establishing the overtemperature T and overpower T trip setpoints include the reactor coolant temperature in each loop and the axial distribution of core power (for overtemperature T only) through the use of the two-section excore neutron detectors.
| |
| 4.4.5.3 Instrumentation to Limit Maximum Power Output The output of the three ranges (source, intermediate, and power) of detectors, with the electronics of the nuclear instruments, are used to limit the maximum power output of the reactor within their respective ranges.
| |
| There are six radial locations containing a total of six neutron flux detectors installed around the reactor in the primary shield, two fission chamber detectors for the source range and intermediate installed on opposite "flat" portions of the core containing the primary startup sources; four dual section uncompensated ionization chamber assemblies for the power range installed vertically at the four corners of the core and located equidistant from the reactor vessel at all points and, to minimize neutron flux pattern distortions, within one foot of the reactor vessel. Each power range detector provides two signals corresponding to the neutron flux in the upper and in the lower sections of a core quadrant. The three ranges of detectors are used as inputs to monitor neutron flux from a completely shutdown condition up to 200% of full power.
| |
| 4.4-36
| |
| | |
| WBN The difference in neutron flux between the upper and lower sections of the power range detectors are used to limit the overtemperature T trip setpoint and to provide the operator with an indication of the core power axial offset. In addition, the output of the power range channels are used for:
| |
| : 1. The rod speed control function,
| |
| : 2. To alert the operator to an excessive power unbalance between the quadrants,
| |
| : 3. Protect the core against rod ejection accidents, and
| |
| : 4. Protect the core against adverse power distributions resulting from dropped rods.
| |
| Details of the neutron detectors and nuclear instrumentation design and the control and trip logic are given in Chapter 7. The limits on neutron flux operation and trip setpoints are given in the Technical Specifications.
| |
| 4.4-37
| |
| | |
| WBN REFERENCES
| |
| : 1. Christensen, J. A., Allio, R. J. and Biancheria, A., "Melting Point of Irradiated UO2,"
| |
| WCAP-6065, February 1965.
| |
| : 2. Risher, D. H., "An Evaluation of the Rod Ejection Accident in Westinghouse Pressurized Water Reactors Using Spatial Kinetics Methods," WCAP-7588, Revision 1-A, January 1975.
| |
| : 3. Supplemental information on fuel design transmitted from R. Salvatori, Westinghouse NES, to D. Knuth, AEC, as attachments to letter NS-SL-518 (12/22/72), NS-SL-521 (12/29/72), NS-SL-524 (12/29/72) and NS-SL-543 (1/12/73), (Westinghouse Proprietary), and supplemental information on fuel design transmitted from R. Salvatori, Westinghouse NES, to D. Knuth, AEC, as attachments to letters NS-SL-527 (1/12/73) and NS-SL-544 (1/12/73).
| |
| : 4. Deleted
| |
| : 5. Deleted
| |
| : 6. Deleted
| |
| : 7. Kjaerheim, G. and Rolstad, E., "In Pile Determination of UO2 Thermal Conductivity, Density Effects and Gap Conductance," HPR-80, December 1967.
| |
| : 8. Kjaerheim, G., "In-Pile Measurements of Center Fuel Temperatures and Thermal Conductivity Determination of Oxide Fuels," paper IFA-175 presented at the European Atomic Energy Society Symposium on Performance Experience of Water-Cooled Power Reactor Fuel, Stockholm, Sweden (October 21-22, 1969).
| |
| : 9. Cohen, I., Lustman, B. and Eichenberg, D., "Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity of Metal-Clad Uranium Oxide Rods during Irradiation," WAPD-228, 1960.
| |
| : 10. Clough, D. J. and Sayers, J. B., "The Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity of UO2 Under Irradiation in the Temperature Range 150-1600°C," AERE-R-4690, UKAEA Research Group, Harwell, December 1964.
| |
| : 11. Stora, J. P., Debernardy, DeSigoyer, B., Delmas, R., Deschamps, P., Ringot, C. and Lavaud, B., "Thermal Conductivity of Sintered Uranium Oxide Under In-Pile Conditions."
| |
| EURAEC-1095, 1964.
| |
| : 12. Devold, I., "A Study of the Temperature Distribution in UO2 Reactor Fuel Elements,"
| |
| AE-3183 Aktiebolaget Atomenergi, Stockholm, Sweden, 1968.
| |
| : 13. Balfour, M. G., Christensen, J. A. and Ferrari., H. M., "In-Pile Measurement of UO2 Thermal Conductivity," WCAP-2923, 1966.
| |
| 4.4-38
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 14. Duncan, R. N., "Rabbit Capsule Irradiation of UO2", CVTR Project, CVNA-142, June 1962.
| |
| : 15. Nelson, R. C., Coplin, D. H., Lyons, M. F. and Weidenbaum, B., "Fission Gas Release from UO2 Fuel Rods with Gross Central Melting," GEAP-4572, July 1964.
| |
| : 16. Howard, V. C., and Gulvin, T. G., "Thermal Conductivity Determinations on Uranium Dioxide by a Radial Flow Method", UKAEA IG-Report 51, November 1960.
| |
| : 17. Lucks, C. F., and Deem, H. W., "Thermal Conductivity and Electrical Conductivity of UO2," In-Progress Reports Relating to Civilian Applications, BMI-1448 (Rev.) for June 1960; BMI-1489 (Rev.) for December 1960 and BMI-1518 (Rev.) for May 1961.
| |
| : 18. Daniel, J. L., Matolich, Jr., J., and Deem, H. W., "Thermal Conductivity of UO2,"
| |
| HW-69945, September 1962.
| |
| : 19. Feith, A. D., "Thermal Conductivity of UO2 by a Radial Heat Flow Method" TID-21668, 1962.
| |
| : 20. Vogt, J., Grandell L. and Runfors, U., "Determination of the Thermal Conductivity of Unirradiated Uranium Dioxide," AB Atomenergi Report RMB-527, 1964, Quoted by IAEA Technical Report Series No. 59, "Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide"
| |
| : 21. Nishijima, T., Kawada, T. and Ishihata, A., "Thermal Conductivity of Sintered UO2 and Al2O3, at High Temperatures," J. American Ceramic Society, 48, 31-34 (1965).
| |
| : 22. Ainscough, J. B. and Wheeler, M. J., "The Thermal Diffusivity and Thermal Conductivity of Sintered Uranium Dioxide," in Proceedings of the Seventh Conference of Thermal Conductivity, p. 467, National Bureau of Standards, Washington, 1968.
| |
| : 23. Godfrey, T. G., Fulkerson, W., Killie, T. G., Moore, J. P. and McElroy, D. L. "Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide and Armco Iron by an Improved Radial Heat Flow Technique," ORNL-3556, June 1964.
| |
| : 24. Stora, J. P., et al., "Thermal Conductivity of Sintered Uranium Oxide Under In-Pile Conditions," EURAEC-1095, August 1964.
| |
| : 25. Bush, A. J., "Apparatus for Measuring Thermal Conductivity to 2500°C," Westinghouse Research Laboratories Report 64-lP6-4Ol-R3, February 1965. (Proprietary)
| |
| : 26. Asamoto, R. R., Anselm, F. L. and Conti, A. E., "The Effect of Density on the Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide," GEAP-5493, April 1968.
| |
| : 27. Kruger, O. L . "Heat Transfer Properties of Uranium and Plutonium Dioxide," Paper 11-N-68F presented at the Fall meeting of Nuclear Division of the American Ceramic Society, September, 1968, Pittsburgh.
| |
| 4.4-39
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 28. Gyllander, J. A., "In-Pile Determination of the Thermal Conductivity of UO2 in the Range 500-2500°C," AE-411, January 1971.
| |
| : 29. Lyons, M. F., et al., U02 Powder and Pellet Thermal Conductivity During Irradiation,"
| |
| GEAP-5100-1, March 1966.
| |
| : 30. Coplin, D. H., et al., "The Thermal Conductivity of UO2 by Direct In-reactor Measurements," GEAP-5100-6, March 1968.
| |
| : 31. Bain, A. S., "The Heat Rating Required to Produce Center Melting in Various UO2 Fuels," ASTM Special Technical Publication, No. 306, pp. 30-46, Philadelphia, 1962.
| |
| : 32. Stora, J. P., "In-Reactor Measurements of the Integrated Thermal Conductivity of UO2 -
| |
| Effect of Porosity," Trans. ANS, 13, 137-138 (1970).
| |
| : 33. International Atomic Energy Agency, "Thermal Conductivity of Uranium Dioxide," Report of the Panel held in Vienna, April 1965, IAEA Technical Reports Series, No. 59, Vienna, The Agency, 1966.
| |
| : 34. Poncelet, C. G., "Burnup Physics of Heterogeneous Reactor Latices, WCAP-6069, June 1965.
| |
| : 35. Nodvick, R. J., "Saxton Core II Fuel Performance Evaluation," WCAP-3385-56, Part II, "Evaluation of Mass Spectrometric and Radiochemical Analyses of Irradiated Saxton Plutonium Fuel," July 1970.
| |
| : 36. Deleted
| |
| : 37. Deleted
| |
| : 38. Tong, L. S., "Boiling Heat Transfer and Two-Phase Flow," John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1965.
| |
| : 39. Tong, L. S., "Boiling Crisis and Critical Heat Flux," AEC Critical Review Series, TID-25887, 1972.
| |
| : 40. Tong, L. S., "Critical Heat Fluxes on Rod Bundles," in "Two-Phase Flow and Heat Transfer in Rod Bundles," pp. 31-41, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, 1969.
| |
| : 41. Chelemer, H., Weisman, J. and Tong, L. S., "Subchannel Thermal Analysis of Rod Bundle Cores," WCAP-7015., Revision 1, January 1969.
| |
| : 42. Deleted 4.4-40
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 43. Motley, F. E. and Cadek, F. F., "DNB Test Results for R Grid Thimble Cold Wall Cells,"
| |
| WCAP-7695-Addendum 1-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7958-Addendum 1-A (Non-Proprietary), January 1975.
| |
| : 44. Tong, L. S., "Prediction of Departure from Nucleate Boiling for an Axially Non-Uniform Heat Flux Distribution," J. Nucl. Energy, 21, 241-248 (1967).
| |
| : 45. Deleted
| |
| : 46. Cadek, F. F., Motley, F. E. and Dominicis, D. P., "Effect of Axial Spacing on Interchannel Thermal Mixing with the R Mixing Vane Grid," WCAP-7941-P-A (Proprietary), and WCAP-7959-A (Non-Proprietary), January 1975.
| |
| : 47. Rowe, D. S., Angle, C. W., "Crossflow Mixing Between Parallel Flow Channels During Boiling, Part II Measurement of Flow and Enthalpy in Two Parallel Channels,"
| |
| BNWL-371, part 2, December 1967.
| |
| : 48. Rowe, D. S., Angle, C. W., "Crossflow Mixing Between Parallel Flow Channels During Boiling, Part III Effect of Spacers on Mixing Between Two Channels," BNWL-371, part 3, January 1969.
| |
| : 49. Gonzalez-Santalo, J. M. and Griffith, P., "Two-Phase Flow Mixing in Rod Bundle Subchannels," ASME Paper 72-WA/NE-19.
| |
| : 50. Motley, F. E., Wenzel, A. H., Cadek, F. F., "The Effect of 17 x 17 Fuel Assembly Geometry on Interchannel Thermal Mixing," WCAP-8298-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8299-A, January 1975.
| |
| : 51. Cadek, F. F., "Interchannel Thermal Mixing with Mixing Vane Grids," WCAP-7667-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7755-A (Non-Proprietary), January 1975.
| |
| : 52. Hochreiter, L. E., "Application of the THINC IV Program to PWR Design," WCAP-8054 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8195 (Non-Proprietary), October 1973.
| |
| : 53. Dittus, F. W., and Boelter, L. M. K., "Heat Transfer in Automobile Radiators of the Tubular Type," Calif. Univ. Publication in Eng., 2, No. 13, 443-461 (1930).
| |
| : 54. Weisman, J., "Heat Transfer to Water Flowing Parallel to Tube Bundles" Nucl. Sci. Eng.,
| |
| 6, 78-79 (1959).
| |
| : 55. Thom, J. R. S., Walker, W. M., Fallon, T. A. and Raising, G. F. S., "Boiling in Subcooled Water During Flow up Heated Tubes or Annuli," Prc. Instn. Mech. Engrs., 180, Pt. 3C, 226-46 (1965-66).
| |
| : 56. Hetsroni, G., "Hydraulic Tests of the San Onofre Reactor Model," WCAP-3269-8, June 1964.
| |
| 4.4-41
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 57. Hetsroni, G., "Studies of the Connecticut-Yankee Hydraulic Model," NYO-3250-2, June 1965.
| |
| : 58. Idel'chik, I. E., "Handbook of Hydraulic Resistance," AEC-TR-6630, 1960.
| |
| : 59. Moody, L. F., "Friction Factors for Pipe Flow, "Transaction of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 66, 671-684 (1944).
| |
| : 60. Maurer, G. W., "A Method of Predicting Steady State Boiling Vapor Fractions in Reactor Coolant Channels," WAPD-BT-19, pp. 59-70, June 1960.
| |
| : 61. Griffith, P., Clark, J. A. and Rohsenow, W. M., "Void Volumes in Subcooled Boiling Systems," ASHE Paper No. 58-HT-19.
| |
| : 62. Bowering, R. W., "Physical Model, Based on Bubble Detachment, and Calculation of Steam Voidage in the Subcooled Region of a Heated Channel," HPR-10, December 1962.
| |
| : 63. Hochreiter, L. E., Chelemer H. and Chu, P. T., "THINC-IV An Improved Program for Thermal-Hydraulic Analysis of Rod Bundle Cores," WCAP-7956, June 1973.
| |
| : 64. Carter, F. D., "Inlet Orificing of Open PWR Cores," WCAP-9004 (Proprietary), January 1969 and WCAP-7836 (Non-Proprietary), January 1972.
| |
| : 65. Shefcheck, J., "Application of the THINC Program to PWR Design," WCAP-7359-L (Proprietary), August 1969, and WCAP-7638 (Non-Proprietary), January 1972.
| |
| : 66. Novendstern, E. H. and Sandberg, R. O., "Single Phase Local Boiling and Bulk Boiling Pressure Drop Correlations," WCAP-2850 (Proprietary), April 1966 and WCAP-7916 (Non-Proprietary), June 1972.
| |
| : 67. Owens, Jr., W. L., "Two-Phase Pressure Gradient," in International Developments in Heat Transfer, Part II, pp 363-368, ASME, New York, 1961.
| |
| : 68. McFarlane, A. F., "Power Peaking Factors," WCAP-7912-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-7912-A (Non-Proprietary), January 1975.
| |
| : 69. Deleted
| |
| : 70. Deleted
| |
| : 71. Deleted
| |
| : 72. Weisman, J., Wenzel, A. H., Tong L. S., Fitzsimmons, D., Thorne, W. and Batch, J.,
| |
| "Experimental Determination of the Departure from Nucleate Boiling in Large Rod Bundles at High Pressures," Chem. Eng. Prog. Symp. Ser. 64, No. 82, 114-125 (1968).
| |
| 4.4-42
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 73. Boure, J. A., Bergles, A. E., and Tong, L. S., "Review of Two-Phase Flow Instability,"
| |
| ASME Paper 71-HT-42, August 1971.
| |
| : 74. Lahey, R. T., and Moody, F. J., "The Thermal Hydraulics of a Boiling Water Reactor,"
| |
| American Nuclear Society, 1977.
| |
| : 75. Saha, P., Ishii, B., and Zuber, N., "An Experimental Investigation of the Thermally Induced Flow Oscillations in Two-Phase Systems," J. of Heat Transfer, November 1976, pp. 616-622.
| |
| : 76. Virgil C. Summer FSAR, Docket No. 50-395.
| |
| : 77. Braidwood/Byron FSAR, Docket No. 50-456.
| |
| : 78. South Texas FSAR, Docket No. 50-498.
| |
| : 79. Kakac, S., Veziroglu, T. N., Akyuzlu, K., and Berkol, O., "Sustained and Transient Boiling Flow Instabilities in a Cross-Connected Four-Parallel-Channel Upflow System,"
| |
| Proc. of 5th International Heat Transfer Conference, Tokyo, Sept. 3-7, 1974.
| |
| : 80. Kao, H. S., Morgan, C. D., and Parker, W. B., "Prediction of Flow Oscillation in Reactor Core Channel," Trans. ANS, Vol. 16, 1973, pp. 212-213.
| |
| : 81. Stephan, L. A., "The Effects of Cladding Material and Heat Treatment on the Response of Waterlogged UO2 Fuel Rods to Power Bursts," IN-ITR-III, January 1970.
| |
| : 82. Western New York Nuclear Research Center correspondence with the AEC on February 11 and August 27, 1971, Docket 50-57.
| |
| : 83. Tong, L. S., et al., "Critical Heat Flux (DNB) in Square and Triangular Array Rod Bundles," presented at the Japan Society of Mechanical Engineers Semi-International Symposium held at Tokyo, Japan, September 4-8, 1967, pp. 25-34.
| |
| : 84. Ohtsubo, A., and Uruwashi, S., "Stagnant Fluid Due to Local Flow Blockage," J. Nucl.
| |
| Sci. Technol., 9, No. 7, 433-434, (1972).
| |
| : 85. Basmer, P., Kirsh, D. and Schultheiss, G. F., "Investigation of the Flow Pattern in the Recirculation Zone Downstream of Local Coolant Blockages in Pin Bundles,"
| |
| Atomwirtschaft, 17, No. 8, 416-417, (1972). (In German).
| |
| : 86. Burke, T. M., Meyer, C. E. and Shefcheck J., "Analysis of Data from the Zion (Unit 1)
| |
| THINC Verification Test," WCAP-8453-P-A (Proprietary) and WCAP-8454-A (Non-Proprietary), December 1974.
| |
| : 87. Hill, K. W., Motley, F. E., Cadek, F. F., and Castulin, J. E., "Effects on Critical Heat Flux of Local Heat Flux spikes on Local Flow Blockage in Pressurized Water Reactor Rod Bundles," ASME Paper 74-WA/BT-54, August 12, 1974.
| |
| 4.4-43
| |
| | |
| WBN
| |
| : 88. Skaritka, J. (Ed.), "Fuel Rod Bow Evaluation," WCAP-8691 Revision 1, July 1979.
| |
| : 89. "Partial Response to Request Number 1 for Additional Information on WCAP-8691, Revision 1" letter, E. P. Rahe, Jr., (Westinghouse) to J. R. Miller (NRC) , NS-EPR-2515, dated October 9, 1981; "Remaining Response to Request Number 1 for Additional Information on WCAP-8691, Revision 1" letter, E. P. Rahe, Jr., (Westinghouse) to J. R.
| |
| Miller (NRC), NS-EPR-2572, dated March 16, 1982.
| |
| : 90. Letter from J. F. Stolz (NRC) to C. Eicheldinger (Westinghouse);
| |
| | |
| ==Subject:==
| |
| Staff Evaluation of WCAP-7956, WCAP-8054, WCAP-8567, and WCAP-8762; dated April 19, 1978.
| |
| : 91. Motley, F. E., Hill, K. W., Cadek, F. F., and Shefcheck, J., "New Westinghouse Correlation WRB-1 for Predicting Critical Heat Flux in Rod Bundles with Mixing Vane Grids," WCAP-8762-P-A, July 1984.
| |
| : 92. Davidson, S. L., ed., et. al., "VANTAGE 5H Fuel Assembly," WCAP-10444-P-A, Addendum 2A, April 1988. (Applicable to Unit 1 Only)
| |
| : 93. Leech, W.J., et. al, "Revised PAD Code Thermal Safety Model," WCAP-8720, Addendum 2, October 1982.
| |
| : 94. Letter from A. C. Thadani (NRC) to W. J. Johnson (Westinghouse), January 31, 1989,
| |
| | |
| ==Subject:==
| |
| Acceptance for Referencing of Licensing Topical Report, WCAP-9226-P/9227-NP, "Reactor Core Response to Excessive Secondary Steam Releases."
| |
| : 95. Letter from C. Berlinger (NRC) to E. P. Rahe, Jr. (Westinghouse),
| |
| | |
| ==Subject:==
| |
| "Request for Reduction in Fuel Assembly Burnup Limit for Calculation of Maximum Rod Bow Penalty,"
| |
| June 18, 1986.
| |
| : 96. Friedland, A. J., Ray, S., "Improved THINC-IV Modeling for PWR Core Design," WCAP-12330-A, September 1991.
| |
| : 97. Davidson, S. L., (ed.), et.al., "VANTAGE 5 Fuel Assembly," WCAP-10444-P-A, September, 1985.
| |
| : 98. Friedland, A. J. and Ray, S., Revised Thermal Design Procedure, WCAP-11397-P-A, April 1989.
| |
| : 99. Stewart, C. W., et al., VIPRE-01: A Thermal-Hydraulic Code for Reactor Core, Volume 1-3 (Revision 3, August 1989), Volume 4 (April 1987), NP-2511-CCM-A, Electric Power Research Institute.
| |
| 100. Sung, Y. X., et al., VIPRE-01 Modeling and Qualification for Pressurized Water Reactor Non-LOCA Thermal-Hydraulic Safety Analysis, WCAP-14565-P-A and WCAP-15306-NP-A, October 1999.
| |
| 4.4-44
| |
| | |
| WBN-1 101. L. D. Smith, et al., Modified WRB-2 Correlation, WRB-2M, for Predicting Critical Heat Flux in 17 x 17 Rod Bundles with Modified LPD Mixing Vane Grids, WCAP-15025-P-A, April 1999.
| |
| 102. Letter from H. A. Sepp (Westinghouse) to J. S., Wermiel (NRC), Fuel Criterion Evaluation Process (FCEP) Notification of the RFA-2 Design, Revision 1 (Proprietary),
| |
| LTR-NRC-02-55, November 13, 2002.
| |
| 103. S. L. Davidson, J. A. Lori, (Ed), Reference Core Report - 17 x 17 Optimized Fuel Assembly, WCAP-9500-A, May 1982. (Applicable to Unit 1 Only) 104. Letter from E. P. Rahe (W) to Miller (NRC) dated March 19, 1982, NS-EPR-2573, WCAP-9500 and WCAP-9401 and WCAP-9402, NRC SER Mixed Core Compatibility Items. (Applicable to Unit 1 Only) 105. Letter from C. O., Thomas (NRC) to Rahe (W), Supplemental Acceptance No. 2 for Referencing Topical Report, WCAP-9500, January 1983. (Applicable to Unit 1 Only) 106. P. Schueren, K. R. Mctee, Extension of Methodology for Calculating Transition Core DBN Penalties, WCAP-11837-P-A, January 1990. (Applicable to Unit 1 Only) 107. J. P. Foster, S. Sidener, Westinghouse Improved Performance Analysis and Design Model (PAD 4.0), WCAP-15063-P-A, Revision 1, with Errata, July 2000.
| |
| 108. WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, August 1994.
| |
| 109. WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, Addendum 1-A, January 2000.
| |
| 110. WCAP-12472-P-A, BEACON Core Monitoring and Operations Support System, Addendum 4-A, September 2012.
| |
| 111. Letter from D. S. Collins (USNRC) to J. A. Gresham (Westinghouse), Modified WRB-2 Correlation WRB-2M for Predicting Critical Heat Flux in 17x17 Rod Bundles with Modified LPD Mixing Vane Grids, February 3, 2006.
| |
| 112. Joffre, P.F., et al., Addendum 2 to WCAP-14565-P-A, Extended Application of ABB-NV Correlation and Modified ABB-NV Correlation WLOP for PWR Low Pressure Applications, WCAQP-14565-P-A Addendum 2-P-A (Proprietary / WCAP-15306-NP-A Addendum 2-NP-A (Non-Proprietary), April 2008.
| |
| 4.4-45
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.4-1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
| |
| THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC COMPARISON TABLE
| |
| [f]
| |
| Watts Bar Watts Bar W. B. McGuire Design Parameters Unit 1 Unit 2 Units 1 and 2 Reactor Core Heat Output, MWt 3459 3411 3411 Reactor Core Heat Output, 106 BTU/hr 11,803 11,639 11,641.7 Heat Generated in Fuel, % 97.4 97.4 97.4 System Pressure, Nominal, psia 2250 2250 2250 System Pressure, Minimum Steady State, psia 2200 2200 2220 Minimum DNBR at Nominal Conditions Typical Flow Channel 2.89 >2.89 2.05 Thimble (Cold Wall) Flow Channel 2.82 >2.82 1.72 Minimum DNBR for Design Transients Typical Channel >1.25 (V+/P+) 1.23 (RFA-2) 1.23 >1.30 Thimble Channel >1.24 (V+/P+) 1.23 (RFA-2) 1.23 DNB Correlation WRB-1 (V+/P+) WRB-2M R(W-3 with modified spacer WRB-2M (RFA-2) factor)
| |
| Coolant Flow (Based on Thermal Design Flow (TDF) 6 Total Thermal Flow Rate, 10 lb/hr 138.5 138.5 144.8 Effective Flow Rate for Heat 6
| |
| Transfer, 10 lb/hr 125.2 125.2 133.9 Effective Flow Area for Heat 2
| |
| Transfer, ft 51.1 51.1 51.1 Average Velocity Along Fuel Rods, ft/sec 14.7 14.7 16.6 6 2 Average Mass Velocity, 10 lb/hr-ft 2.45 2.45 2.62
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.4-1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
| |
| THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC COMPARISON TABLE
| |
| [f]
| |
| Watts Bar Watts Bar W. B. McGuire Design Parameters Unit 1 Unit 2 Units 1 and 2 Coolant Flow (based on Minimum Measured Flow (MMF))
| |
| Total Thermal flow rate (106 lb/hr) 141.0 141.0 Coolant Temperature Nominal Inlet, °F 557.3 557.8 559.1 Average Rise in Vessel, °F 61.8 60.8 58.2 Average Rise in Core, °F 67.5 66.5 62.5 Average in Core, °F 593.1 593.0 592.0 Average in Vessel, °F 588.2 588.2 588.2 Heat Transfer Active Heat Transfer, Surface Area, ft 2 59,700 59,700 59,700 Average Heat Flux, BTU/hr-ft 2 192,500 189,800 189,800 Maximum Heat Flux for Normal [e] [e] [c]
| |
| Operation, BTU/hr-ft 2 481,300 481,300 440,300
| |
| [d] [d]
| |
| Average Thermal Output, kW/ft 5.52 5.52 5.44
| |
| [e] [e]
| |
| Maximum Thermal Output for 13.8 13.8
| |
| [c]
| |
| Normal Operation, kW/ft 12.6 Peak Linear Power for Determination 22.4 22.4 of Protection Setpoints, kW/ft[b] 18.0 Fuel Central Temperature Peak at 100% Power, °F 3290 <3290 3250 Peak at Thermal Output Maximum for Maximum Overpower Trip Point, °F 4700 4700 4150
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.4-1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
| |
| THERMAL AND HYDRAULIC COMPARISON TABLE
| |
| [f]
| |
| Watts Bar Watts Bar W. B. McGuire Design Parameters Unit 1 Unit 2 Units 1 and 2 Pressure Drop[a]
| |
| Across Core, psi 26.1 + 2.6 27.3 + 2.7 25.8 + 3.9 Across Vessel, including nozzle, psi 45.7 + 6.9 48.1 + 7.2 46.7 + 7.0
| |
| [a] Based on best estimate reactor flow rate as discussed in Section 5.1
| |
| [b] See Section 4.3.2.2.6
| |
| [c] This limit is associated with the value of FQ = 2.32
| |
| [d] Based on densified active fuel length (143.7 inches).
| |
| [e] This limit is associated with FQ = 2.50 (See COLR for cycle specific value).
| |
| [f] Cycle 1
| |
| | |
| WBN TABLE 4.4-2 VOID FRACTIONS AT NOMINAL REACTOR CONDITIONS*
| |
| WITH DESIGN HOT CHANNEL FACTORS Average % Maximum %
| |
| Core <0.01% --
| |
| Hot Sub-channel <1.0% 3.7
| |
| * Based on RTDP nominal conditions
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Thermal Conductivity of UO2 (Data Corrected to 95%
| |
| Theoretical Density)
| |
| FIGURE 4.4-1
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison of Measured Versus Predicted Critical Heat Flux for the WRB-1 Correlation FIGURE 4.4-2
| |
| | |
| Measured vs. Predicted CHF Modified LPD w/ and w/o MIFMs (241 Pts)
| |
| WRB-EM Correlations 1.2 1
| |
| Meas. CHF (MBTU/hr-ft 2)
| |
| M=P 0.8 95/95*
| |
| 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 Predicted CHF, WRBSM (MBTU/hrft2)
| |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Comparison of Measured Versus Predicted Critical Heat Flux for the WRB-2M Correlation FIGURE 4.4-2a
| |
| | |
| 1.4 1.2 Data in WCAP-14565-P-A, Addendum 1-A Qualification Test Data with VIPRE 1
| |
| Measured CHF, MBtu/hr-ft2 0.8 One-Sided 95/95 DNBR 0.6 Tolerance Limit for DNBR95/95 of 1.13 0.4 0.2 0
| |
| 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 2
| |
| Predicted CHF, MBtu/hr-ft Amendement 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Measured Versus Predicted Critical Heat Flux ABB-NV Correlation FIGURE 4.4-2b
| |
| | |
| 1.4 1.2 1
| |
| Measured CHF, MBtu/hr-ft2 0.8 0.6 One-Sided 95/95 DNBR Tolerance Limit for DNBR95/95 of 1.18 0.4 0.2 0
| |
| 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 WLOP Predicted CHF, MBtu/hr-ft2 Amendement 1 WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Measured Versus Predicted Critical Heat Flux WLOP Correlation FIGURE 4.4-2c
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT TDC Versus Reynolds Number for 26 Grid Spacing FIGURE 4.4-3
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Distribution of In-Core Instrumentation FIGURE 4.4-4
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Typical DNBR Evaluation of 100%
| |
| Power Shapes at Conditions Representative of Loss of Flow FIGURE 4.4-5
| |
| | |
| WATTS BAR NUCLEAR PLANT FINAL SAFETY ANALYSIS REPORT Location of Incore Instrumentation System Fixed Incore Detector Core Exit Thermocouples and IITAs (Unit 2)
| |
| FIGURE 4.4-6}}
| |
